Panasonic FP-X Manual PDF

Ramco National www.PanasonicSensors.
com 1-800-280-6933
Safety Precautions
Observe the following notices to ensure personal safety or to prevent accidents.
To ensure that you use this product correctly, read this User’s Manual thoroughly before use.
Make sure that you fully understand the product and information on safety.
This manual uses two safety flags to indicate different levels of danger.
WARNING
If critical situations that could lead to user’s death or serious injury is assumed by
mishandling of the product.
-Always take precautions to ensure the overall safety of your system, so that the whole
system remains safe in the event of failure of this product or other external factor.
-Do not use this product in areas with inflammable gas. It could lead to an explosion.
-Exposing this product to excessive heat or open flames could cause damage to the lithium
battery or other electronic parts.
-Battery may explode if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of fire.
CAUTION
If critical situations that could lead to user’s injury or only property damage is
assumed by mishandling of the product.
-To prevent excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation, use this product at the values
less than the maximum of the characteristics and performance that are assured in these
specifications.
-Do not dismantle or remodel the product. It could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke
generation.
-Do not touch the terminal while turning on electricity. It could lead to an electric shock.
-Use the external devices to function the emergency stop and interlock circuit.
-Connect the wires or connectors securely.
The loose connection could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation.
-Ground the protective earth (PE) terminal (Class D grounding). Failure to do so could lead to
an electric shock.
-Do not allow foreign matters such as liquid, flammable materials, metals to go into the inside
of the product. It could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation.
-Do not undertake construction (such as connection and disconnection) while the power
supply is on. It could lead to an electric shock.
Copyright / Trademarks
-This manual and its contents are copyrighted.
-You may not copy this manual, in whole or part, without written consent of Panasonic
Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.
-Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other
countries.
-Ethernet is a registered trademark of Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. and Xerox Corp.
-All other company names and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective owners.
PLC_FPX
Ramco National www.PanasonicSensors.com 1-800-280-6933

Table of Contents
Before You Start
Differences in Functions Between Versions of Controller
Restriction on using the Add-on cassette
Programming Tool Restrictions
1. Features, Functions and Restrictions ................................................... 1-1

1.1 Features and Functions of the Unit ............................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Unit Types ........................................................................................................................ 1-6
1.3 Restrictions on Unit Combinations ............................................................................. 1-10
1.4 Programming Tools ....................................................................................................... 1-14
2. Specifications and Functions of Control Unit ...................................... 2-1

2.1 Parts and Functions ........................................................................................................ 2-2
2.2 Power Supply Specifications ......................................................................................... 2-5
2.3 Input Specifications ........................................................................................................ 2-6
2.4 Output Specifications ..................................................................................................... 2-8
2.5 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input/Output On Points ........................... 2-11
2.6 Terminal Layout ............................................................................................................. 2-20
3. Expansion Cassette and Expansion FP0 Adapter Specifications ...... 3-1

3.1 Expansion Method ........................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 FP-X Expansion Unit ....................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3 FP-X Expansion FP0 Adapter ....................................................................................... 3-11
4. I/O Allocation ........................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 I/O Allocation.................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 Allocation of FP-X Control Unit ...................................................................................... 4-3
4.3 FP0 Expansion Unit Allocation ...................................................................................... 4-3
4.4 Allocation of FP0 Expansion Unit .................................................................................. 4-4
4.5 I/O Allocation of FP-X Add-on Cassette ........................................................................ 4-6
5. Installation and Wiring ........................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Installation ........................................................................................................................ 5-2
5.2 Installation Using Expansion Cable............................................................................... 5-5
5.3 Expansion Method of FP0 Expansion Unit ................................................................... 5-8
5.4 How to Install Add-on Cassette...................................................................................... 5-9
5.5 Power Supply ................................................................................................................. 5-11
5.6 Wiring of Input and Output ........................................................................................... 5-17
5.7 Wiring of Terminal Block .............................................................................................. 5-20
5.8 Wiring of Add-on Cassette Terminal Block ................................................................ 5-22

5.9 Handling of Backup Battery.......................................................................................... 5-25
5.10 Safety Measures .......................................................................................................... 5-29
6. Tool Port and USB Port .......................................................................... 6-1

6.1 Tool Port and USB Port ...................................................................................................6-2
6.2 Functions of Tool Port .................................................................................................... 6-3
6.3 USB Port ........................................................................................................................... 6-6
7. Communication Cassette ....................................................................... 7-1

7.1 Functions and Types ....................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2 Communication Specifications .................................................................................... 7-16
7.3 Communication Function 1: Computer Link............................................................... 7-20
7.4 Communication Function 2: General-purpose Serial Communication .................... 7-36
7.5 Communication Function 3: PC(PLC) Link ................................................................. 7-56
7.6 Communication Function 4: MODBUS RTU Communication ................................... 7-75
7.7 Ethernet Communication (AFPX-COM5) ..................................................................... 7-81
8. Application Cassette............................................................................... 8-1

8.1 Expansion of Application Cassette ............................................................................... 8-2
8.2 Application Cassettes ..................................................................................................... 8-3
8.3 Specifications .................................................................................................................. 8-5
9. High-speed Counter, Pulse Output and PWM Output Functions (For Tr

Type) ............................................................................................................ 9-1
9.1 Overview of Each Functions........................................................................................... 9-2
9.3 High-speed Counter Function ...................................................................................... 9-11
9.4 Pulse Output Function .................................................................................................. 9-19
9.5 PWM Output Function (Pulse I/O Cassette) ................................................................ 9-51
10. High-speed counter, Pulse Output and PWM Output functions (For Ry
Type) .......................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1 Overview of Each Functions....................................................................................... 10-2
10.3 High-speed Counter Function .................................................................................... 10-9
10.4 Pulse Output Function (Pulse I/O Cassette) ........................................................... 10-20
10.5 PWM Output Function (Pulse I/O Cassette) ............................................................ 10-51
11. Security Functions .............................................................................. 11-1

11.1 Type of Security Functions......................................................................................... 11-2
11.2 Password Protect Function ........................................................................................ 11-3
11.3 Upload Protection ........................................................................................................ 11-7
11.4 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader ................................................................... 11-9
11.5 Table of Security Settings/Cancel............................................................................ 11-13
ii

12. Other Functions .................................................................................. 12-1
12.1 Transfer Function between Memories ....................................................................... 12-2
12.2 Function of Master Memory Cassette........................................................................ 12-3
12.3 P13 (ICWT) Instruction ................................................................................................ 12-8
12.4 Analog Potentiometer ................................................................................................. 12-9
12.5 Sampling Trace Function.......................................................................................... 12-10
12.6 Time Constant Processing ....................................................................................... 12-13
13. Self-Diagnostic and Troubleshooting ............................................... 13-1

13.1 Self-Diagnostic function ............................................................................................. 13-2
13.2 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................... 13-4
14. Precautions During Programming..................................................... 14-1

14.1 Use of Duplicated Output ........................................................................................... 14-2
14.2 Handling BCD Data ...................................................................................................... 14-4
14.3 Handling Index Registers ........................................................................................... 14-5
14.4 Operation Errors .......................................................................................................... 14-7
14.5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method........................................................ 14-9
14.6 Precautions for Programming .................................................................................. 14-13
14.7 Rewrite Function During RUN .................................................................................. 14-14
14.8 Processing During Forced Input and Output ......................................................... 14-19
15. Specifications ..................................................................................... 15-1

15.1 Table of Specifications ............................................................................................... 15-2
15.2 Table of I/O Number Allocation ................................................................................ 15-13
15.3 Relays, Memory Areas and Constants .................................................................... 15-16
16. Dimensions ......................................................................................... 16-1

16.1 Dimensions .................................................................................................................. 16-2
16.2 Cable/Adapter Specifications ..................................................................................... 16-4
17. Appendix .............................................................................................. 17-1
17.1 System Registers / Special Internal Relays / SpecialData Registers ..................... 17-2
17.2 Table of Basic Instructions....................................................................................... 17-48
17.3 Table of High-level Instruction ................................................................................. 17-56
17.4 Table of Error codes .................................................................................................. 17-76
17.5 MEWTOCOL-COM Communication Commands..................................................... 17-89
17.6 Hexadecimal/Binary/BCD .......................................................................................... 17-90
17.7 ASCII Codes ............................................................................................................... 17-91
iii

iv

Before You Start
Operating environment (Use the unit within the range of the general specifications when installing)
*Ambient temperatures:0 ~ +55 ℃
*Ambient humidity: 10% to 95% RH (at 25°C, non-condensing)
*Keep the height below 2000m.
*For use in pollution Degree 2 environment.
*Do not use it in the following environments.
- Direct sunlight
- Sudden temperature changes causing condensation.
- Inflammable or corrosive gas.
- Excessive airborne dust, metal particles or saline matter.
- Benzine, paint thinner, alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia
or caustic soda.
- Direct vibration, shock or direct drop of water.
- Influence from power transmission lines, high voltage equipment, power cables, power equipment,
radio transmitters, or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges.
(Min.100mm or less）
Static electricity
-Before touching the unit, always touch a grounded piece of metal in order to discharge static electricity.
-In dry locations, excessive static electricity can cause problems.
Wiring the Power Supply to the Control Unit

- Use a power supply wire that is thicker than 2 mm2 (AWG14), and twist it.
- The unit has sufficient noise immunity against the noise generated on the power line.
However, it is recommended to take measures for reducing noise such as using a isolating transformer
before supplying the power.
- Allocate an independent wiring for each power supplying line, input/output device and operating device.
- If using a power supply without a protective circuit, power should be supplied through a protective
element such as a fuse.
- Be sure to supply power to a control and an expansion units from a single power supply.
Turning on/off of the power of all the units must be conducted simultaneously.
Power supply sequence

In order to protect the power supply sequence, make sure to turn off the control unit before the
input/output power supply. If the input/output power supply is turned off before the control unit, or if the
control unit is not shut off momentarily, the controller detects change of input level, and might conduct an
unexpected operation.
Before turning on the power

When turning on the power for the first time, be sure to take the precautions given below.
• When performing installation, check to make sure that there are no scraps of wiring, particularly
conductive fragments, adhering to the unit.
• Verify that the power supply wiring, I/O wiring, and power supply voltage are all correct.
• Sufficiently tighten the installation screws and terminal screws.
• Set the mode selector to PROG. Mode.

Before entering a program
Be sure to perform a program clear operation before entering a program.
Operation procedure when using FPWIN GR Ver.2

Select “Online Edit Mode” on the FPWIN GR “On line” menu.
Select “Clear Program” on the “Edit” menu.
When the confirmation dialog box is displayed, click on “Yes” to clear the program.
Request concerning program storage

To prevent the accidental loss of programs, the user should consider the following measures.
• Drafting of documents
To avoid accidentally losing programs, destroying files, or overwriting the contents of a file, documents
should be printed out and then saved.
• Specifying the password carefully
The password setting is designed to avoid programs being accidentally overwritten. If the password is
forgotten, however, it will be impossible to overwrite the program even if you want to. Also, if a
password is forcibly bypassed, the program is deleted. When specifying the password, note it in the
specifications manual or in another safe location in case it is forgotten at some point.
• Upload protection
When the upload protection setting is specified, programs will be disabled to be read out. If the setting
is cancelled forcibly, all programs and system registers will be deleted. Therefore, note that programs
and system registers should be managed on your own responsibility.
Backup battery
Do not install the battery when it is not used.
There is a possibility of leak if the battery remains discharged.
vi

Differences in Functions Between Versions of Controller
Version Usable model Usable functions
UP/DOWN switching of high-speed counter by SYS instruction
Real number basic compare instructions 18 types
STF=S1, S2 ANF=S1, S2 ORF=S1, S2
STF<>S1, S2 ANF<>S1, S2 ORF<>S1, S2
V1.10 Ry type - STF>S1, S2 ANF>S1, S2 ORF>S1, S2
STF>=S1, S2 ANF>=S1, S2 ORF>=S1, S2
STF<S1, S2 ANF<S1, S2 ORF<S1, S2
STF<=S1, S2 ANF<=S1, S2 ORF<=S1, S2
System register 36 for setting expansion unit recognition time
MEWTOCOL master function
F145(SEND) Data send
V1.20 Ry type -
F146(RECV) Data receive
E356(EZPID) Easy PID instruction
Time constant processing of input (Refer to Chapter 12.6.)
CPU input: System register setting
Other input: F182(FILTR) Time constant processing
Sampling trace function (Refer to Chapter 12.5.)
Sampling by instructions
F155(SMPL) Sampling
F156(STRG) Sampling trigger
Sampling by specifying time
Leading contact, trailing contact instructions
ST↑ AN↑ OR↑
ST↓ AN↓ OR↓
An arbitrary device can be specified for the setting value of
V2.00 Ry type Tr type
Timer/counter instruction.
e.g.) TML 0, DT0
Other additional convenient instructions
F252(ACHK) ASCII data check
F284(RAMP) Inclination output
Baud rate setting (300, 600, 1200 bps) by SYS instruction
High-speed operation
F0(MV) and F1(DMV) instructions Execution time: Approx. 1us
Only when every operands are without index modifier.
Function addition to existing instructions
F70(BCC) Block check code calculation
F356(EZPID) Easy PID instruction
Note) The Ry and Tr types with the same specifications have the same version name
Reference: <Programming Manual ARCT1F313E>
vii

Restriction on using the Add-on cassette
Application cassettes that the version of the FP-X control unit is specified
FP-X Application cassette Version of control unit
FP-X Analog output cassette AFPX-DA2
FP-X Analog I/O cassette AFPX-A21
Ver. 2.40 or later
FP-X Thermocouple cassette AFPX-TC2
FP-X RTD cassette AFPX-RTD2
Application cassettes that have restrictions when more than one units are used simultaneously
Current output range
Quantity Control unit
FP-X Application cassette
used C14 C30 C60
1 ○ ○ ○
AFPX-DA2 Note1) Note1)
2 － △ △
1 ○ ○ ○
AFPX-A21
2 － ○ ○
Note1) Note1)
AFPX-DA2 + AFPX-A21 Each 1 － △ △
Note2) Note2) Note2)
AFPX-DA2 + AFPX-COM5 Each 1 × × ×
Note2) Note2) Note2)
AFPX-A21 + AFPX-COM5 Each 1 × × ×
Note2) Note2)
AFPX-A21 + AFPX-DA2 + AFPX-COM5 Each 1 － × ×
Note2) Note2)
AFPX-DA2 1unit + AFPX-COM5 1unit - × ×
Note2) Note2)
AFPX-A21 2units + AFPX-COM5 1unit - × ×
Note1) Up to 2 channels can be used for the current output range.
(When using two units, it is possible to use the 2-ch current output range and 2-ch voltage output range.)
Note2) The AFPX-DA2 and AFPX-A21 both cannot be used with the AFP-COM5 (Ethernet).
Voltage output range (When using with the output current of 1 mA or below)
Quantity Control unit
FP-X Application cassette
used C14 C30 C60
1 ○ ○ ○
AFPX-DA2
2 － ○ ○
1 ○ ○ ○
AFPX-A21
2 － ○ ○
AFPX-DA2 + AFPX-A21 Each 1 － ○ ○
AFPX-DA2 + AFPX-COM5 Each 1 ○ ○ ○
AFPX-A21 + AFPX-COM5 Each 1 ○ ○ ○
AFPX-A21 + AFPX-DA2 + AFPX-COM5 Each 1 － ○ ○
AFPX-DA2 1unit + AFPX-COM5 1unit － ○ ○
AFPX-A21 2units + AFPX-COM5 1unit － ○ ○
Note) In the voltage output range, when using them with the output current at 1 mA to 10 mA, the
condition is the same as the current output range.
viii

Programming Tool Restrictions
Restrictions on usable programming tools depending on the units (as of Feb. 2009)
Type of unit
AFPX-C14R AFPX-C14T, C14TD, C14P, C14PD
Type of programming tool
Used Used
FPWIN GR Ver.2
Windows software (Ver. 2.5 or later) (Ver. 2.70 or later)
FPWIN GR Ver.1 Not used Not used
FPWIN Pro
Windows software Used Used
Ver.6
Conforms to
FPWIN Pro Used Used
IEC61131-3
Ver.5 (Ver. 5.1 or later) (Ver. 5.22 or later)
AFP1113V2
Not used Not used
AFP1114V2
AFP1113
Not used Not used
Handy programming AFP1114
unit AFP1111A
AFP1112A
Not used Not used
AFP1111
AFP1112
AFP8670 Used
FP memory loader
AFP8671 (Only programs and system registers can be transmitted.)
Note: Precautions concerning version upgrade

• In case of using FPWIN GR Ver.1, please purchase upgrade model FPWIN GR Ver.2.
• FPWIN GR Ver. 2.0 can be upgraded to Ver. 2.5 or later free of charge at our web site.
• FPWIN Pro Ver. 6.0 can be upgraded free of charge at our web site.
• The handy programming unit cannot be used.
Do not download any programs for other units such as FP1 to the FP-X using the handy programming
unit.
Panasonic Electric Works website address:

http://industrial.panasonic.com/ac/e/dl_center/software/
ix

x

Chapter 1
Features, Functions and Restrictions

1.1 Features and Functions of the Unit
Features
• Compact size general-purpose PLC that is suitable for the small-scale facility control.
• Can be directly connected to a personal computer using USB communication port.
• High dimensional security functions to deal with copying programs.
• Supports analog control.
• Following items are provided as options,
- Application cassettes, such as the positioning control function by the high-speed counter and
pulse output.
- Fulfilling communication cassettes.
- Realtime clock function.
Basic functions as compact size general-purpose PLC suitable for the small-scale facility control
Basic functions including the followings are equipped even though it is a general-purpose style such as
AC power supply, screw terminal block and relay output.
1. 32k-step program capacity
2. 0.32 µs command processing speed
3. Max. 382-points I/O control
Single-phase 8-channel and 2-phase 4 channel high-speed counter functions are equipped for
the control unit.
Fulfilling function enhancement

Various add-on cassettes are available as options (such as 10 types of application cassettes and
6 types of communication cassette).
• Application cassettes
DC 8-point input type, transistor 8-point NPN output type, transistor 6-point PNP output type, DC 4-point
input + transistor 3-point NPN output type, analog 2-ch output type, analog 2-ch input + analog 1-ch
output type, thermocouple 2-ch type, RTD 2-ch type, analog 2-ch input type, high-speed counter input +
pulse output type, master memory type with realtime clock (32k-step program can be copied and stored.)
• Communication cassettes
1-ch RS232C type, 2-ch RS232C type, 1-ch RS485/RS422 changeover type, 1-ch RS232C + 1-ch
RS485 type, Ethernet + 1-ch RS232C type, 2-ch RS485 type
FP0 expansion units can be connected as well as the exclusive expansion unit.
A maximum of 3 FP0 expansion units can be connected using the expansion FP0 adapter.
A personal computer can be directly connected with the USB communication port.
A personal computer can be directly connected with the USB cable (excluding C14).
The USB⇔RS232C conversion adapter/cable is not necessary.
(A tool port (RS232C) is also equipped.)
1-2

High dimensional security functions to deal with copying programs.
The uploading disabling function prohibits uploading (reading) programs in the PLC main unit and
prevent illegal copying.
(It also enables to transfer the programs to the FP-X master memory cassette, when the uploading
disabling function is specified).
The protection for programs can be selected from
3 security methods.
• 4-digit password
• 8-digit password
• Uploading disabling
A full range of communication functions

Using the Tool port (RS232C) provided as a standard feature on the main unit, communication can be
carried out with a display panel or computer. Additionally, communication cassettes with RS232C,
RS485 and Ethernet interfaces are available as an option. Installing a 2-channel RS232C type
communication cassette in the FP-X makes it possible to connect two devices with RS232C port. A full
lineup of communication functions means you can also work with 1:N communication (up to 99 units)
and PC(PLC) link function (up to 16 units).
Controlling two devices with RS232C port with one FP-X

When using the 2-channel RS232C type communication cassette
1:N communication possible with up to 99 stations (units)

When using the 1-channel RS485/RS422 type communication cassette
When using the 1-channel RS485 and 1-channel RS232C in combination
Link with FP2 and FPΣ is possible

Data sharing between small size and medium size PLCs is easily achievable in one network.
The FP-X supports MEWNET-W0, and the programless PLC link with the FP2 or FPΣ is possible.
1-3

Supports Modbus RTU
It can be used as a master unit/slave units (F145 and F146 instructions).
It can be easily communicated with a temperature control device, inverter, FP-e or overseas PLCs.
It is possible to communicate with up to 99 units
MEWTOCOL communication
It can be used as a master unit/slave units (F145 and F146 instructions).
It can be easily communicated with a PLC, image processor, temperature control device, message
runner or eco-power meter.
It is possible to communicate with up to 99 units
1-4

Positioning control supported through high-speed counter and pulse output
With the FP-X Tr type, a high-speed counter function can be used by using the CPU I/O.
With the FP-X Ry type, a high-speed counter and pulse output functions can be used by using the pulse
I/O cassette. The pulse output function supports frequencies of up to 100kHz, enabling positioning
control using a stepping motor or servo motor.
Note) The pulse I/O cassette cannot be used for the FP-X Tr type.
Measurement using high-speed counter supported
Increment input mode, decrement input mode, 2-phase input mode, individual input mode, and direction
discrimination mode are supported.
Note) Differs depending on combinations.
Positioning control based on pulse output supported
Pulse/direction and clockwise/counter –clockwise output are supported.
Heater control based on PWM output function supported

The pulse output at any duty ratio can be picked up with special instruction.
Analog potentiometer (volume dial)

An analog potentiometer (volume dial) is provided as a standard feature. This can be used in
applications such as analog timers, without using the programming tools.
Realtime clock function can be added

Optional FP-X master memory cassette (AFPX-MRTC) and backup battery enables the realtime clock
function.
1-5

1.2 Unit Types
1.2.1 FP-X Control Units
C14 C30 C60
No. of I/O Specifications

Product No.
points Power supply Input Output Connection
Relay type (Ry type)
AFPX-C14R 8/6
AFPX-C30R 16/14 100 to 240 V AC

24 V DC
AFPX-C60R 32/28 (Common
Relay Terminal block
AFPX-C14RD 8/6 polarities
+ & - common)
AFPX-C30RD 16/14 24 V DC
AFPX-C60RD 32/28
Transistor type (NPN) (Tr type)
AFPX-C14T 8/6
AFPX-C30T 16/14 100 to 240 V AC

24 V DC
AFPX-C60T 32/28 (Common Transistor
Terminal block
AFPX-C14TD 8/6 polarities (NPN)
+ & - common)
AFPX-C30TD 16/14 24V DC
AFPX-C60TD 32/28
Transistor type (PNP) (Tr type)
AFPX-C14P 8/6
AFPX-C30P 16/14 100 to 240 V AC

24 V DC
AFPX-C60P 32/28 (Common Transistor
Terminal block
AFPX-C14PD 8/6 polarities (PNP)
+ & - common)
AFPX-C30PD 16/14 24V DC
AFPX-C60PD 32/28
1-6

1.2.2 FP-X Expansion Unit
E14/E16 E30
No. of I/O Specifications

Product No.
points Power supply Input Output Connection
Relay type (Ry type)
AFPX-E16R 8/8 - 24 V DC
Terminal
AFPX-E30R 16/14 100 to 240 V AC (Common polarities Relay
block
AFPX-E30RD 16/14 24 V DC + & - common)
Transistor type (NPN) (Tr type)
AFPX-E16T 8/8 - 24 V DC
Transistor Terminal
AFPX-E30T 100 to 240 V AC (Common polarities
16/14 (NPN) block
AFPX-E30TD 24V DC + & - common)
Transistor type (PNP) (Tr type)
AFPX-E16P 8/8 - 24 V DC
Transistor Terminal
AFPX-E30P 100 to 240 V AC (Common polarities
16/14 (PNP) block
AFPX-E30PD 24V DC + & - common)
Input-only type
24 V DC
16/0 Terminal
AFPX-E16X - (Common polarities -
(X300 to X30F) block
+ & - common)
- The input specifications are the same as AFPX-E16R.
Output-only type (Relay type)
0/14 Terminal
AFPX-E14YR - - Relay
(Y300 to Y30D) block
- The output specifications are the same as AFPX-E16R.
An 8-cm expansion cable is provided with expansion unit
1.2.3 FP-X Expansion FP0 Adapter

Name Specifications Product No.
FP-X Expansion
FP0 adapter (with 8
cm expansion For connecting FP0 expansion unit AFPX-EFP0
cable, power supply
cable)
1-7

1.2.4 Add-on Cassettes (Communication cassettes/Application cassettes)
Name Specifications Product No.
Communication FP-X Communication cassette 5-wire 1-channel RS232C AFPX-COM1
cassette FP-X Communication cassette 3-wire 2-channel RS232C AFPX-COM2
1-channel RS485/RS422
FP-X Communication cassette AFPX-COM3
(insulated)
1-channel RS485 (insulated)
3-wire 1-channel RS232C
2-channel RS485 (insulated)
FP-X Communication cassette (non-insulated between AFPX-COM6
channels)
Ethernet,
Application 2-channel analog input

FP-X Analog input cassette AFPX-AD2
cassette (non-insulated)
2-channel analog output
FP-X Analog output cassette (insulated) (insulated AFPX-DA2
between channels)
2-channel analog input
FP-X Analog I/O cassette (insulated) + 1-channel AFPX-A21
analog output (insulated)
2-channel thermocouple input
FP-X Thermocouple cassette (insulated) (insulated AFPX-TC2
between channels)
2-ch RTD input (insulated)
(insulated between channels)
FP-X Input cassette 8-point DC input AFPX-IN8
8-point transistor output
AFPX-TR8
(NPN)
FP-X Output cassette
6-point transistor output
AFPX-TR6P
(PNP)
4-point DC input + 3-point
FP-X I/O cassette AFPX-IN4T3
transistor output (NPN)
2-ch high-speed counter +
FP-X Pulse I/O cassette AFPX-PLS
1-ch pulse output
Master memory + realtime
FP-X Master memory cassette AFPX-MRTC
clock
1-8

1.2.5 Related Parts
Name Description Product No.
Necessary for the backup of
FP-X Backup battery data registers, etc. or for using AFPX-BATT
the realtime clock function.
For C30/C60 control unit

FP-X terminal block for E30 expansion I/O unit
AFPX-TAN1
(C30/C60) with 21-pin cover (no printing)
4 pcs/pack
8 cm AFPX-EC08
FP-X expansion cable

Note) 30 cm AFPX-EC30
80 cm AFPX-EC80
For Expansion FP0 adapter,

FP0 power supply cable AFP0581
Length: 1 m
Used for expansion FP0

FP0 mounting plate
adapter and FP0 Expansion AFP0803
(slim type)
unit, 10 pcs/pack
Note) The total length of the expansion cable should be within 160 cm.
1-9

1.3 Restrictions on Unit Combinations
1.3.1 Restrictions on FP-X Expansion Unit
Controllable I/O points

Number of I/O points when
Number of I/O points when
Type of control unit using 8 units of E30
using control unit
expansion I/O unit
FP-X C14 Control unit 14 points Max. 254 points
Note:
- Up to eight units of FP-X can be connected, however, the restrictions on each expansion unit vary.
- For AFPX-E16/E14: Two units cannot be connected consecutively since the power should be supplied
from the unit with the power supply (as no power supply is built in AFPX-E16).
E16 expansion I/O unit cannot be connected on the right side of the control unit or AFPX-E30.
- For AFPX-E30: There is no restriction on AFPX-E30 so that up to 8 units can be connected
consecutively.
- The total length of the expansion cable should be within 160 cm.
1-10

1.3.2 Restrictions on FP0 Expansion Unit
Up to three dedicated FP0 expansion units can be added using the FP-X and the expansion FP0 adapter.
The relay output type and the transistor output type can be used in combination.
Controllable I/O points

Number of I/O points when Number of I/O points when
Type of control unit
using control unit using FP0 expansion unit
Note1) Up to seven FP-X expansion I/O units can be also installed between the control unit and the
expansion FP0 adapter.
Note2) Only one expansion FP0 adapter can be installed at the last position of the FP-X expansion bus.
(It should be installed at the right hand side of the AFPX-E16 and E30.)
Note:
• Install the FP0 thermocouple unit on the right side of other expansion units. If it is installed on the left
side, the total precision will deteriorate.
• Install the FP0 CC-Link slave unit on the right side of the other expansion units. There is no expansion
connector on the right side.
1-11

1.3.3 Restrictions on FP-X Add-on Cassette
The add-on cassette is installed in the cassette mounting part 1 and 2 (only the cassette mounting part 1
is available for C14) of the control unit.
1-12

A: Available, N/A: Not available
FP-X C14
FP-X C30
Restrictions on control unit FP-X C30 FP-X C60
FP-X C60
FP-X C60
Cassette Cassette Expansion
Type of add-on cassette mounting mounting connector
part 1 part 2 part
FP-X Communication cassette AFPX-COM1 A N/A
Commu-
nication
cassette
FP-X Analog input cassette AFPX-AD2 A A
The add-on
FP-X Input cassette AFPX-IN8 A A
cassette
FP-X Analog output cassette AFPX-DA2 A A
cannot be
FP-X Analog I/O cassette AFPX-A21 A A
installed.
Appli- FP-X Thermocouple cassette AFPX-TC2 A A
cation FP-X RTD cassette AFPX-RTD2 A A
cassette FP-X Output cassette AFPX-TR8 A A
FP-X Output cassette AFPX-TR6P A A
FP-X I/O cassette AFPX-IN4T3 A A
Note5) Note5)
FP-X Pulse I/O cassette AFPX-PLS A A
Note1) Note1)
FP-X Master memory cassette AFPX-MTRC A A
Note:
1. Only one FP-X master memory cassette AFPX-MRTC can be installed. If 2 units are installed, E26
(user ROM error) will occur.
2. One application cassette can be installed in either cassette mounting part 1 or 2 of C30/C60.
3. As only one communication cassette can be installed in the cassette mounting part 1, it should be
installed on the application cassette if the application cassette is installed. (It cannot be installed in the
cassette mounting part 2.)
4. The add-on cassette cannot be installed in the expansion connector part of C60 (it does not work).
5. The pulse I/O cassette cannot be installed on the FP-X Tr type.
1-13

1.4 Programming Tools
1.4.1 Tools Needed for Programming

1. Programming tool software
- The tool software can also be used with the FP
series.
- “FPWIN Pro Ver.6” or “FPWIN GR Ver.2” Windows
software is used with FP-X.
FPWIN GR Ver.1x, NPST-GR and FP
Programmer cannot be used.
2. PC connection cable
- The dedicated cable is available.
- A commercial USB cable can be used for the
connection for C30/C60 control unit.
1.4.2 Software Environment and Suitable Cable

Standard ladder diagram tool software FPWIN-GR Ver.2
Hard disk
Type of software OS (Operating system) Product No.
capacity
Windows98
Full type WindowsMe AFPS10520
FPWIN GR Ver.2
Windows2000
English- 40MB or more
WindowsXP
language menu Upgrade AFPS10520R
version Windows Vista
Windows7
Note1) Ver.1.1 must be installed to install the upgrade version.
Note2) Ver.2.0 can be upgraded to the latest version after Ver. 2.1 free of charge at our web site
(http://industrial.panasonic.com/ac/e/dl_center/software/). Use the latest version.
Conforms to IEC61131-3 programming tool software FPWIN-Pro Ver.6

Hard disk
Type of software OS (Operating system) Product No.
capacity
Windows2000
FPWIN Pro Ver.6 WindowsXP
100MB or more FPWINPROFEN6
English-language menu Windows Vista
Windows7
Note1) The small type and upgrade version is not available for Ver.6.
Note2) Ver.6.0 can be upgraded to the latest version after Ver. 6.1 free of charge at our web site
((http://industrial.panasonic.com/ac/e/dl_center/software/). Use the latest version.
1-14

Type of computer and suitable cable
For the connection between a personal computer (RS232C) and the control unit (RS232C)
PC side connector PLC side connector Specifications Product No.
female-Mini DIN round 5-pin L type (3 m) AFC8503
D-sub 9-pin
female-Mini DIN round 5-pin Straight type (3 m) AFC8503S
Note) Note) A USB/RS232C conversion cable is necessary to connect the unit to the USB port of a
personal computer using a PC connection cable.
For the connection between a personal computer (USB) and the control unit (USB)
USB cable (For C30 and C60 only)
Use a commercial cable.
Cable type Length
USB 2.0 (or 1.1) AB type Max. 5 m
1-15

1-16

Chapter 2
Specifications and Functions of Control
Unit

2.1 Parts and Functions
2.1.1 Parts and Functions
2-2

○1 Status indicator LEDs
These LEDs display the current mode of operation or the occurrence of an error.
LED LED and operation status
Lights when in the RUN mode and indicates that the program is
being executed.
RUN Green
It flashes during forced input/output. (The RUN and PROG. LEDs
flash alternately.)
Lights when in the PROG. Mode and indicates that operation has
stopped.
PROG. Green Lights when in the PROG. Mode during forced input/output.
It flashes during forced input/output. (The RUN and PROG. LEDs
flash alternately.)
Flashes when an error is detected during the self-diagnostic
ERROR/ function. (ERROR)
Red
ALARM Lights if a hardware error occurs, or if operation slows because of
the program, and the watchdog timer is activated. (ALARM)
○2 Input/output indicator LEDs
Indicates the on/off status of the input and output.
○3 RUN/PROG. mode switch
This switch is used to change the operation mode of the PLC.

Switch position Operation mode
This sets the RUN mode. The program is executed is executed and operation
RUN (upward)
begins.
PROG. (downward) This sets the PROG. mode. The operation stops.
 The remote switching operation from the programming tool is operable.
 When performing remote switching from the programming tool, the setting of the mode switch and the
actual mode of operation may differ. Verify the mode with the status indicator LED.
 Restart FP to operate in the mode set with the RUN/PROG. mode switch.
○
4 USB connector (B type)
This is a connector to connect the programming tool.

Commercial USB cables (AB type) can be used.
 The baud rate with the USB is 115.2 kbps (fixed).

 Either USB port or COM2 port of 2-channnel type communication
cassette is selected.
The USB port of FP-X and the COM2 port of communication
cassette cannot be used at the same time.
○5 Analog potentiometer (analog dial)
Turning this dial changes the values of special data registers DT90040 to DT90043 within the range of
K0 to K1000. It can be used for analog timers and other applications.
C14 and C30 equips 2 points and C60 equips 4 points.
2-3

○6 Tool port (RS232C)
This port is used to connect a programming tool.

A commercial mini-DIN 5-pin connector is used for the Tool port on the control unit.
Pin No. Signal name Abbreviation Signal direction
1 Signal Ground SG −
2 Send Data SD Unit → External device
3 Receive Data RD Unit ← External device
4 (Not used) − −
5 +5V +5V Unit → External device
The followings are the default settings set when the unit is shipped from the factory. The system register
“Tool port setting” should be used to change these.
- Baud rate …….. 9600 bps
- Character bit …. 8 bit
- Parity check ….. Odd parity
- Stop bit length .. 1 bit
Note) The unit numbers (station numbers) of the tool port should be specified using the system register
“Tool port setting”.
○7 Power supply and input terminal block
This is the power supply and input wiring terminal. A solderless terminal for M3 can be used.
○8 Service power supply for input and output terminal block
This is the service power supply for input and output wiring terminal. A solderless terminal for M3 can be
used.
○9 Expansion cover
It is used after the expansion cable and the battery has been installed.
○
10 Add-on cassette connector
○
11 Connector For connecting expansion I/O unit and expansion FP0 adapter
An exclusive expansion cable is inserted.
○
12 Battery cover
This battery cover is removed when the optional backup battery is installed.
Installing the backup battery enables the backup of the realtime clock or data registers.
○
13 DIN rail attachment lever
This lever enables the units to attach to a DIN rail at a touch.
2-4

2.2 Power Supply Specifications
2.2.1 AC Power Supply

Specifications
Item
C14 C30R/C60
Rated voltage 100 to 240 V AC
Voltage regulation range 85 to 264 V AC
Inrush current 40 A or less (at 240 V AC, 25 °C) 45 A or less (at 240 V AC, 25 °C)
Momentary power off time 10 ms (when using 100 V AC)
Frequency 50/60 Hz (47 to 63 Hz)
Leakage current 0.75 mA or less between input and protective earth terminals
Internal power supply part
20,000 hours (at 55 °C)
Guaranteed life
Fuse Built-in (Cannot be replaced)
Insulation system Transformer insulation
Terminal screw M3
2.2.2 Service Power Supply for Input (Output) (AC Power Supply Type Only)
Specifications
Item
C14 C30/C60
Rated output voltage 24 V DC
Voltage regulation range 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
Rated output current 0.15 A 0.4 A
Overcurrent protection
Note) Available
function
Terminal screw M3
Note) This is a function to protect overcurernt temporarily, which protects the output short-circuit. If the
short-circuit is detected, all the power supply for the PLC will be turned off. If a current load that is
out of the specifications is connected and the overloaded status continues, it may lead to damages.
2.2.3 DC Power Supply

Specifications
Item
C14 C30/C60
Rated voltage 24 V DC
Inrush current 12 A or less (at 25 °C)
Momentary power off time 10 ms
20,000 h (at 55 °C)
Guaranteed life
Terminal screw M3
2-5

2.3 Input Specifications
2.3.1 Relay (Ry) Type

Input Specifications (For C14R/C30R/C60R control units)
Item Description
Insulation method Optical coupler
Rated input voltage 24V DC
Operating voltage range 21.6 to 26.4V DC
Approx. 4.7 mA (for control units X0 to X7)
Rated input current
Approx. 4.3 mA (from control unit X8 )
8 points/common (C14R)
16 points/common (C30R/C60R)
Input points per common
(Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be
connected to common terminal.)
Min. on voltage/Min. on current 19.2 V DC/3 mA
Max. off voltage/Max. off current 2.4V DC/1 mA
Approx. 5.1 kΩ (for control units X0 to X7)
Input impedance
Approx. 5.6 kΩ (from control unit X8 )
For control units X0 to X7:
0.6 ms or less: normal input
50 µs or less: high-speed counter, pulse catch, interrupt
off→on Note)
Response time input settings
From control unit X8 :
0.6 ms or less
on→off Same as above
Operating mode indicator LED display
EN61131-2 Applicable type TYPE3 (however, according to the above specifications)
Note) this specification is applied when the rated input voltage is 24 V DC and the temperature is 25 °C.
Circuit diagram
For X0 to X7: R1=5.1 kΩ R2=3 kΩ

From X8: R1=5.6 kΩ R2=1 kΩ
Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points
Reference: <2.5 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input/Output On Points>
2-6

2.3.2 Transistor (Tr) Type (Common to NPN and PNP)
Transistor type (common to NPN and PNP)
Description
Item
C14 C30/C60
Rated input voltage 24V DC
Operating voltage range 21.6 to 26.4V DC
Approx. 8 mA (for control units X0 to X3)
Rated input current Approx. 4.7 mA (for control units X4 to X7)
Approx. 4.3 mA (from control unit X8)
8 points/common 16 points/common
Input points per common (Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be
19.2 V DC/6 mA (for control units X0 to X3)
Min. on voltage/Min. on current
19.2 V DC/3 mA (from control unit X4)
2.4V DC/1.3 mA (for control units X0 to X3)
Max. off voltage/Max. off current
2.4V DC/1 mA (from control unit X4)
Approx. 3 kΩ (for control units X0 to X3)
Input impedance Approx. 5.1 kΩ (for control units X4 to X7)
Approx. 5.6 kΩ (from control unit X8 )
135 µs or less: normal input
5 µs or less
Note)
: high-speed counter, pulse catch,
interrupt input settings
off→on
Response time 135 µs or less: normal input
50 µs or less
Note)
: high-speed counter, pulse catch,
interrupt input settings
From control unit X8 (C30/C60 only) :
0.6 ms or less
on→off Same as above
Note) this specification is applied when the rated input voltage is 24 V DC and the temperature is 25 °C.
Circuit diagram
[X0 to X3] [From X4]
X4 to X7 :R1=5.1kΩ R2=3kΩ
From X8 :R1=5.6kΩ R2=1kΩ
2-7

2.4 Output Specifications
2.4.1 Relay (Ry) Type

Relay output specifications (For C14R/C30R/C60R control units)
Description
Item
C14 C30/C60
Insulation method Relay insulation
Output type 1a output (Relay cannot be replaced)
Note) 2 A 250 V AC, 2 A 30 V DC
Rated control capacity
(6 A or less/common) (8 A or less/common)
Output points per common 1 point/common, 2 points/common, 3 points/common, 4 points/common
off→on Approx. 10 ms
Response time
on→off Approx. 8 ms
Mechanical 20 million times or more (Frequency of switching: 180 times/min.)
Lifetime 100 thousand times or more (Frequency of switching at the rated control
Electrical
capacity: 20 times/min.)
Surge absorber None
Note1) Resistance load
Circuit diagram
2-8

2.4.2 Transistor (Tr) Type (NPN)
Output specifications
Description
Item
C14 C30/C60
Output type Open collector
Rated load voltage 5 to 24 V DC
Allowable load voltage
4.75 to 26.4 V DC
range
Max. load current 0.5 A
Max. inrush current 1.5 A
Input points per
6 points/Common 8 points/Common, 6 points/Common
common
Off state leakage
1 µA or less
current
On state voltage drop 0.3 V DC or less
2 µs or less (Y0 to Y3) (Load current: at 15 mA or more)
20 µs or less (C14: Y4 to Y5, C30/C60: Y4 to Y7)(Load current: at 15 mA or
OFF→ON
more)
Response
1 ms or less (C14: None, C30/C60: from Y8)
time
(at 25°C)
30 µs or less (C14: Y4 to Y5, C30/C60: Y4 to Y7)
ON→OFF
(Load current: at 15 mA or more)
Voltage 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
Y0 to Y5 (Y7) Y8 to YD Y10 to Y17 Y18 to Y1D
40 mA
C14   
External power supply or less
(+ and – terminals) Current 60 mA 35 mA
C30  
or less or less
60 mA 35 mA 45 mA 35 mA
C60
or less or less or less or less
Surge absorber Zener diode
Operating mode
LED display
indicator
Circuit diagram
[NPN output]
[X0 to X3] [From X4]
2-9

2.4.3 Transistor (Tr) Type (PNP)
Description
Item
C14 C30/C60
Rated load voltage 24 V DC
Allowable load voltage
21.6 to 26.4 V DC
range
Input points per common 6 points/Common 8 points/Common, 6 points/Common
Off state leakage current 1 µA or less
OFF→ON
Response 1 ms or less (C14: None, C30/C60: from Y8)
time 8 µs or less (Y0 to Y3) (Load current: at 15 mA or more)
ON→OFF
Y0 to Y5 (Y7) Y8 to YD Y10 to Y17 Y18 to Y1D
75 mA
C14   
External power supply or less
(+ and – terminals) Current 95 mA 50 mA
C30  
or less or less
95 mA 50 mA 65 mA 50 mA
C60
or less or less or less or less
Circuit diagram
[PNP output]
［Y0 to Y3］［from Y4］
2-10

2.5 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input/Output
On Points
2.5.1 Relay (Ry) Type (Stand-alone and With AFPX-COM5)

Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the
ambient temperature.
Limitations on number of Limitations on number of
Product number
simultaneous input on points simultaneous output on points
AFPX-C14R - Configuration
○ 1 Stand-alone
○ 2 COM5
AFPX-C30R
AFPX-C60R
AFPX-C14RD
AFPX-C30RD
AFPX-C60RD
2-11

2.5.2 Relay (Ry) Type (With AFPX-DA2 and AFPX-A21 (Current Output))
Product number
○
1 DA2
○
2 A21
○
3 A21+A21
DA2+DA2 (*)
DA2+A21 (*)
AFPX-C30R * Up to 2
channels can
be used for
the current
output.
AFPX-C60R
AFPX-C14RD
AFPX-C30RD
AFPX-C60RD
2-12

2.5.3 Relay (Ry) Type (AFPX-DA2 and AFPX–A21 Voltage Output)
Product number
○
1 DA2
○
2 A21
○
3 A21+A21
DA2+DA2
DA2+A21
AFPX-C30R
AFPX-C60R
AFPX-C14RD
AFPX-C30RD
AFPX-C60RD
2-13

2.5.4 Transistor (Tr) Type (NPN) (Stand-alone and With AFPX-COM5)
Limitations on number of
Limitations on number of
Product number simultaneous output on
simultaneous input on points
points - Configuration
AFPX-C14T ○1 Stand-alone
○ 2 COM5
AFPX-C30T
AFPX-C60T
AFPX-C14TD
AFPX-C30TD
AFPX-C60TD
2-14

2.5.5 Transistor (Tr) Type (NPN) (With AFPX-DA2 and A21 (Current Output))
Product number
AFPX-C14T - Configuration
○
1 DA2
○
2 A21
○
3 A21+A21
DA2+DA2 (*)
DA2+A21 (*)
AFPX-C30T * Up to 2
channels can
be used for the
current output.
AFPX-C60T
AFPX-C14TD
AFPX-C30TD
AFPX-C60TD
2-15

2.5.6 Transistor (Tr) Type (NPN) (With AFPX-DA2 and A21 (Voltage Output)
Product number
AFPX-C14T - Configuration
○
1 DA2
○
2 A21
○
3 A21+A21
DA2+DA2
DA2+A21
AFPX-C30T
AFPX-C60T
AFPX-C14TD
AFPX-C30TD
AFPX-C60TD
2-16

2.5.7 Transistor (Tr) Type (PNP) (Stand-alone and With AFPX-COM5)
Product number
AFPX-C14P - Configuration
○
1 Stand-alone
○
2 COM5
AFPX-C30P
AFPX-C60P
AFPX-C14PD
AFPX-C30PD
AFPX-C60PD
2-17

2.5.8 Transistor (Tr) Type (PNP) (With AFPX-DA2 and A21 (Current Output))
Product number
○
1 DA2
○
2 A21
○
3 A21+A21
DA2+DA2 (*)
DA2+A21 (*)
AFPX-C30P * Up to 2
channels can
be used for
the current
output.
AFPX-C60P
AFPX-C14PD
AFPX-C30PD
AFPX-C60PD
2-18

2.5.9 Transistor (Tr) Type (PNP) (With AFPX-DA2 and A21 Voltage Output)
Product number
○
1 DA2
○
2 A21
○
3 A21+A21
DA2+DA2
DA2+A21
AFPX-C30P
AFPX-C60P
AFPX-C14PD
AFPX-C30PD
AFPX-C60PD
2-19

2.6 Terminal Layout
2.6.1 Relay Type

AFPX-C14R AFPX-C14RD
AFPX-C30R
AFPX-C30RD
2-20

AFPX-C60R
AFPX-C60RD
Key Point:
Input terminal:
Each COM terminal in the same terminal block is connected within the unit.
However, the COM terminals of the input terminals 1 and 2 for C60 are isolated. (They are not
connected internally.)
Output terminal:
Each COM port (CO, C1 …) is separate. Use them in the range surrounded by the bold black lines.
2-21

2.6.2 Transistor type
AFPX-C14T
AFPX-C14P
AFPX-C14TD
2-22

AFPX-C14PD
AFPX-C30T
AFPX-C30P
2-23

AFPX-C30TD
AFPX-C30PD
AFPX-C60T
2-24

AFPX-C60P
AFPX-C60TD
AFPX-C60PD
Key Point:
Input terminal:
However, the COM terminals of the input terminals 1 and 2 for C60 are isolated. (They are not
connected internally.)
Output terminal:
Each power supply terminal is separate. Use them in the range surrounded by the bold black lines.
2-25

2-26

Chapter 3
Expansion Cassette and Expansion FP0
Adapter Specifications

3.1 Expansion Method
Two types of expansion method are available for the FP-X.
1. Installs the FP-X expansion unit or FP0 expansion unit (expansion FP0 adapter) using the
expansion cable.
2. Installs the add-on cassette to the cassette mounting part of the FP-X control unit.
3.1.1 Expansion Using the Expansion Cable

For the FP-X, the FP-X expansion unit and the FP0 expansion unit (expansion FP0 adapter AFPX-EFP0
is necessary) can be used by using the exclusive expansion cable.
Note: Only one expansion FP0 adapter can be installed at the last position of the FP-X expansion
bus. (It should be installed at the right hand side of the AFPX-E16 and E30.)
Up to seven FP-X expansion I/O units can be also installed between the control unit and
the expansion FP0 adapter. However, there are restrictions on E14/E16.
Reference: <1.3.1 Restrictions on FP-X Expansion Unit>
3-2

3.2 FP-X Expansion Unit

FP-X E16 exapansion I/O unit
FP-X E30 exapansion I/O unit
○1 Input and Output indicator LEDs
Indicates the on/off status of the input and output.

○2 Input terminal block
This is the input terminal. A solderless terminal for M3 can be used.

○3 Output terminal block
This is the output terminal. A solderless terminal for M3 can be used.

○4 Expansion connector
Connects with the control unit, expansion unit and the expansion FP0 adapter using the exclusive
expansion cable.
○5 Expansion cover
It is used after the expansion cable has been fitted.

○6 DIN rail attachment lever
This lever enables the expansion unit to attach to a DIN rail at a touch.
○7 Terminator setting DIP switch
All switches should be turned on for the expansion unit installed at the last position .
3-3

3.2.2 Power Supply Specifications
AC Power Supply
Specifications
Item
E30
Inrush current 40 A or less (at 240 V AC, 25 °C)
20,000 hours (at 55 °C)
Guaranteed life
Terminal screw M3
Service Power Supply for Input (Output) (AC power supply type only)
Specifications
Item
E30
Rated output current 0.4 A
Note) Available
function
Terminal screw M3
Note) This is a function to protect overcurrent temporarily. If a current load that is out of the
specifications is connected, it may lead to damages.
DC Power Supply
Specifications
Item
E30
20,000 hours (at 55 °C)
Guaranteed life
Terminal screw M3
3-4

3.2.3 Input and output specifications
Input specifications
Description
Item
E16 E30
Rated input voltage 24 V DC
Operating voltage range 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
Rated input current Approx. 4.3 mA
Input points per common (Either the positive or negative of input power supply can be
Max. off voltage/Max. off current 2.4 V DC/1 mA
Input impedance Approx. 5.6 kΩ
off→on 0.6 ms or less
Response time
on→off 0.6 ms or less
EN61131-2Applicable type TYPE3 (however, according to the above specifications)
Circuit diagram
: R1=5.6 kΩ R2=1 kΩ
Relay output specifications

Description
Item
E16/E14 E30
Insulation method Relay insulation
Output type 1a output (Relay cannot be replaced.)
Note)
Rated control capacity 2 A 250 V AC, 2 A 30 V DC
(6 A or less/common) (8 A or less/common)
Output points per common 1 point/common, 1 point/common,
off→on Approx. 10 ms
Response time
on→off Approx. 8 ms
Mechanical 20 million times or more (Frequency of switching: 180 times/min.)
Lifetime 100 thousand times or more (Frequency of switching at the rated
Electrical
control capacity: 20 times/min.)
Surge absorber None
Note) Resistance load
Circuit diagram
3-5

Transistor type (NPN)
Description
Item
E16 E30
Allowable load voltage range 4.75 to 26.4 V DC
8 points/Common,
Input points per common 8 points/Common
6 points/Common
OFF→ON 1 ms or less
Response time
ON→OFF 1 ms or less
External power supply Y0 to Y7 Y8 to YD
(+ and – terminals) Current E16 45 mA or less 
E30 45 mA or less 35 mA or less
Circuit diagram
3-6

Transistor type (PNP)
Description
Item
E16 E30
Allowable load voltage range 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
8 points/Common,
Input points per common 8 points/Common
6 points/Common
OFF→ON 1 ms or less
Response time
ON→OFF 1 ms or less
External power supply Y0 to Y7 Y8 to YD
(+ and – terminals) Current E16 65 mA or less 
E30 65 mA or less 50 mA or less
Circuit diagram
3-7

3.2.4 Terminal layout
AFPX-E16R
AFPX-E16T AFPX-E16P
AFPX-E16X AFPX-E14YR
3-8

AFPX-E30R
AFPX-E30RD
AFPX-E30T
3-9

AFPX-E30P
AFPX-E30TD
AFPX-E30PD
Input terminal:
Output terminal:
Each COM terminal(CO, C1 …) of Ry type is separate.
Each power supply terminal of Tr type is separate. Use them in the range surrounded by the bold black
lines.
3-10

3.3 FP-X Expansion FP0 Adapter
3.3.1 Overview
For the FP-X, a maximum of 3 units of the FP0 expansion units (expansion I/O unit, intelligent unit) can
be used using the expansion FP0 adapter.
All FP0 expansion unit can be used.

- DC input unit
- Transistor output unit
- Relay output unit
- Analog I/O unit
- Thermocouple unit
- Network unit
Note:
The expansion FP0 adapter does not function by itself. Always connect the FP0 expansion unit to it.
3-11

FP-X expansion FP0 adapter (AFPX-EFP0)
○
1 Status indicator LEDs
LED
POWER Green When the power of 24 V DC is supplied and the communication starts with the
control unit, the LED lights. When the communication cannot be carried out, it
goes out.
I/F Green When the communication starts with the control unit, the LED lights. When the
communication cannot be carried out, it goes out.
When the FP0 expansion unit is not connected, it flashes.
ERROR Red When an error occurs on the connection with the FP0 expansion unit, it flashes.
○2 FP-X expansion bus connector
Connects the FP-X control unit (or FP-X expansion unit). The provided expansion cable (AFPX-EC08) is
used for the connection.
It is not necessary to specify the TERM (terminal) setting for the expansion FP0 adapter.
○
3 Power supply connector (24V DC)
Supply the power of 24 V DC. The provided power supply cable (AFP0581) is used for the connection.
Supply the power from the service power supply for the input of the FP-X control unit.
○
4 FP0 expansion connector
Connects the FP0 expansion unit.

○5 Expansion hook
This hook is used to secure the FP0 expansion unit.

○6 DIN rail attachment lever
This lever enables the expansion unit to attach to a DIN rail at a touch. The lever is also used for
installation on the mounting plate slim type) (AFP0803).
General specifications
Item Specifications
Voltage regulation 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
Inrush current 20A or less (24 V DC, at 25 °C)
Fuse Built-in (Replacement is not available)
Insulation system Non-isolated
Power supply connector 3-pin connector (Power supply cable AFP0581 is provided.)
3-12

Chapter 4
I/O Allocation

4.1 I/O Allocation
Input Output
Control unit X0 to X9F (WX0 to WX9) Y0 to Y9F (WY0 to WY9)
Cassette mounting part 1
X100 to X19F (WX10 to WX19) Y100 to Y19F (WY10 to WY19)
(Slot 0)
Cassette mounting part 2
X200 to X29F (WX20 to WX29) Y200 to Y29F (WY20 to WY29)
(Slot 1)
Expansion 1st unit X300 to X39F (WX30 to WX39) Y300 to Y39F (WY30 to WY39)
Expansion 2nd unit X400 to X49F (WX40 to WX49) Y400 to Y49F (WY40 to WY49)
Expansion 3rd unit X500 to X59F (WX50 to WX59) Y500 to Y59F (WY50 to WY59)
Expansion 4th unit X600 to X69F (WX60 to WX69) Y600 to Y69F (WY60 to WY69)
X1000 to X109F Y1000 to Y109F
Expansion 8th unit
(WX100 to WX109) (WY100 to WY109)
Note) The ranges of the I/O numbers which are actually used differ depending on the cassettes and units.
Regarding I/O number

• Specifying X and Y numbers
On the FP-X and the FP0, the same numbers are used for input and output.
• Expression of numbers for input/output relays

Input relay “X” and output relay “Y” are expressed as a combination of decimal and hexadecimal
numbers as shown below.
• Slot No.
Slot No. is the number indicating the installing position of the cassette which is used to generate
programs by the add-on cassette.
4-2

4.2 Allocation of FP-X Control Unit
The I/O allocation of FP-X control unit is fixed.
I/O numbers
Type of control unit Number of allocation I/O number
Input (8 points) X0 to X7
FP-X C14 control unit
Output (6 points) Y0 to Y5
Input (16 points) X0 to XF
Output (14 points) Y0 to YD
X0 to XF
Input (32 points)
X10 to X1F
Y0 to YD
Output (28 points)
Y10 to Y1D
4.3 FP0 Expansion Unit Allocation

The FP-X expansion unit is installed on the right side of the FP-X control unit.
I/O numbers (when installed as the first expansion unit)

Type of expansion unit Number of allocation I/O number
FP-X E16 expansion I/O unit
Input (16 points) X300 to X30F
Output (14 points) Y300 to Y30D
FP-X E16X expansion input unit Input (16 points) X300 to X30F
FP-X E14YR expansion output unit Output (14 points) Y300 to Y30D
Note) E16 cannot be connected on the right side of E16.
4-3

4.4 Allocation of FP0 Expansion Unit
4.4.1 I/O Allocation

The FP0 expansion unit is installed on the right side of the FP0 expansion adapter.
The I/O numbers are allocated from the unit nearest to the expansion FP0 adapter in ascending order.
4.4.2 Number of Expansion Units and I/O Allocation

Only one expansion FP0 adapter can be connected at the last position of the FP-X expansion bus.
The I/O allocation varies depending on the installation location of the expansion FP0 adapter
Expansion location Expansion unit 1 Expansion unit 2 Expansion unit 3

X300 to X31F X320 to X33F X340 to X35F
Expansion 1st unit
Y300 to Y31F Y320 to Y33F Y340 to Y35F
Expansion 2nd unit
Expansion 3rd unit
Expansion 4th unit
Y600 to Y61F Y620 to Y63F X640 to X65F
Expansion 5th unit
Expansion 6th unit
Expansion 7th unit
Expansion 8th unit
Note) The ranges of the I/O numbers which are actually used differ depending on the units.
4-4

4.4.3 I/O Allocation of FP0 Expansion Unit
I/O do not need to be set as I/O allocation is performed automatically when an expansion unit is added.
The I/O allocation of expansion unit is determined by the installation location.

Carry the digit of hundreds place one by one since the second expansion unit.
Number of Expansion Expansion Expansion

Type of unit
allocation unit 1 unit 2 unit 3
FP0-E8X Input (8 points) X300 to X307 X320 to X327 X340 to X347
Input (4 points) X300 to X303 X320 to X323 X340 to X343
FP0-E8R
Output (4 points) Y300 to Y303 Y320 to Y323 Y340 to Y343
FP0-E8YT/P
FP0-E8YR
FP0
FP0-E16X Input (16 points) X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X340 to X34F
Expansion unit
FP0-E16R Input (8 points) X300 to X307 X320 to X327 X340 to X347
FP0-E16T/P Output (8 points) Y300 to Y307 Y320 to Y327 Y340 to Y347
FP0-E16YT/P Output (16 points) Y300 to Y30F Y320 to Y32F Y340 to Y34F
Input (16 points) X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X340 to X34F
FP0-E32T/P
Output (16 points) Y300 to Y30F Y320 to Y32F Y340 to Y34F
Input (16 points) WX30 WX32 WX34
CH0 (X300 to X30F) (X320 to X32F) (X340 to X34F)
FP0 analog I/O Input (16 points) WX31 WX33 WX35
FP0-A21
unit CH1 (X310 to X31F) (X330 to X33F) (X350 to X35F)
WY30 WY32 WY34
Output (16 points)
(Y300 to Y30F) (Y320 to Y32F) (Y340 to Y34F)
FP0 A/D Input (16 points) WX30 WX32 WX34
FP0-A80
conversion unit CH0, 2, 4, 6 (X300 to X30F) (X320 to X32F) (X340 to X34F)
FP0-TC4
FP0 thermo- Input (16 points) WX31 WX33 WX35
FP0-TC8
couple unit CH1, 3, 5, 7 (X310 to X31F) (X330 to X33F) (X350 to X35F)
CH0, 2, 4 (X20 to X2F) (X40 to X4F) (X60 to X6F)
FP0 Input (16 points) WX3 WX5 WX7
FP0-RTD6
RTD unit CH1, 3, 5 (X30 to X3F) (X50 to X5F) (X70 to X7F)
WY2 WY4 WY6
Output (16 points
WX30 WX32 WX34
Input (16 points)
(X300 to X30F) (X320 to X32F) (X340 to X34F)
FP0 D/A FP0-A04V Output (16 points) WY30 WY32 WY34
conversion unit FP0-A04I CH0, 2 (Y300 to Y30F) (Y320 to Y32F) (Y340 to Y34F)
Output (16 points) WY31 WY33 WY35
CH1, 3 (Y310 to Y31F) (Y330 to Y33F) (Y350 to Y35F)
FP0 Input 32 points X300 to X31F X320 to X33F X340 to X35F
FP0-IOL
I/O link unit Output 32 points Y300 to Y31F Y320 to Y33F Y340 to Y35F
• The data for the each channels of FP0 A/D conversion unit (FP0-A80), FP0 thermocouple unit (FP0-
TC4/FP0-TC8) , FP0 RTD unit(FP0-RTD6) and FP0 D/A conversion unit (FP0-A04V/FP0-A04I) is
converted and loaded with a user program that includes a switching flag to convert the data.
• Regarding FP0 CC-Link slave unit, please refer to the exclusive manual.
4-5

4.5 I/O Allocation of FP-X Add-on Cassette
The FP-X add-on cassette is mounted on the FP-X control unit.
I/O numbers
I/O No.
Cassette Cassette
mounting part 1 mounting part 2
Slot 0 Slot 1
FP-X communication
AFPX-COM1 − −
cassette
FP-X communication
AFPX-COM2 − −
cassette
FP-X communication
AFPX-COM3 − −
Communication cassette
cassette FP-X communication
AFPX-COM4 − −
cassette
FP-X communication
AFPX-COM5 − −
cassette
FP-X communication
AFPX-COM6 − −
cassette
FP-X analog input CH0 WX10 CH0 WX20
Note2) AFPX-AD2
cassette CH1 WX11 CH1 WX21
FP-X analog output CH0 WY10 CH0 WY20
AFPX-DA2
cassette CH1 WY11 CH1 WY21
CH0 WX10 CH0 WX20
FP-X analog I/O
AFPX-A21 CH1 WX11 CH1 WX21
cassette
WY10 WY20
FP-X thermocouple CH0 WX10 CH0 WX20
AFPX-TC2
Application CH0 WX10 CH0 WX20
FP-X input cassette AFPX-IN8 From X100 From X200
FP-X output cassette AFPX-TR8 From Y100 From Y200
FP-X output cassette AFPX-TR6P From Y100 From Y200
From X100 From X200
From Y100 From Y200
FP-X pulse I/O cassette From X100 From X200
Note3) AFPX-PLS
From Y100 From Y200
FP-X master memory
AFPX-MRTC − −
cassette
Note1) There is no I/O for the communication cassette and master memory cassette.
Note2) Digital conversion values are K0 to 4000. As the resolution is 12 bits, upper 4 bits are always 0.
Note3) The pulse I/O cassette cannot be used with the Tr type.
4-6

Chapter 5
Installation and Wiring

5.1 Installation
Be thoroughly familiar with the following contents before using the units to eliminate the causes which
occur the failure or malfunction of each unit.
5.1.1 Installation Environment and Space

Operating environment (Use the unit within the range of the general specifications when installing)
*Ambient temperatures:0 ~ +55 ℃
*Ambient humidity: 10% to 95% RH (at 25°C, non-condensing)
*Keep the height below 2000m.
*For use in pollution Degree 2 environment.
*Do not use it in the following environments.
- Direct sunlight
- Sudden temperature changes causing condensation.
- Inflammable or corrosive gas.
- Excessive airborne dust, metal particles or saline matter.
- Benzine, paint thinner, alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia
or caustic soda.
- Direct vibration, shock or direct drop of water.
- Influence from power transmission lines, high voltage equipment, power cables, power equipment,
radio transmitters, or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges.
(Min.100mm or less)
Static electricity
-Before touching the unit, always touch a grounded piece of metal in order to discharge static electricity.
-In dry locations, excessive static electricity can cause problems.
Measures regarding heat discharge

• Always install the unit orientated with the tool port facing outward on the bottom in order to prevent the
generation of heat.
• Do not install the FP-X control unit as shown below.
• Do not install the unit above devices which generate heat such heaters, transformers or large scale
resistors.
5-2

Installation space
• Leave at least 50mm of space between the wiring ducts of the unit and other devices to allow heat
radiation and unit replacement.
• Maintain at least 100mm of space between devices to avoid adverse affects from noise and heat when
installing a device or panel door to the front of the PLC unit.
• Leave at least 100mm of space open from the front surface of the control unit in order to allow room for
programming tool connections and wiring.
5.1.2 Installation and Removal

Attachment to DIN rail and removal from DIN rail
Can be simply attached to DIN rail.
Procedure of installation method

(1) Fit the upper hook of the unit onto the DIN rail.
(2) Without moving the upper hook, press on the lower hook to fit the
unit into position.
Procedure of removal method

(1) Insert a slotted screwdriver into the DIN rail attachment lever.
(2) Pull the attachment lever downwards.
(3) Lift up the unit and remove it from the rail.
5-3

Installation with screws
Use M4 size screws for the installation
Reference: For the information on the installation dimensions,

<13.1.4 Dimension Diagram for Installation
Installation and removal of the expansion FP0 adapter/FP0 expansion unit

Attachment to DIN rail and removal from DIN rail
Can be simply attached to DIN rail.
Procedure of installation method

(1) Fit the upper hook of the unit onto the DIN rail.
(2) Without moving the upper hook, press on the lower hook to fit the
unit into position.
Procedure of removal method

(1) Insert a slotted screwdriver into the DIN rail attachment lever.
(2) Pull the attachment lever downwards.
(3) Lift up the unit and remove it from the rail.
Installation Using the Optional Mounting Plate

When using the slim type mounting plate (AFP0803) (for mounting FP0)
Use M4 size pan-head screws for attachment of the slim type mounting plate and install according to the
dimensions shown below.
The rest of the procedure is the same as that

for attaching the unit to the DIN rails.
Tighten the screws after joining all of the slim type mounting plate to be connected. Tighten the screws
at each of the four corners.
[Example] When two expansion units
5-4

5.2 Installation Using Expansion Cable
The FP-X expansion unit and the FP-X expansion FP0 adapter are connected to the control unit using
the exclusive expansion cable.
-The expansion cable (AFPX-EC08) is packaged with the expansion unit and expansion FP0 adapter.
(It can be purchased separately.) The expansion cables (AFPX-EC30 and AFPX-EC80) are sold
separately.
Note:
-The total length of the expansion cables should be within 160 cm.
-When using the expansion cable (AFPX-EC30 or EC80), keep it away from the devices and wirings
generating noises as much as possible.
5-5

5.2.1 Expansion Method of FP-X Expansion Unit
1. Remove the expansion cover.
2. Fit the expansion connector cable into the expansion connector part of the control unit and the
one (left side) of the expansion I/O unit.
3. Push the expansion connector cable inside to touch the units each other.
4. Set the terminator setting switch. All the switches of the expansion unit installed at the last
position should be on.
5. Install the expansion cover.
5-6

5.2.2 How to Connect with FP-X Expansion FP0 Adapter
1. Remove the expansion cover.
There is no expansion cover for the expansion FP0 adapter.
2. Fit the expansion connector cable into the expansion connector part.
3. Push the expansion connector cable inside.
4. Install the expansion cover.
Note:
Although there is no terminator setting switch for the expansion FP0 adapter, the terminator setting has
been done within the expansion FP0 adapter. Turn off the terminator setting switches of the other
expansion units.
5-7

5.3 Expansion Method of FP0 Expansion Unit
The FP0 expansion unit (expansion unit, intelligent unit) is expected by connecting to the right side of the
FP-X expansion FP0 adapter.
Unit expansion is done using the right-side connector for FP0 expansion and expansion hook on the side
of the unit.
1. Raise the expansion hooks on the top and bottom sides of the unit with a screwdriver.
2. Align the pins and holes in the four corners of the control unit and expansion unit, and insert
the pins into the holes so that there is no gap between the units.
3. Press down the expansion hooks raised in step 1 to secure the unit.
5-8

5.4 How to Install Add-on Cassette
The add-on cassette is fitted with the control unit using the provided screws.
Note:
The add-on cassette must be secured with the control unit using the screws in the actual use for
preventing the affect of vibrations.
The backup battery (option) should be before installing the add-on cassette.
The installation must be carried out when the power supply is off. If the power supply is on, it may cause
faults.
Recommended screw
Recommended screw Size and other conditions Quantity
Material: SW pan head (+) P-tight 2.6-16
Tapping screw 2 pcs/1 cassette
galvanization, trivalent chromate (black)
5.4.1 Installing Communication Cassette
Note:
The communication cassette can be installed only in the cassette mounting part 1 of the control
unit.
Installation on the control unit

Connect the connector on the back of the communication cassette and the connector of the cassette
mounting part of the control unit, and secure the two positions, bottom left and top right, with the screws.
It is no problem if the ribs remain. (AFPX-COM5 has no rib.)
The screw’s tightening torque should be 0.3 to 0.5 N･m. Screw securely.
Installation on the application cassette

Remove the cover of the application cassette that was secured previously.
Connect the connector on the back of the communication cassette and the connector at the front of the
application cassette, and secure the two positions, top left and bottom right of the communication
cassette which the ribs were cut, with the screws. (AFPX-COM5 has no rib. Install it after the wiring of
the application cassette.)
5-9

5.4.2 Installing Application Cassette
Note:
The application cassette can be installed only in the cassette mounting part 1 and 2 of the control
unit.
Installation on the control unit

Connect the connector on the back of the application cassette and the connector of the cassette
mounting part of the control unit, and secure the two positions, bottom left and top right, with the screws.
5.4.3 Precautions on Installation

Do not touch the back side of the add-on cassette and the connector.
The parts such as IC, etc. may be damaged by static electricity.
5.4.4 State When Add-on Cassette is Installed
5-10

5.5 Power Supply
5.5.1 AC Power Supply

Wiring of power supply
Confirm that the power supply voltage is within the allowable range of the power supply.
Allowable voltage Allowable frequency
Rated input voltage Rated frequency
amplitude range range
100 to 240 V AC 85 to 264 V AC 50/60 Hz 47 to 63 Hz
Note:
Using the power supply of the outlying voltage and frequency, or using inappropriate wires may cause
the fault of the power supply of the PLC.
Reference: <5.7 Wiring of Terminal Block>
Isolation of power supply systems

Isolate the wiring systems to the FP-X, output devices and mechanical power apparatus.
5-11

Note: Power supply of the FP-X expansion units
Be sure to supply power to the FP-X expansion units and the control unit from the same power supply,
and turn the power on and off simultaneously for both.
To avoid the influence of noises

Use the power supply causing less noise. The inherent noise resistance is sufficient for the noise
superimposed on the power wires, however, the noise can be attenuated further by using the isolation
transformer.
Also, twist the power supply cables to minimize adverse effects from noise.
Grounding
Ground the instrument to increase noise suppression.
Exclusive grounding
• For grounding purposes, use wiring with a minimum of 2 mm . The grounding connection should have
2
a resistance of less than 100Ω.

• The point of grounding should be as close to the PLC unit as possible. The ground wire should be as
short as possible.
• If two devices share a single ground point, it may produce an adverse effect. Always use an exclusive
ground for each device.
5-12

5.5.2 DC Power Supply
Wiring of power supply
Confirm that the power supply voltage is within the allowable range of the power supply.
Allowable voltage
Rated input voltage
amplitude range
24 VDC 20.4 to 28.8 VDC
Note:
Using the power supply of the outlying voltage, or using inappropriate wires may cause the fault of the
power supply of the PLC.
Reference: <5.7 Wiring of Terminal Block>
Isolation of power supply systems

Isolate the wiring systems to the FP-X, output devices and mechanical power apparatus.
5-13

Note: Power supply of the FP-X expansion units
Be sure to supply power to the FP-X expansion units and the control unit from the same power supply,
and turn the power on and off simultaneously for both.
To avoid the influence of noises

Use the power supply causing less noise. The inherent noise resistance is sufficient for the noise
superimposed on the power wires, however, the noise can be attenuated further by using the isolation
transformer.
Also, twist the power supply cables to minimize adverse effects from noise.
Grounding
Ground the instrument to increase noise suppression.
Exclusive grounding
• For grounding purposes, use wiring with a minimum of 2 mm . The grounding connection should have
2
a resistance of less than 100Ω.

short as possible.
5-14

5.5.3 Power Supply for Expansion FP0 Adapter
Power supply wiring for the unit

Use the power supply cable (Part No.:AFP0581) that comes with the unit to connect the power supply.
- Brown: 24V DC
- Blue: 0V
- Green: Function earth (FE)
Power supply wire

To minimize adverse effects from noise, twist the brown and blue wires of the power supply cable.
Power supply from the servicing power supply for the input of the FP-X control unit
• To protect the system against erroneous voltage from the power supply line, use an insulated power
supply with an internal protective circuit (electric cable that reinforced insulation or double insulation
has been made).
• The regulator on the unit is a non-insulated type.
• To turn the power supplies on simultaneously, supply the power for the expansion FP0 adapter from
the servicing power supply for the input of the FP-X control unit.
5-15

Measures regarding power supply sequence (start up sequence)
• To ensure and ease the power supply sequence of the expansion FP0 adapter, supply the power for
the expansion FP0 adapter from the servicing power supply for the input of the FP-X control unit.
• The power supply sequence should be set up so that power to the FP0 expansion unit is turned on
before the FP-X system power supply.
• The power supply sequence should be set up so that power to the FP-X system and FP0 expansion
unit is turned off before the input/output power supplies. If the input/output power supplies are turned
off before the power to the expansion FP0 adapter, the control unit will detect the input fluctuations and
may begin an unscheduled operation.
When turning on:

Power supply for FP0 → Power supply for FP-X, Expansion FP0 adapter → Power supplies for I/O
devices
When turning off:
Power supply for FP-X, Expansion FP0 adapter → Power supply for FP0 → Power supplies for I/O
devices
Grounding
- In situations of excess noise
Under normal conditions, the inherent noise resistance is sufficient. However, in situations of excess
noise, ground the instrument to increase noise suppression.
- Exclusive grounding
• The grounding connection should have a resistance of less than 100Ω.
short as possible.
Note:
Depending on the surroundings in which the equipment is used, grounding may cause problems.
[Example]
Since the power supply line of the expansion FP0 adapter power supply connector is connected to the
function earth through a varistor, if there is an irregular potential between the power supply line and earth,
the varistor may be shorted.
5-16

5.6 Wiring of Input and Output
Do not apply the voltage that exceeds the rated input voltage to the input terminal.
5.6.1 Input Wiring

Connection of photoelectric sensor and proximity sensor
Relay output type NPN open collector output type
Voltage output type Two-wire output type
Precaution when using LED-equipped lead switch
When a LED is connected in series to an input

contact such as LED-equipped lead switch, make
sure that the on voltage applied to the PLC input
terminal is greater than 21.6V DC. In particular,
take care when connecting a number of switches
in series.
Precaution when using two-wire type sensor

If the input of PLC does not turn off because of
leakage current from the two-wire type sensor
“photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor”, the use
of a bleeder resistor is recommended, as shown
below.
The formula is based on an input impedance of

5.6kΩ. The input impedance varies depending on
the input terminal number.
5-17

Precaution when using LED-equipped limit switch
If the input of PLC does not turn off because of
the leakage current from the LED-equipped limit
switch, the use of a bleeder resistor is
recommended, as shown below.
Servicing power supply for input

Use it for input and the expansion FP0 adapter. (Use an external power supply for the FP0 expansion
unit.)
When it is used for another device, confirm the consumption current of the device side before it is
connected. If excess current is being supplied for a long time, the power supply may be damaged.
5.6.2 Output Wiring

Do not connect a load that exceeds the maximum switching ability to the output terminal.
Protective circuit for inductive loads

• With an inductive load, a protective circuit should be installed in parallel with the load.
• When switching DC inductive loads with relay output type, be sure to connect a diode across the ends
of the load.
When using an AC inductive load
5-18

When using a DC inductive load
Precautions when using capacitive loads

When connecting loads with large in-rush currents, to minimize their effect, connect a protection circuit
as shown below.
5.6.3 Precautions Regarding Input and Output Wirings

Isolate input/output/power lines
• Be sure to select the thickness (dia.) of the input and output wires while taking into consideration the
required current capacity.
• Arrange the wiring so that the input and output wiring are separated, and these wirings are separated
from the power wiring, as much as possible. Do not route them through the same duct or wrap them up
together.
• Separate the input/output wires from the power and high voltage wires by at least 100mm.
• Wirings other than the above specifications or incorrect wirings may cause the fault or malfunction.
Others
• Wiring should be carried out after the power supply to the PLC was turned off.
• Also turn of the power supply when the control unit, expansion units and various cassettes are
connected. If they are connected during the power supply is on, it may cause the fault or malfunction.
5-19

5.7 Wiring of Terminal Block
Supplied terminal block/Suitable wires
M3 terminal screws are used for the terminal. The following suitable solderless terminals are
recommended for the wiring to the terminals
Suitable solderless terminals

2
Manufacturer Shape Part No. Suitable wires (mm )
Round type 1.25-MS3
0.25 to 1.65
Fork type 1.25-B3A
JST Mfg. Co., Ltd.
Round type 2-MS3
1.04 to 2.63
Fork type 2-N3A
Suitable wires
Suitable wires Tightening torque
2
AWG22 to 14 0.3 to 2.0 mm
The tightening torque should be 0.5 to 0.6 N･m
Connection to the terminal block

When using the round type terminal, remove the terminal cover.
Note:
Install the terminal block cover as it was after wiring to prevent electric shock.
5-20

How to remove the terminal block
The terminal blocks used for C30/C60/E30 can be removed for fitting the screws.
(The terminal block for C14/E16 cannot be removed.)
The tightening torque should be 0.25 to 0.35 N•m.
5-21

5.8 Wiring of Add-on Cassette Terminal Block
A screw-down connection type for terminal block is used for the add-on cassette. The suitable wires are
given below.
Suitable wires (twisted)

Size Nominal cross-sectional area
2
AWG #28 to 16 0.08 to 1.00 mm
Pole terminal with a compatible insulation sleeve

If a pole terminal is being used, the following models manufactured by Phoenix Contact Co. should be
used.
Part No.
Cross-sectional
Manufacturer 2 Size With Without
area (mm )
insulating sleeve insulating sleeve
0.25 AWG #24 AI 0, 25-6 BU A 0,25-7
Phoenix
0.34 AWG #22 AI 0,34-6TQ A 0, 34-6
Contact Co.
0.50 AWG #20 AI 0,5-6WH A 0, 5-6
Pressure welding tool for pole terminals

Manufacturer Part No. Product No.
Phoenix Contact Co. CRIMPFOX 6T-F 1212038
For tightening the terminal block

When tightening the terminals of the terminal block, use a screwdriver (Phoenex Contact Co. Product No.
1205037) with a blade size of 0.4 × 2.5 (Part No. SZS 0,4×2,5).
The tightening torque should be 0.22 to 0.25 N･m.
5-22

Wiring method
(1) Remove a portion of the wire’s insulation.
(2) Insert the wire into the terminal block until it contacts the back of the block socket, and then
tighten the screw clockwise to fix the wire in place. (Tightening torque: 0.22 to 0.25 Name)
Precautions on wiring
• When removing the wire’s insulation, be careful not to scratch the core wire.
• Do not twist the wires to connect them.
• Do not solder the wires to connect them. The solder may break due to vibration.
• After wiring, make sure stress is not applied to the wire.
• In the terminal block socket construction, if the wire closes upon counter-clockwise rotation, the
connection is faulty. Disconnect the wire, check the terminal hole, and then re-connect the wire.
• If two wires are connected to the plus terminal and minus terminal of the RS485, use the wires of the
2
same cross-sectional area which is 0.5 mm .
5-23

5.8.1 Transmission Cables
Please use the following cables for systems using the communication cassette.
Appropriate electrical cables (twisted cables)

Conductor Insulator
Sample
Cross-sectional Resist- Cable
Type Thick- appropriate
view Size ance Material diam.
ness cable
(at 20°C)
Belden 9207
Shielded Max. Hitachi Cable,
0.5 mm2 Polye- Max. Approx.
twisted 33.4 Ltd. KPEV-
(AWG20) thylene 0.5 mm 7.8 mm
pair Ω/km S0.5 mm2 x
1P
Max. Polychlo-
0.5 mm2 Max. Approx. VCTF-0.5
VCTF 37.8 rinated
(AWG20) 0.6 mm 6.2 mm mm2 x 2C(JIS)
Ω/km biphenyl
Shielded 0.3 mm2 Max. Onamba Co.,

Vinyl Max. Approx.
multicore (AWG22) 58.8 Ltd. ONB-D6 x
chloride 0.3 mm 6.6 mm
cable or greater Ω/km 0.3 mm2
Note:
• Use shielded twisted pair cables.
• Use only one type of transmission cable. Do not mix more than 1 type.
• Twisted pair cables are recommended in noisy environments.
• When using shielded cable with crossover wiring for the RS485 transmission line, grounded one end.
• If two wires are connected to the plus terminal and minus terminal of the RS485, use the wires of the
2
same cross-sectional area which is 0.5 mm .
5-24

5.9 Handling of Backup Battery
5.9.1 What Backup Battery Does

Install an optional backup battery when the hold area is insufficient in the initial state or for using the
clock/calender function.
Areas backed up with the battery
Hold area when Hold area when
Classification
battery is not installed battery is installed
Timer and counter C1008 to C1023
Timer and counter Hold areas or non-
EV1008 to EV1023 hold areas can be
Elapsed value area
specified arbitrarily
Internal relay R2480 to R255F
by setting the
Operation memory C14 DT12230 to DT12284 system registers
Data register
C30/C60 DT32710 to DT32764 No.6 to No.13 using
a programming
Step ladder None
tool. (All points can
Link relay None be also held.)
Link register None
Special data
Clock/calender None All points
register
Type of backup battery (Sold separately)
Name: Battery
Product No.: AFPX-BATT
Installable number of batteries

As for FP-X, the installable number of batteries varies depending on the types of the control unit.
5-25

5.9.2 Settings of Battery Error Alarm and Hold Area
Setting of the battery error alarm
- Setting the battery error alarm enables you to monitor the remaining backup battery level. By default,
the battery error alarm is set to off in the system register settings. For using the battery, check the box
of the system register No.4 "Alarm Battery Error" of the control unit.
Settings of Hold area/Non-hold area

- The settings of the operation memory area such as data registers and system registers No.6 to No.14
are necessary.
Note:
- When "Battery Error Alarm" is not set, the ERR.LED will not flash even if a battery error is detected.
Note that data may be lost as the result of the battery shutoff.
- The setting of the system registers Nos. 6 to 14 is effective only when the backup battery is mounted.
- Without the battery, use at the default settings. If changing the settings, the “Hold/Non-hold” operation
becomes unstable.
5-26

5.9.3 Replacement of Backup Battery
The procedure for replacing the backup battery is as follows.
Procedure
1. Supply power to the control unit for more than five minutes.
Charge the built-in capacitor to retain the contents of the memory during the replacement of the
battery.
2. Turn off the power supply.
3. Remove the battery cover using a tool such as a screwdriver.
4. Remove the used battery.

5. Install a new battery within two minutes after turning off the power.
Place the battery to fit into the guide section of the control unit and connect the connector.
6. Install the battery cover and expansion cover.
Note:
- If the power is not sufficiently supplied or it takes too much time to replace the battery, retained memory
data may be lost.
5-27

5.9.4 Lifetime and Time for Replacement of Backup Battery
Battery lifetime: when the master memory cassette (AFPX-MRTC) is installed
Number of Suggested
Type of control unit Battery lifetime
installed batteries replacement interval
C14 1 pc 2.1 years or more 3 years
1 pc 1.8 years or more 3 years
C30
2 pcs 3.7 years or more 5 years
C60 2 pcs 3.7 years or more 5 years
Note1) The battery lifetime is the value when no power at all is supplied.
Note2) Note that the lifetime may be shorter than the typical lifetime depending on the use conditions.
Note3) The battery is used for the battery detection circuit even when power is supplied.
Battery lifetime: when the master memory cassette (AFPX-MRTC) is not installed
Number of Suggested
Type of control unit Battery lifetime
installed batteries replacement interval
C14 1 pc 3.3 years or more 5 years
C30
C60 2 pcs 5.4 years or more 8 years
Note1) The battery lifetime is the value when no power at all is supplied.
Note2) Note that the lifetime may be shorter than the typical lifetime depending on the use conditions.
Note3) The battery is used for the battery detection circuit even when power is supplied.
Detection of battery error and time for replacement

- Special internal relays R9005 and R9006 will go on if the battery voltage drops. Create a program to
announce errors to the outside as necessary. Two seconds after starting supplying power, the battery
voltage is checked.
- When the system register No.4 "Battery Error Alarm" is enabled, the ERR.LED of the control unit will
flash.
- Although data will be retained for about a week after the detection of battery error without power, the
battery should be replaced as soon as possible.
Note:
- If a week has passed without power after the special internal relays R9005 and R9006 turned on or the
ERR.LED flashed, retained memory data may be lost.
- Regardless of how much time has passed after the detection of battery error, supply power to the
control unit for more than two minutes before replacing the battery.
- Special internal relays R9005 and R9006 will be on when a battery error is detected regardless of the
setting of system register No.4.
5-28

5.10 Safety Measures
5.10.1 Safety Measures

Precautions regarding system design
In certain applications, malfunction may occur for the following reasons:
• Power on timing differences between the PLC system and input/output or mechanical power apparatus.
• Response time lag when a momentary power drop occurs.
• Abnormality in the PLC unit, external power supply, or other devices.
In order to prevent a malfunction resulting in system shutdown choose the adequate safety measures
listed in the following:
Interlock circuit
When a motor clockwise/counter-clockwise operation is controlled, provide an interlock circuit externally.
Emergency stop circuit
Provide an emergency stop circuit to the PLC externally to turn off the power supply of the output device.
Start up sequence
The PLC should be operated after all of the outside devices are energized. To keep this sequence, the
following measures are recommended:
• Turn on the PLC with the mode selector set to the PROG. mode, and then switch to the RUN mode.
• Program the PLC so as to disregard the inputs and outputs until the outside devices are energized.
Note) In case of stopping the operation of the PLC also, have the input/output devices turned off after the
PLC has stopped operating.
Grounding
When installing the PLC next to devices that generate high voltages from switching, such as inverters,
do not ground them together. Use an exclusive ground for each device.
The terminal block cover must be used for preventing electric shock.
5.10.2 Momentary Power Failures

Operation of momentary power failures
If the duration of the power failure is less than 10 ms, the FP-X continues to operate. If the power is off
for 10 ms or longer, operation changes depending on the combination of units, the power supply voltage,
and other factors. (In some cases, operation may be the same as that for a power supply reset.)
Although the duration of the power failure for the expansion FP0 adapter is 10 ms, judge the permissible
time as a system after confirming the permissible duration of the power failures for the DC power supply
that supplies power to the expansion FP0 adapter. (Supply the power to it from the servicing power
supply for the input of the FP-X control unit.) When the expansion unit that has a power supply built-in
(E30 expansion FP0 adapter), depending on the duration of the momentary power failure, only one unit
may be without electricity momentarily and the I/O verify error may occur. In that case, turn off the power
supply and then turn on again.
5.10.3 Protection of Output Sections

Protection of output
If current exceeding the rated control capacity is being supplied in the form of a motor lock current or a
coil shorting in an electromagnetic device, a protective element such as a fuse should be attached
externally.
5-29

5-30

Chapter 6
Tool Port and USB Port

6.1 Tool Port and USB Port
Tool port (RS232C)

This port is used to connect a programming tool.
A commercial mini-DIN 5-pin connector is used for the Tool port on the control unit.
Pin No. Signal name Abbreviation Signal direction
1 Signal Ground SG −
2 Send Data SD Unit → External device
3 Receive Data RD Unit ← External device
4 (Not used) − −
5 +5V +5V Unit → External device
The followings are the default settings set when the unit is shipped from the factory.
- Baud rate …….. 9600 bps
- Character bit …. 8 bit
- Parity check ….. Odd parity
- Stop bit length .. 1 bit
USB connector
This is a connector to connect the programming tool.
Commercial USB cables (AB type) can be used.
The connector is the commercial B type.
6-2

6.2 Functions of Tool Port
6.2.1 Tool Port

With the tool port, the FP-X offers two different communication modes as below.
Computer link
• Computer link is used for communication with a computer connected to the PLC. Instructions
(command messages) are transmitted to the PLC, and the PLC responds (sends response messages)
based on the instructions received.
• A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL-COM is used to exchange data between the
computer and the PLC. There are two different communication methods, 1:1 and 1:N communication. A
1:N network is called a C-NET. The maximum of 99 FP-X units can be connected with one personal
computer.
• The PLC answers automatically to the commands received from the computer, so no program is
necessary on the PLC side in order to carry out communication.
General-purpose serial communication

• With general-purpose serial communication, data can be sent back and forth between an image
processing device connected to the COM. port and an external device such as a bar code reader.
• Reading and writing of data is done using a ladder program in the FP-X, while reading and writing of
data from an external is handled through the data registers.
• It is available only in the RUN mode. The computer link mode is automatically selected in the RPOG
mode so that the tool etc. can be connected.
Note:
• The data received before changing to the PROG mode remain in the data registers. Execute the F159
(MTRN) instruction right after the mode was changed to the RUN mode and clear them.
6-3

6.2.2 Tool Port Setting
Setting communication parameters in the computer link mode
Setting for Baud rate and communication format
The settings for baud rate and communication format of the tool port are entered using the FPWIN GR.
Select “Options” in the menu bar, and then select “PLC Configuration”. Double-click “Tool Port”.
Dialog box of PLC system register setting
No. 410 unit number

The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 99.
No. 412 Communication mode

Select the tool port operation mode:
Click on , and select “Computer Link”.
No. 413 Communication Format setting

Default setting:
Char. Bit …………… 8 bits
Parity ………………. Odd
Stop Bit ……………. 1 bit
Terminator ………… Cannot be specified
Header …………….. Cannot be specified
To change the communication format to match an external device connected to the tool port, enter the
settings for the various items. (The terminator and the header cannot be changed.)
No. 415 Baud rate setting

The default setting for the baud rate is 9600 bps. Change the value to match the external device
connected to the tool port:
Click on , and select one of the values from 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 bps.
6-4

Setting communication parameters in the general-purpose serial communication mode
By default, the tool port is set to “Computer link”. System register settings should be entered for the
following items.
The settings for baud rate and communication format are made using the FPWIN GR programming tool.
Select “Options” in the menu bar, and then select “PLC Configuration”. Click “Tool Port”.
No. 412 Communication Mode

Select the tool port operation mode:
Click on , and select “General Communication”.
No. 413 Communication Format setting

Default setting:
Terminator ………… CR
Header …………….. STX not exist
To change the communication format to match an external device connected to the tool port, enter the
settings for the various items.

The default setting for the baud rate is 9600 bps. Change the value to match the external device
connected to the tool port:
No. 420 Starting address for data received in general-purpose communication mode
No. 421 Buffer capacity setting for data received in general-purpose communication mode
To use general-purpose serial communication, the receive buffer must be specified. To change this area,
specify the starting address using system register no. 420 and the volume (number of words) using no.
421. The receive buffer layout is shown below.
6-5

6.3 USB Port
6.3.1 Functions of USB Port

With the USB port, the FP-X offers one communication mode as below.
Computer link
• Computer link is used for communication with a computer connected to the PLC. Instructions
(command messages) are transmitted to the PLC, and the PLC responds (sends response messages)
based on the instructions received.
• A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL-COM is used to exchange data between the
computer and the PLC. There are two different communication methods, 1:1 and 1:N communication. A
1:N network is called a C-NET. The maximum of 99 FP-X units can be connected with one personal
computer.
• The PLC answers automatically to the commands received from the computer, so no program is
necessary on the PLC side in order to carry out communication.
6-6

6.3.2 USB Port Setting
Setting communication parameters in the computer link mode
The settings for baud rate and communication format of the tool port are entered using the FPWIN GR.
Select “Options” in the menu bar, and then select “PLC Configuration”. Click “COM2 Port”.
Key Point:
The default setting is “Internal USB” for the port selection so that the setting is not necessary
unless the default setting has not been changed.
No. 411 unit number


Select “Internal USB” for the port selection. The communication mode is "Computer Link".
No. 414 (for COM2 port) Communication Format setting

Default setting:
Terminator ………… CR (fixed)
Header …………….. No STX (fixed)
To change the communication format to match an external device connected to the USB (COM2) port,
enter the settings for the various items.

The baud rate is fixed at 115200 bps.
Restrictions
The USB (COM2) port supports all the commands of the MEWTOCOL-COM.
There is no restriction.
6-7

6.3.3 USB Connection
The FP-X C30 control unit and C60 control unit is equipped with the USB connector. Connecting the
units with a personal computer using the USB cable enables the communication with our software such
as FPWIN GR. (The FP-X C14 control unit is not equipped with the USB connector.)
It is a communication method that uses the USB as a virtual serial port, so that the FP-X connected with
the USB is treated from the PC as that it is connected via the COM port.
(Note that the USB is equivalent to the serial port.)
Necessary items for the connection

About PC
The PC with the following OS is necessary to connect the FP-X with the USB.
Windows98 Second Edition

WindowsMe
Windows2000
WindowsXP
Note: The FP-X cannot be connected with the USB cable when using Windows95.
About programming tool

The following programming tool is necessary.
Relay type Transistor type
FPWIN GR: Ver. 2.50 or later version FPWIN GR: Ver. 2.70 or later version
About USB cable

A commercial cable is necessary.
Cable for SUB 2.0 (or 1.1) (AB type) Max. 5 m
6-8

6.3.4 USB Connection Procedure
This procedure should be performed only once for the first connection. It is not necessary to do
it from the next time.
However, the communication setting must be changed when switching between the USB connection and
the tool port connection.
6.3.5 Installation of FPWIN GR

Install the FPWIN GR (Relay type: Ver. 2.50 or later version) (Transistor type: Ver.2.70 or later
version) before connecting the FP-X with a PC.
Note:
Do not connect the FP-X to a PC with the USB cable before the FPWIN GR is installed or during
the installation.
If they are connected, the USB driver will not be installed correctly.
Reference: <6.3.9 Reinstallation of USB Driver>
Reference:
For the information on the installation of the FPWIN GR, <FPWIN GR Ver. 2 Operation Guide Book
ARCT1F332>
6-9

6.3.6 Installation of USB Driver
Following 2 USB drivers must be installed to recognize the USB.
• USB driver
• USB-COM conversion driver
The installation procedures differ depending on the OS in the PC to be used.
Note:
For the PC with more than one connectors, it may be requested to reinstall these 2 drivers if the
positions of the USB connecters are changed. In that case, reinstall the drivers.
With Windows XP
1. Turn on the power supply of the FP-X, and connect the FP-X with a PC using the USB cable.
2. After the connection, the PC recognize the USB driver automatically. As the following message
is shown, select “No, not this time”, and click “Next”.
Note) This display is not be shown with WindowsXP SP1.
6-10

3. The next message is shown. Select “Install the software automatically”, and click “Next”.
4. The installation of the USB driver starts.

Although an alert for the Windows logo testing is indicated during the installation, click
“Continue Anyway” to continue the installation.
6-11

5. The next message is shown and the installation of the USB driver completes. Click “Finish”.
6. After that, the PC recognizes the USB-COM conversion driver automatically. As the next
message is shown, select “No, not this time”, and click “Next”.
Note) This display is not be shown with WindowsXP SP1.
6-12

7. The next message is shown. Select “Install the software automatically”, and click “Next”.
8. The installation of the USB driver starts.

Although an alert for the Windows logo testing is indicated during the installation, click
“Continue Anyway” to continue the installation.
6-13

9. The next message is shown and the installation of the USB-COM conversion driver completes.
Click “Finish”.
The installation of the USB driver has been completed.
6-14

With Windows2000/WindowsMe
After a PC recognized the USB driver, the installation is started automatically. You do not need to carry
out operation for the installation particularly.
Note that the messages during the installation are not indicated.
With Windows98 Second Edition

1. After the connection, the PC recognizes the USB driver automatically. As the following
message is shown, click “Next”.
2. The next message is shown. Select “Search for the best driver for your device”, and click
“Next”.
6-15

3. Check only “Specify a location”, and input the following folder name in “Specify a location”.
“c:/Program Files/Panasonic MEW Control/FP-X USB”
Uncheck the other boxes, and then click “Next”.
4. As the next message is shown, click “Next”.
6-16

5. The next message is shown and the installation of the USB driver completes. Click “Finish”.
The installation of the USB driver has been completed.
(It is not necessary to install the USB-COM conversion driver with Windows98Second Edition.)
6-17

6.3.7 Confirming COM Ports
The USB connected to the FP-X is recognized by the PC as a COM port. It depends on your PC
environment to which COM port the USB is allocated. Therefore, it is necessary to confirm the COM port
number allocated.
Procedure for displaying Device Manager

Displaying Device Manager
Displays Device Manager when the FP-X is connected to the PC with the USB cable.
The display method varies depending on the OS in the PC to be used.
In case of WindowsXP
“My computer” → “View System information” → Click “Hardware” tab → Click “Device Manager”.
In case of Windows2000
“My computer” → “Control panel” → “System” → Click “Hardware” tab → Click “Device manager” →
Click “View” menu→ “Device by type”.
With Windows98 Second Edition/WindowsMe

“My computer” → “Control panel” → “System” → Click “Device manager” tab, and select “View devices
by type”.
6-18

Procedure for confirming COM ports
1. Display “Device Manager”.
Reference: <6.3.7 Confirming COM Ports>
2. Double-click “Ports (COM & LPT)”. As the table of allocation of COM ports, confirm the COM
port No.
“CP210x USB to UART Bridge Controller (COM n)” is the allocated COM port.
COM9 is allocated in the following display.
Key Point:
COM port No. is necessary for the connection with the FPWIN GR, etc.
Note:
When “? CP210x USB to UART Bridge Controller” in “Other devices” or “Unknown device” is indicated,
the installation has been failed. Reinstall the USB driver.
Reference: <6.3.9 Reinstallation of USB Driver>
6-19

6.3.8 Communication with FPWIN GR
1. Boot up the FPWIN GR.
2. When the FPWIN GR activates, the download select window will open.
Select “Cancel” here.
3. Select “Communication setting” in “Option” menu.
4. Specify the communication setting as the table below. Once the setting has been completed,
the communication with the USB becomes available.
Network type C-NET (RS232C)

Port No. COM port No. allocated for the USB
Baud rate Specify 115200 bps.
(Communicates with 115200 bps when the USB is connected)
Data length 8 bits
Stop bit 1 bit
Parity Odd
6-20

6.3.9 Reinstallation of USB Driver
The USB driver must be installed again if the installation was carried out in wrong procedures or
cancelled in the process.
Also, reinstall the driver when the USB connection does not work well.
Confirming the status of the USB driver

1. Display “Device manager”.
Reference: <6.3.7 Confirming COM Ports>
2. If “? CP210X USB to UART Bridge Controller” is indicated in “Other devices” or “Unknown

device”, the installation of the USB driver has been failed.
Reinstallation of the USB driver

Right-click “? CP210X USB to UART Bridge Controller”, and select “Delete” to delete the driver.
Reinserting the USB cable displays the window for the installation of the USB driver. Reinstall
the USB driver.
Reference: <6.3.6 Installation of USB Driver>
6-21

6.3.10 Restrictions on USB Communication
There are restrictions on the USB communication.
• A personal computer having the USB and with the OS supporting the USB
(Windows98 Second Edition/ WindowsMe/ Windows2000/ WindowsXP) to connect the FP-
X using the USB.
• The FP-X connected to the USB is recognized by the PC as that is connected through the COM
port.
• The COM port No. of the COM port allocated for the USB is fixed unless you change the number.
• The baud rate when using the USB is 115200 bps.
• The USB port is allocated to the COM2 port, and the functions of the communication cassette
are restricted as below.
The USB port is available in the default setting (It is the same when the system registers are
initialized).
When USB port is not used When USB port is used
AFPX-COM1 5-wire 1-channel RS232C
(RS and CS control is not available.)
(The 2nd channel cannot be used.)
AFPX-COM3 No restrictions, 1-channel RS485/RS422
1-channel RS485 1-channel RS485
AFPX-COM4
1-channel RS232C (RS232C cannot be used.)
Ethernet Ethernet
AFPX-COM5
AFPX-COM6 2-channel RS485 1-channel RS485
Note) There is no USB port for the C14 control unit.
• When multiple FP-X are connected to one PC with the USB, it cannot communicates with them
simultaneously. The PC can communication with only the FP-X that was connected first, and
other FP-X cannot communicate.
6-22

Chapter 7
Communication Cassette

7.1 Functions and Types
7.1.1 Overview of Communication Cassette
Note:
There are restrictions on the combination of the USB port and communication cassette (for C30/C60
only).
Reference: <7.1.6 About USB Port (For C30/C60 Only)>
7-2

7.1.2 Functions of Communication Cassette
With the communication cassette, the FP-X offers four different communication modes as below.
Computer link
• The computer link function is to communicate between a computer and PLCs or between PLC and
external devices connected. A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL-COM is used for
communicating with the computer link. MEWTOCOL-COM is also used for the communication between
the tool software such as FPWIN-GR and the PLC.
• There are a MEWTOCOL master function and a MEWTOCOL slave function for the computer link. The
side that issues commands is called master, and the side that receives the commands, executes the
process and sends back responses is called slave.
Note:
It is necessary to set the system register of the communication port to the computer link for using this
function.
1. Only the slave function is available for the FP-X relay type Ver1.20 or former version.
2. Both the master and slave functions are available for the FP-X transistor type and relay type Ver1.21
or later version, however, the master function is not available for the TOOL port.
MEWTOCOL master function (Transistor type and relay type Ver1.21 or later version)
• This function is to carry out the communication on the master side (side 0that issues commands) of the
computer link. It is executed with the PLC’s instruction F145(SEND) or F146(RECV). It is not necessary
to write the response process as a ladder, so the program is easier than the general-purpose
communication function.
The 1:1 or 1:N communication is available between our devices equipped with the computer link function
and the MEWTOCOL-COM.
[Our devices (e.g.)] : PLC, IPD, temperature control unit, eco-power meter
For the MEWTOCOL master function, communication is possible with the COM1 and COM2 ports only.
Do not execute the F145 (SEND) nor F146 (RECV) instructions when the unit is used as a slave unit.
7-3

MEWTOCOL slave function
• This function is to receive commands from the computer link, execute the process and send back the
results. Any special ladder program is not necessary to use this function. (Set the communication
conditions in the system registers.) It enables the 1:1 or 1:N communication with a master computer or
PLC.
• The program for the computer side must be written in BASIC or C language according to the
MEWTOCOL-COM. MEWTOCOL-COM contains the commands used to monitor and control PLC
operation.

• With general-purpose serial communication, data can be sent back and forth between an image
processing device connected to the COM port and an external device such as a bar code reader.
• Reading and writing of data is done using a ladder program in the FP-X, while reading and writing of
data from an external is handled through the data registers.
7-4

PC(PLC) link
The FP-X supports the link system that connects the PC(PLC) link corresponding to the MEWNET-W0
(max. 16 units) with the twisted pair cables.
• In a PC(PLC) link, data is shared with all PLCs connected via MEWNET using dedicated internal relays
called link relays (L) and data registers called link registers (LD).
• If the link relay contact for one PLC goes on, the same link relay also goes on in each of the other
PLCs connected to the network. Likewise, if the contents of a link register are rewritten in one PLC, the
change is made in the same link register of each of the other PLCs connected to the network.
• The status of the link relays and link registers in any one PLC is fed back to all of the other PLCs
connected to the network, so control of data that needs to be consistent throughout the network, such
as target production values and type codes, can easily be implemented to coordinate the data, and the
data of all units are updated at the same time.
- Link relay
In the figure below, when link relay L0 of the master station (no.1) turns on, this signal is converted by
the programs of the other stations, and Y0 of the other stations is activated.
- Link register
In the figure below, if a constant of 100 is written to LD0 of the master station (no.1), the contents of LD0
in the other stations are also changed to a constant of 100.
Only the COM1 port can be used for the PC(PLC) link. (Excluding AFPX-COM5)
7-5

MODBUS RTU
Function overview
 The MODBUS RTU protocol enables the communication between the FP-X and other devices
(including our FP-e, Programmable display GT series and KT temperature control unit).
 Enables to have conversations if the master unit sends instructions (command messages) to slave
units and the slave units respond (response messages) according to the instructions.
 Enables the communication between the devices of max. 99 units as the master function and slave
function is equipped.
 The communication cassette can be used.
About MODBUS RTU

 The MODBUS RTU communication is a function for the master unit to read and write the data in slave
units communicating between them.
 There are ASCI mode and RTU (binary) mode in the MODBUS protocol, however, the FP-X is
supported with the RTU (binary) mode only.
Master function
Writing and reading data for various slaves is available using the F145 (SEND) and F146 (RECV)
instructions.
Individual access to each slave and the global transmission is possible.
Slave function
If the slave units receive a command message from the master unit, they send back the response
message corresponding to the content.
Do not execute the F145 (SEND) nor F146 (RECV) instructions when the unit is used as a slave unit.
7-6

7.1.3 Communication Cassettes
Name Specifications I/O No. Product No.
FP-X
5-wire type
communication − AFPX-COM1
1-channel RS232C
cassette
FP-X
3-wire type
2-channel RS232C
cassette
FP-X
1-channel
RS485/RS422 (isolated)
cassette
• 1-channel
FP-X
RS485 (isolated)
• 3-wire type
cassette
1-channel RS232C
FP-X • Ethernet
communication • 3-wire type − AFPX-COM5
cassette 1-channel RS232C
• 2-channel RS485
FP-X
(isolated)
(non-isolated between
cassette
channels)
7-7

1-channel RS232C Type (Product No.: AFPX-COM1)
This communication cassette is a 1-channel unit with a non-isolated RS232C port. RS/CS control is
possible.
LED indication / Terminal layout

Pin
Name Signal direction Port
name
SD Send Data FP-X  External device
RD Receive Data FP-X  External device COM1
RS Request to Send FP-X  External device port
CS Clear to Send FP-X  External device
SG Signal Ground  
Note1) RS (Request to Send) is controllable by the SYS1 instruction.

Note2) Data cannot be sent without the pin CS (Clear to Send). When using with a three-wire port, short-
circuit the pin RS and CS.
Note3) With the C30 or C60 type, when the USB port is used, the RS and CS signals are invalid (cannot
be controlled).
1:1 communication 1:N communication

Computer link Available -
General-purpose serial communication Available -
PC(PLC) link Available Note)
MODBUS RTU Available -
Note) Number of units is 2.
2-channel RS232C Type (Product No.: AFPX-COM2)

This communication cassette is a 2-channel unit with a non-isolated three-wire RS232C port.

Pin
name
S1 Send Data 1 FP-X  External device COM1
R1 Receive Data 1 FP-X  External device port
S2 Send Data 2 FP-X  External device COM2
R2 Receive Data 2 FP-X  External device port
SG Signal Ground  

Computer link Available -
General-purpose serial communication Available -
PC(PLC) link Available Note1)
MODBUS RTU Available -
Note1) Number of units is 2. (Only the COM1 port can be used.)
Note2) The USB port and the COM2 port (RS232C) of FP-X cannot be used at the same time.
7-8

1-channel RS485/RS422 Type (Product No.: AFPX-COM3)
This communication cassette is a 1-channel unit with an isolated two-wire RS485/four-wire RS422 port.

Pin Name Signal
Port
name RS485 RS422 direction
Transmission Send
S+ −
line (+) Data (+)
Transmission Send
S- −
line (-) Data (-)
COM1
Receive
R+ − − port
Data (+)
Receive
R- − −
Data (-)
− − −
Cassette backside switch

SW1 RS485 RS422
1
2 ON OFF
3
4 ON for terminal unit
Change the switch at the back of the cassette
depending on the state of the communication.

Computer link - Available
General-purpose serial communication - Available
Note)
PC(PLC) link Available
MODBUS RTU - Available
Note) When using this cassette, the data is always transmitted by the STOP bit2 regardless the setting
of stop bit. The data can be received by either STOP bit 1 or 2 regardless the setting of stop bit.
7-9

1-channel RS485 and 1-channel RS232C Combination Type (Product No.: AFPX-COM4)
This communication cassette is a 1-channel unit with an isolated two-wire RS485 port and 1-channel unit
with an isolated three-wire RS232C port.

Pin
name
Transmission
+  RS485
line (+)
(COM1
Transmission
-  Port)
line (-)
SD Send Data FP-X  External device RS232C
RD Receive Data FP-X  External device (COM2
SG Signal Ground  Port)

General-purpose serial communication - Available
PC(PLC) link Available Note1)
MODBUS RTU - Available
Note1) Only the RS485 can be used (COM1 port).
Note3) When using this cassette, the data is always transmitted by the STOP bit2 regardless the setting
of stop bit. The data can be received by either STOP bit 1 or 2 regardless the setting of stop bit.
7-10

Ethernet and 1-channel RS232C Combination Type (Product No.: AFPX-COM5)
This communication cassette is a 1-channel unit with an Ethernet interface and an isolated three-wire
RS232C port. Ethernet performs communication at 100 Mbps or 10 Mpbs, but communication between
AFPX-COM5 and FP-X is performed at up to 115200 bps according to the system register setting of FP-
X.

LEDs for Ethernet
On: Connection establishment
LINK/ACT
Flashing: During communication
On: 100 Mbps
SPD
Off: 10 Mbps
On: Error occurred
ERR
Flashing: Initialization switch ON

Initialization of It is used to restore the setting to the factory default
ON in such a case that an error occurred in
communication setting
communication. The setting is initialized by turning
OFF on electricity with the switch being on. After
Normal communication
(Default) initialization, turn off the power supply of the main
unit, and then turn the switch off.

Computer link Available Available A maximum of 3
General-purpose serial connections are available
Available Not available with the Ethernet
communication
communication in the
PC(PLC) link Note2) Note2) computer link mode.
MODBUS RTU Available Not available
Note2) The PC (PLC) link function of the FP-X is available via Ethernet.
7-11

2-channel RS485 Type (Product No.: AFPX-COM6)
This communication cassette is a 2-channel unit with an isolated two-wire RS485 port.

Pin Signal
Name Port
name direction
Transmission
+(COM1) －
line (+) RS485
Transmission (COM1 port)
-(COM1) －
line (-)
Transmission
+(COM2) －
line (+) RS485
Transmission (COM2 port)
-(COM2) －
line (-)

Terminal resistance COM2 Baud rate Note)
COM1 general unit

115200bps
(Default)
COM1 terminal unit 115200bps
COM2 general unit

19200bps
(Default)
9600bps
COM2 terminal unit
(Default)
Note) The baud rate for the COM1 port is specified only by the system
register. However, for the COM2 port, it should be specified by
the switches and the system register.

General-purpose serial
- Available
communication
PC(PLC) link Available Note1 Note) Only the COM1 port
MODBUS RTU - Available can be used.
Note1) For the COM1 port, the data is always transmitted by the STOP bit 2 regardless the setting of
stop bit. The data can be received by either STOP bit 1 or 2 regardless the setting of stop bit.
Note2) The USB port and the COM2 port (RS485) of FP-X cannot be used at the same time.
7-12

7.1.4 Examples of Connection
AFPX-COM1: 1-channel 5-wire RS232C
Note) When the device to connect is a three-wire type, the RS of the COM 1 port should be connected to
the CS.
AFPX-COM2: 2-channel 3-wire RS232C
AFPX-COM3: 1-channel RS485/RS422

Using RS485
Using RS422
Note) There are several names for the signal names of RS422. Confirm with the instruction manuals for
each device.
7-13

AFPX-COM4: 1-channel RS485 and 1-channel 3-wire RS232C
AFPX-COM5: 1-channel Ethernet and 1-channel 3-wire RS232C
AFPX-COM6: 2-channel RS485
Note) Non-insulated between the COM1 and COM2.
7-14

7.1.5 Names and Principle Applications of the Ports
Port type
Port name Communication function
USB is used USB is not used
Fitted with the main unit as a standard
Computer link
Tool port equipment
(Mini-DIN 5-pin connector)
Computer link
Communication cassette General-purpose serial communication
COM1 port Note)
PC(PLC) link
Communication MODBUS RTU
Fitted with the main unit as cassette
Computer link
a standard equipment
COM2 port General-purpose serial communication
USB port
MODBUS RTU
(For C30/C60 only)
Note) There are restrictions of use on the communication cassette when using the USB port (refer to the
next page).
The PC (PLC) link cannot be used with the AFPX-COM5.
7.1.6 About USB Port (For C30/C60 Only)

The USB port is allocated to the COM2 port, and the functions of the communication cassette are
restricted as below when the USB port is used.
• The USB port is available in the default setting (It is the same when the system registers are initialized).
When USB port is not used When USB port is used

(RS and CS control is not available.)
(The 2nd channel cannot be used.)
AFPX-COM3 No restrictions, 1-channel RS485/RS422
1-channel RS485 1-channel RS485
AFPX-COM4
Ethernet Ethernet
AFPX-COM5
AFPX-COM6 2-channel RS485 1-channel RS485
7-15

7.2 Communication Specifications
Note1) General-purpose serial Note1)
Computer link Note1) MODBUS RTU
communication
PC(PLC)
1:N 1:N 1:N
1:1 1:1 link 1:1
commu- commu- commu-
communication communication communication
nication nication nication
RS232C
Inter-
RS232C RS422 RS485 RS232C RS422 RS485 RS422 RS232C RS422 RS485
face
RS485
-TOOL -TOOL
port port AFPX
AFPX AFPX -COM1 AFPX AFPX
Target AFPX AFPX -COM3 AFPX AFPX -COM3 -COM2 -COM1 AFPX -COM3
items -COM1 -COM3 -COM4 -COM1 -COM3 -COM4 -COM3 -COM2 -COM3 -COM4
-COM2 -COM6 -COM2 -COM6 -COM4 -COM4 -COM6
-COM4 -COM4 -COM6
Two-wire, Two-wire, Two-wire,

Token
Commu- half- half- half-
Half-duplex Half-duplex bus Half-duplex
nication duplex duplex duplex
communication communication (Floating communication
method communi- communi- communi-
master)
cation cation cation
Note1) Although it has adequate tolerance to noise, it is recommendable to make a program to execute
retransmission. (in order to improve reliability of the communication when a communication error
occurs due to excessive noises or when a receiver equipment cannot
receive data temporarily).
Communication port (Ethernet)

Computer link
communication
Interface IEEE802. 3u, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
No. of connections Max. 1 connection (Client) Max. 1 connection
Max. 3 connections (Server)
Server Client, Server Client, Server
Target item AFPX-COM5
7-16

Communication specifications 1 Interface: RS232C, RS422, RS485
Item Specifications
RS232C RS422 (isolated)
Interface Note1) RS485 (isolated) Note1) 2)
(non-isolated)
Communication mode 1:1 communication 1:N communication
Two-wire half-duplex
Communication method Half-duplex communication
communication
Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system
Shielded twisted-pair cable
Transmission line Multicore shielded line
or VCTF
Transmission distance 15 m Max. 1200 m Note1) Max. 1200 m Note1) 2)
Baud rate Note3)
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps
(to be set by system register) Note8)
Computer link ASCII, JIS7, JIS8
Trans-
General-purpose
mission ASCII, JIS7, JIS8, Binary
serial communication
code
MODBUS RTU Binary
Communication Data length 7 bits/8 bits
format Parity None/Even/Odd
(to be set by Stop bit 1 bit/2 bits
system register) Start code STX/No STX
Note4)
End code CR/CR+LF/None/ETX
Max. 99 units
No. of connected units Note5) 6) 7) 2 units (max. 32 units when C-NET
adapter is connected.)
Note1) When connecting a commercially available device that has an RS485 interface, please confirm
operation using the actual device. In some cases, the number of units, transmission distance,
and baud rate vary depending on the connected device.
Note2) The values for the transmission distance, baud rate and number of units should be within the
values noted in the graph below.
When using a baud rate of 300 bps to 38400 bps, you can set up to a maximum of 99 units
(stations) and maximum transmission distance of 1200 m.
Note3) Only 9600 bps or 19200 bps can be specified when the C-NET adapter is connected with the
RS485 interface.
Note4) The start code and end code can be used only in the general-purpose serial communication
mode.
Note5) The converter SI-35 manufactured by Lineeye Co., Ltd is recommendable for the RS485 at the
computer side. Adjust the response time for the FP-X by the SYS1 instruction if necessary.
Note6) Unit numbers should be registered by the system register.
Note7) The termination resistance of the RS485/RS422 in the COM3,COM4 and COM6 is specified by
the dip switch in the communication cassette.
There is no termination resistance at the RS232C port.
7-17

Note8) The baud rates of 300, 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS instruction only (Ver 2.0 or
later).
Communication specifications 2 Interface: Ethernet

Item Specifications
Connector shape: RJ45
Transmission Baud rate 100 Mpbs/10 Mbps
specifications Transmission method Baseband
Note1)
Max. segment length 100 m
Communication cable UTP (Category 5)
Protocol TCP/IP, UDP/IP, ICMP, ARP, DHCP
Function Auto-negotiation function
MDI/MDI-X Auto-crossover function
Note1) The length between a HUB and the module.
7-18

7.2.1 Precaution When Using RS485 Port
AFPX-COM3, AFPX-COM4
SYS1 instruction is available for FP-X, which enables to change the time after receiving a command until
a response is returned.
With the converter SI-35 manufactured by Lineeye Co., Ltd in the RS485 communication, adjust the
response time by this instruction if necessary.
SYS1 instruction: This is to delay a response for [n] scan time to be specified.
Example:
When R0 turns on, the response of COM1 port (RS485 port) delays for two scans. If the scan time is
500µs, it delays for 1 ms.
Reference: <FP series Programming manual ARCT1F313E>
7-19

7.3 Communication Function 1: Computer Link
7.3.1 Computer Link

Overview
Computer link
• The computer link function is to communicate between a computer and PLCs or between PLC and
external devices connected. A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL-COM is used for
communicating with the computer link. MEWTOCOL-COM is also used for the communication between
the tool software such as FPWIN-GR and the PLC.
• There are a MEWTOCOL master function and a MEWTOCOL slave function for the computer link. The
side that issues commands is called master, and the side that receives the commands, executes the
process and sends back responses is called slave.
Note:
It is necessary to set the system register of the communication port to the computer link for using this
function.
1. Only the slave function is available for the FP-X relay type Ver 1.20 or former version.
2. Both the master and slave functions are available for the FP-X transistor type and relay type (Ver 1.21
or later version), however, the master function is not available for the TOOL port.
7-20

MEWTOCOL master function (Transistor type, relay type Ver 1.21 or later version)
• This function is to carry out the communication on the master side (side 0that issues commands) of the
computer link. It is executed with the PLC’s instruction F145(SEND) or F146(RECV). It is not necessary
to write the response process as a ladder, so the program is easier than the general-purpose
communication function.
The 1:1 or 1:N communication is available between our devices equipped with the computer link function
and the MEWTOCOL-COM.
[Our devices (e.g.)] : PLC, IPD, temperature control unit, eco-power meter
MEWTOCOL slave function

• This function is to receive commands from the computer link, execute the process and send back the
results. Any special ladder program is not necessary to use this function. (Set the communication
conditions in the system registers.) It enables the 1:1 or 1:N communication with a master computer or
PLC.
• The program for the computer side must be written in BASIC or C language according to the
MEWTOCOL-COM. MEWTOCOL-COM contains the commands used to monitor and control PLC
operation.
7-21

Outline of operation when using computer link (MEWTOCOL slave)
Command and response
• Instructions issued by the computer to the PLC are called commands. Messages sent back to the
computer from the PLC are called responses. When the PLC receives a command, it processes the
command regardless of the sequence program, and sends a response back to the computer.
MEWTOCOL-COM sketch
• Communication is carried out in a conversational format, based on the MEWTOCOL-COM
communication procedures.
• Data is sent in ASCII format.
• The computer has the first right of transmission. The right of transmission shifts back and forth
between the computer and the PLC each time a message is sent.
7-22

Format of command and response
Command message
All command-related items should be noted in the text segment. The unit number must be specified
before sending the command.
1. Header (start code)

Commands must always have a “%” (ASCII code: H25) or a “<” (ASCII code: H3C) at the beginning of a
message.
2. Unit number
The unit number of the PLC to which you want to send the command must be specified. In 1:1
communication, the unit number “01” (ASCII code: H3031) should be specified. The unit No. of the PLC
is specified by the system register.
3. Text
The content differs depending on the command. The content should be noted in all upper-case
characters, following the fixed formula for the particular command.
4. Check code
BCC (block check code) for error detection using horizontal parity. The BCC should be created so that it
targets all of the text data from the header to the last text character. The BCC starts from the header and
checks each character in sequence, using the exclusive OR operation, and replaces the final result with
character text. It is normally part of the calculation program and is created automatically.
The parity check can be skipped by entering “* *” (ASCII code: H2A2A) instead of the BCC.
5. Terminator (end code)

Messages must always end with a “CR” (ASCII code: H0D).
7-23

Note: When writing
• The method for writing text segments in the message varies depending on the type of command.
• If there is a large number of characters to be written, they may be divided and sent as several
commands. If there is a large number of characters in the value that was loaded, they may be divided
and several responses sent.
Key Point:
• With the FP-X, an expansion header “<” is supported to send single frames of up to 2048 characters as
well as general “%”.
Type of header No. of characters that can be sent in 1 frame
% Max. 118 characters
< Max. 2048 characters
Response message
The PLC that received the command in the example above sends the processing results to the computer.
1. Header (start code)

A “%” (ASCII code: H25) or “<” (ASCII code: H3C) must be at the beginning of a message. The response
must start with the same header that was at the beginning of the command.
2. Unit number
The unit number of the PLC that processed the command is stored here.
3. Text
The content of this varies depending on the type of command. The value should be read based on the
content. If the processing is not completed successfully, an error code will be stored here, so that the
content of the error can be checked.
7-24

4. Check code
BCC (block check code) for error detection using horizontal parity. The BCC starts from the header and
checks each character in sequence, using the exclusive OR operation, and replaces the final result with
character text.
5. Terminator (end code)

There is always a “CR” (ASCII code: H0D) at the end of the message.
Note: When reading

• If no response is returned, the communication format may not be correct, or the command may not
have arrived at the PLC, or the PLC may not be functioning. Check to make sure all of the
communication specifications (e.g. baud rate, data length, and parity) match between the computer and
the PLC.
• If the response contains an “!” instead of a “$”, the command was not processed successfully. The
response will contain a communication error code. Check the meaning of the error code.
• Unit number and command name are always identical in a command and its corresponding response
(see below). This makes the correspondence between a command and a response clear.
7-25

Commands to be used
Command name Code Description
RC Reads the on and off status of contacts.
(RCS) - Specifies only one point.
Read contact area
(RCP) - Specifies multiple contacts.
(RCC) - Specifies a range in word units.
WC Turns contacts on and off.
(WCS) - Specifies only one point.
Write contact area
(WCP) - Specifies multiple contacts.
(WCC) - Specifies a range in word units.
Read data area RD Reads the contents of a data area.
Write data area WD Writes data to a data area.
Read timer/counter set value area RS Reads the timer/counter setting value.
Write timer/counter set value area WS Writes the timer/counter setting value.
Read timer/counter elapsed value area RK Reads the timer/counter elapsed value.
Write timer/counter elapsed value area WK Writes the timer/counter elapsed value.
Register or Reset contacts monitored MC Registers the contact to be monitored.
Register or Reset data monitored MD Registers the data to be monitored.
Monitors a registered contact or data using MD
Monitoring start MG
and MC.
Embeds the area of a specified range in a 16-
Preset contact area (fill command) SC
point on and off pattern.
Writes the same contents to the data area of a
Preset data area (fill command) SD
specified range.
Read system register RR Reads the contents of a system register.
Write system register WR Specifies the contents of a system register.
Reads the specifications of the programmable
Read the status of PLC RT
controller and error codes if an error occurs.
Switches the operation mode of the
Remote control RM
programmable controller.
Abort AB Aborts communication.
Reference: <MEWTOCOL Communication Procedure>
7-26

Setting communication parameters
The settings for baud rate and communication format of the COM port are entered using the FPWIN GR.
Select “Options” in the menu bar, and then select “PLC Configuration”. Click “COM Port”. There are
separate tabs for setting the COM1 and COM2 .
Note:
• As the default of the COM2 port is “Internal USB”, select “COM. cassette”.
• When the MEWTOCOL master is used, also select “Computer Link”.
No. 410 (for COM1 port), No. 411 (for COM2 port) unit number

Select the COM port operation mode:
Click on , and select “Computer Link”.
No. 413 (for COM1 port), No. 414 (for COM2 port) Communication Format setting
Default setting:
To change the communication format to match an external device connected to the COM port, enter the
settings for the various items.
No. 415 Baud rate (communication speed) setting

The default setting for the communication speed for the various ports is 9600 bps. Change the value to
match the external device connected to the COM port:
Restrictions
The COM port of the communication cassette supports all the commands of the MEWTOCOL-COM.
There is no restriction.
7-27

7.3.2 1:1 Communication (Computer link)
System register settings
Settings for COM1 port (AFP-COM1, AFPX-COM2, AFPX-COM3, AFPX-COM5)
No. Name Set Value
No. 410 Unit number COM1 port 1
Note)
No. 412 Communication mode COM1 port Computer link
No. 413 Communication format for COM1 port Data length: …… 7 bits/8 bits
Parity check: ….. None/Odd/Even
Stop bit: ………… 1 bit/2 bit
Terminator: …….. CR
Header: ………… No STX
Note)
No. 415 Baud rate setting for COM1 port 2400 to 115200 bps
Settings for COM2 port (AFPX-COM2, AFPX-COM4, AFPX-COM5)

No. Name Set Value
No. 411 Unit number COM2 port 1
Note)
No. 412 Communication mode COM2 port Computer link
Header: ………… No STX
Note)
The communication format and baud rate (communication speed) should be set to match the connected
computer.
Note) They are set in different bit positions of the same system register no., so the different settings are
possible for port 1 and port 2.
The baud rates of 300, 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS1 instruction. However, the
setting value of the system register cannot be changed.
Programming
• For a computer link, a program should be created that allows command messages to be sent and
response messages to be received on the computer side. No communication program is required on
the PLC side. (Specify the communication format only by the system register.)
• Create the program on the PC side using Basic language or C language according to the
MEWTOCOL-COM. Commands to monitor and control the operation of the PLC are provided in the
MEWTOCOL-COM.
7-28

Connection to the computer <1:1 communication>
Overview
For a 1:1 computer link between the FP-X and a computer, an RS232C cable is needed. Communication
is performed via commands from the computer and responses from the PLC.
<Using AFPX-COM1> 1-channel RS232C type
<Using AFPX-COM2> 2channel RS232C type
<Using AFPX-COM3 (RS422 setting)> (1-channel RS485/RS422 type)
Note) There are several names for the signal names of RS422. Confirm with the instruction manuals for each devices.
<Using AFPX-COM4> (Combination of 1-channel RS485 and 1-channel RS422 type)
<Using AFPX-COM5> (Combination of Ethernet and 1-channel RS232C type)
7-29

1:1 communication with programmable display GT series
Overview
A 1:1 computer link with a programmable display connects the FP-X and the programmable display
using an RS232C cable. Communication is performed via commands from the programmable display
and responses from the PLC.
No program is required for communication. Simply set the mutual communications settings to operate
the PLC via the programmable display.
<Using AFPX-COM3 (RS422 setting)> (1-channel RS485/RS232C type)
<Using AFPX-COM4> (Combination of 1-channel RS485 and 1-channel RS232C type)
<Using AFPX-COM5> (Combination of Ethernet and 1-channel RS232C type)
7-30

7.3.3 1:N Communication (Computer Link)
Overview
For a 1:N computer link, the computer and the FP-X are connected through a commercially available
RS232C-RS485 converter, and the respective PLCs are wired using an RS485 cable.
The computer and the PLC communicate via commands and responses: The computer sends a
command specifying the unit number, and the PLC with that unit number sends a response back to the
computer.
Note) Lineeye SI-35 is recommended to be used as a converter.
Setting system registers

Setting of COM1 port
No. Name Set value
No. 410 Unit number for COM1 port 1 to 99 (Set the desired unit number)
(With a C-NET adapter, a maximum of
32 units (stations) can be specified.)
No. 412 Selection of communication mode for COM1 port Computer link
Header: ………… STX not exist
Note3)
Note1) The communication format and baud rate (communication speed) should be set to match the
connected computer.
Note2) The terminal units of the AFPX-COM3, AFPX-COM4 and AFPX-COM6 are specified by the dip
switch in the communication cassette.
Note3) The baud rates of 300, 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS1 instruction. However, the
7-31

Setting of unit numbers
By default, the unit number for each communication port is set to 1 in the system register settings. There
is no need to change this for 1:1 communication, but if 1:N communication is used to connect multiple
PLCs to the transmission line (e.g. in a C-NET), the unit number must be specified so that the
destination of the command can be identified.
The unit number is specified by using the system register.
Setting unit numbers with the system register

A unit number between 1 and 99 can be set with the system register.
To set unit numbers with the FPWIN GR programming software:

separate tabs for setting the COM1 and COM2 .
No. 410 (for COM1 port), No. 411 (for COM2 port) unit number settings
Click on , and select a unit number from 1 to 99.
Note) With a C-NET adapter, a maximum of 32 units (stations) can be specified.
7-32

Connection with external devices
AFPX-COM3 (when setting RS485)
Connection diagram
With 1:N communication, the various RS485 devices are connected using twisted pair cables. Use only
one (+) and (-) terminals.
AFPX-COM4
Connection diagram
In case of using the AFPX-COM4, connect two cables each to the (+) terminal and (-) terminal.
2
Use the wires of the same cross-sectional area which should be 0.5 mm .
AFPX-COM6
Connection diagram
In case of using the AFPX-COM6, connect two cables each to the (+) terminal and (-) terminal.
2
Use the wires of the same cross-sectional area which should be 0.5 mm .
Note) Non-insulated between the COM1 and COM2.
Setting of terminal unit

The terminal unit is specified with the dip switch located in the communication cassette.
7-33

7.3.4 MEWTOCOL Master (Sample Program)
Use the F145 (SEND) “Data send” or F146 (RECV) “Data receive” instruction to use the MEWTOCOL
master function.
Sample program
Note: Available for the transistor type and relay type Ver 1.21 or later version only.
7-34

Flow chart
The above program executes the operation 1 to 3 repeatedly.

1. Updates the write data if the write data (DT50 and DT51) and the read data (DT60 and DT61) are
matched.
2. Writes the DT50 and DT51 of the local unit into the data DT0 and DT1 in the unit number 1 from the
COM1 port.
3. Reads the data DT0 and dT1 in the unit number 1 into the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit from
the COM1 port.
Note) The above COM1 port will be COM2 port for the COM2 port.
7-35

7.4 Communication Function 2: General-purpose Serial
Communication
7.4.1 General-purpose Serial Communication

Overview
• In general-purpose serial communication, data is sent and received over the COM ports to and from an
external device such as an image processing device or a bar code reader.
• Data is read from and written to an external device connected to the COM port by means of an FP-X
program and the FP-X data registers.
Outline of operation
To send data to and receive it from an external device using the general-purpose serial communication
function, the data transmission and data reception functions described below are used. The F159
(MTRN) instruction and the “reception done” flag are used in these operations, to transfer data between
the FPΣ and an external device.
Sending data
Data to be transmitted from the PLC is stored in the data register used as the send buffer (DT). When
F159 (MTRN) is executed, the data is output from the COM port.
• The terminator specified in the system
register is automatically added to the data
that has been sent.
• The maximum volume of data that can be
sent is 2048 bytes.
Receiving data
Data received from the COM port is stored in the receive buffer specified in the system register, and the
“reception done” flag goes on. Data can be received whenever the “reception done” flag is off.
• When data is being received, the “reception
done” flag is controlled by the F159 (MTRN)
instruction.
• No terminator is included in the stored data.
• The maximum volume of data that can be
received is 4096 bytes.
7-36

Setting communication parameters in the general-purpose serial communication mode
By default, the COM port is set to “Computer link”. System register settings should be entered for the
following items.
The settings for baud rate and communication format are made using the FPWIN GR programming tool.
separate tabs for setting the COM1 and COM2.

Click on , and select “General Communication”.
No. 413 (for COM1 port), No. 414 (for COM2 port) Communication Format setting
Default setting:
Enter the appropriate settings to match the communication format of the external device connected to
the COM port..
No. 415 Baud rate (communication speed) setting

The default setting for the communication speed for the various ports is 9600 bps. Change the value to
match the external device connected to the COM port:
No. 416 (for COM1 port), No. 418 (for COM2 port) Starting address for data received
No. 417 (for COM1 port), No. 419 (for COM2 port) Buffer capacity setting for data received
To change this area, specify the starting address using system register no. 416 (no. 418 for COM2 port)
and the volume (number of words) using no. 417 (no. 419 for COM2 port). The receive buffer layout is
shown below.
7-37

7.4.2 Communication with External Devices
Programming example of general-purpose serial communication
The F159 (MTRN) instruction is used to send and receive data via the specified COM port. F159 (MTRN)
F144 (TRNS) instruction is not available with the FP-X.
F159 (MTRN) instruction

Data is sent and received via the specified COM port .
Devices that can be specified for S: Only data registers (DT) can be specified as the send buffer.
Devices that can be specified for n: WX, WY, WR, WL, SV, EV, DT, LD, I (I0 to ID), K, H
Devices that can be specified for D: Only the K constants (only K1 and K2)
Sending data
The amount of data specified by n is sent to the external device from among the data stored in the data
table, starting with the area specified by S, through the COM port specified by D. Data can be sent with
the header and terminator automatically attached. A maximum of 2048 bytes can be sent. When the
above program is run, the eight bytes of data contained in DT101 to DT104 and stored in the send buffer
starting from DT100 are sent from COM1 port.
Receiving data
Reception of data is controlled by turning the “reception done” flags R9038/R9048 on and off. The
received data is stored in the receive buffer specified in the system register. Data can be received when
F159 (MTRN) turns the “reception done” flag off. When the reception of the data is completed (the
terminator is received), the “reception done” flag turns on, and subsequently, receiving data is prohibited.
To receive the next data, execute the F159 (MTRN) instruction and turn the “reception done” flag off to
clear the number of received bytes to 0. To receive data continuously without sending data, clear the
number of transmitted bytes to 0 (set “n” to “K0”), and then execute the F159 (MTRN) instruction.
Reference: <Programming Manual ARCT1F313E>
Binary communication
Selecting “STX not exist” for the header and “None” for the terminator in the general-purpose serial
communication enables the binary communication.
Sending data: Sends the data of bytes to be specified.
Receiving data: Check the No. of bytes received before the process. At that time, the reception done flag
does not work.
7-38

Sending data to external devices
Communication with external devices is handled through the data registers.
Data to be output is stored in the data register used as the send buffer (DT), and when the F159 (MTRN)
instruction is executed, the data is output from the COM port.
Data table for transmission (send buffer)
Sample program for sending data

The following program transmits the characters “ABCDEFGH (Hex)” to an external device using COM1
port.
The program described above is executed in the following sequence.

1) “ABCDEFGH” is converted to an ASCII code and stored in a data register.
2) The data is sent from COM1 port using the F159 (MTRN) instruction.
Explanatory diagram
7-39

Explanation of data table
The data table for transmission starts at the data register specified in S.
• Use an F0 (MV) or F95 (ASC) instruction to write the data to be transmitted to the transmission data
storage area specified in S.
Transmission process
When the execution condition of the F159 (MTRN) instruction turns on and the “transmission done” flag
R9039/R9049 is on, operation is as follows:
1. N is preset in S. The “reception done” flag R9038/R9048 is turned off, and the reception data number
is cleared to 0.
2. The set data is transmitted in order from the lower-order byte in S+1 of the table.
• During transmission, the “transmission done” flag R9039/R9049 turns off.
• If system register 413 or 414 is set to header (start code) with STX, the header is automatically added
to the beginning of the data.
• The terminator (end code) specified in system register 413 or 414 is automatically added to the end of
the data.
3. When all of the specified quantity of data has been transmitted, the S value is cleared to 0 and the
“transmission done” flag R9039/R9049 turns on.
When you do not wish to add the terminator (end code) during transmissions:
• Specify the number of bytes to be transmitted using a negative number.
• If you also do not wish to add a terminator to received data, set system register 413 or 414 to
“Terminator - None”.
Programming example:
The following program transmits 8 bytes of data without adding the terminator.
Key Point:
• Do not include the terminator (end code) in the transmission data. The terminator is added
automatically.
• When “STX exist” is specified for the header (start code) in system register 413 or 414, do not add the
header to the transmission data. The header is added automatically.
• When using the AFPX-COM1, transmission does not take place until CS (Clear to Send) turns on. If
you are not going to connect to the other device, connect to RS (Request to Send).
• The maximum number of transmission bytes n is 2048.
• The contact numbers in parentheses refer to COM2 port.
7-40

Receiving data from external devices
Data input from the COM port is stored in the
receive buffer specified by the system register,
and the “reception done” flag goes on. If the
“reception done” flag is off, data can be received
at any time.
Data table for reception (receive buffer)

This is the state when the above program is executed.
• DT200 to DT204 are used as the receive
buffer. System register settings are as follows:
- System register 416: K200
- System register 417: K5
Sample program for receiving data

8-byte data received in the receive buffer through COM1 port are copied to DT0.
The program described above is executed in the following sequence.

1) The data sent from external devices is stored in the receive buffer.
2) The “reception done” contact R9038 (R9048) is turned on.
3) The received data is sent from the receive buffer to the area starting with data register DT0.
4) The F159 (MTRN) instruction is executed with no data to reset the buffer writing point and to turn off
the reception done” contact R9038 (R9048). The system is now ready to receive the next data.
(The data in the receive buffer is not cleared.)
Note:
• Be aware that the “reception done” flag R9038 or R9048 changes even while a scan is in progress
(e.g., if the “reception done” flag is used multiple times as an input condition, there is a possibility of
different statuses existing within the same scan.) To prevent multiple read access to the special internal
relay you should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program.
Explanatory diagram
7-41

Explanation of data table
Data sent from an external device connected to the COM port is stored in the data registers that have
been set as the receive buffer.
• Specify the data registers in system register 416 to
419.
• The number of bytes of data received is stored in the
starting address of the receive buffer. The initial value
is 0.
• Received data is stored in the received data storage
area in order from the lower -order byte.
Reception process
When the “reception done” flag R9038 (R9048) is off, operation takes place as follows when data is sent
from an external device. (The R9038 (R9048) flag is off during the first scan after RUN).
1. Incoming data is stored in order from the lower-order byte of the 2nd-word area of the receive buffer.
Header and terminator (start and end codes) are not stored.
2. When the terminator (end code) is received, the “reception done” flag R9038 (R9048) turns on.
Reception of any further data is prohibited. When the terminator has been set to “None”, the “reception
done” flag does not turn on. Check the number of received bytes to judge whether the reception has
completed or not.
3. When an F159 (MTRN) instruction is executed, the “reception done” flag R9038 (R9048) turns off
(except the case when the terminator has been set to “None”), the number of received bytes is cleared,
and subsequent data is stored in order from the lower-order byte.
For repeated reception of data, perform the following steps:

1. Receive data
2. Reception done (R9038/R9048: on, reception prohibited)
3. Process received data
4. Execute F159 (MTRN) (R9038/R9048: off, reception possible)
5. Receive subsequent data
Prepare for reception

• The “reception done” flag R9038 (R9048) turns on when
data reception from the external device is completed.
Reception of any further data is prohibited.
• To receive subsequent data, you must execute the F159
(MTRN) instruction to turn off the “reception done” flag
R9038 (R9048).
Key Point:
7-42

Data to be sent/received with FP-X
Remember the following when accessing data in the FP-X send and receive buffers:
• If a header has been chosen in the communication format settings, the code STX (H02) will
automatically be added at the beginning of the data begin sent.
• The data without the Code STX at the reception is stored in the receive buffer, and the “reception
done” flag turns on when the terminator (end code) is received. When the terminator has been set to
“None”, the “reception done” flag does not work.
However, if the code STX is added in the middle of the data, the number of received byte is cleared to
0, and the data is stored from the beginning of the receive buffer again.
• A terminator is automatically added to the end of the data being sent.
• There is no terminator on the data stored in the receive buffer.
Sending data:
Data written to the send buffer will be sent just as it is.
Example:
The data “12345” is transmitted as an ASCII code to an external device.
1. Data sent using the F95 (ASC) instruction should be converted to ASCII code data.
2. If DT100 is being used as the send buffer, data will be stored in sequential order in the data registers
starting from the next register (DT101), in two-byte units consisting of the upper and the lower byte.
Receiving data:
The data of the receive area being read is ASCII code data.
Example:
The data “12345CR” is transmitted from a device with RS232C port.
• If DT200 is being used as the receive buffer, received data will be stored in the registers starting from
DT201, in sequential order of first the lower byte and then the upper byte.
7-43

Flag operation in serial communication
Header: No-STX, Terminator: CR
Receiving data:
The “reception done” flag, the “transmission done” flag, and the F159 (MTRN) instruction are related as
follows:
• For general-purpose serial communication, half-duplex transmission must be used.

• Reception is disabled when the “reception done” flag R9038 or R9048 is on.
• When F159 (MTRN) is executed, the number of bytes received is cleared, and the address (write
pointer) in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address.
• Also, when F159 (MTRN) is executed, the error flag R9037 or R9047, the “reception done” flag R9038
or R9048 and the “transmission done” flag R9039 or R9049 goes off.
• Duplex transmission is disabled while F159 (MTRN) is being executed. The “transmission done” flag
R9039 or R9049 must be observed.
• Reception stops if the error flag R9037 or R9047 goes on. To resume reception, execute the F159
(MTRN) instruction, which turns off the error flag.
Note:
• Be aware that the “reception done” flag R9038 or R9048 changes even while a scan is in progress
(e.g., if the “reception done” flag is used multiple times as an input condition, there is a possibility of
different statuses existing within the same scan.) To prevent multiple read access to the special internal
relay you should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program.
Key Point:
7-44

Header: STX, Terminator: ETX
Receiving data:
follows:
• The data is stored in the receive buffer in sequential order. When the header is received, the number of
bytes received is cleared, and the address (write pointer) in the receive buffer is reset to the initial
address.
• Reception is disabled while the “reception done” flag R9038 or R9048 is on.
• Also, When F159 (MTRN) is executed, the number of bytes received is cleared, and the address (write
pointer) in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address.
• If there are two headers, data following the second header overwrites the data in the receive buffer.
• The “reception done” flag R9038 or R9048 is turned off by the F159 (MTRN) instruction. Therefore, if
F159 (MTRN) is executed at the same time the terminator is received, the “reception done” flag will not
be detected.
7-45

Sending data:
follows:
• Header (STX) and terminator (ETX) are automatically added to the data being transmitted. The data is
transmitted to an external device.
• When the F159 (MTRN) instruction is executed, the “transmission done” flag R9039 or R9049 goes off.
• Duplex transmission is disabled while F159 (MTRN) is being executed. The “transmission done” flag
R9039 or R9049 must be observed.
Key Point:
7-46

Changing communication mode of COM port
An F159 (MTRN) instruction can be executed to change between general-purpose serial communication
mode and computer link mode. To do so, specify H8000 for n (the number of transmission bytes) and
execute the instruction.
Changing from “general-purpose” to “computer link”
Changing from “computer link” to “general-purpose”
The COM port communication mode flag in R9032 or R9042 turns on when general-purpose serial
communication mode is selected.
Note:
• When the power is turned on, the operating mode selected in system register no. 412 takes effect.
It is not possible to change to the MODBUS RTU mode.
7-47

7.4.3 Connection with 1:1 Communication (General-purpose serial
communication)
Settings for COM1 port (AFPX-COM1, AFPX-COM2, AFPX-COM3, AFPX-COM5)
No. Name Set Value
No. 412 Selection of communication mode for General-purpose serial communication
COM1 port
Stop bit: ………… 1 bit/2 bits
Terminator: …….. CR/CR+LF/None/ETX
Header: ………… No STX/STX
Note2)
Note1)
No. 416 Starting address for receive buffer for DT0 to DT32764 (Initial value: DT0)
COM1 port
No. 417 Receive buffer capacity for COM1 port 0 to 2048 words (Initial value: 2048 words)
Settings for COM2 port (AFPX-COM2, AFPX-COM4, AFPX-COM5, AFPX-COM6)

No. Name Set Value
No. 412 Selection of communication mode for General-purpose serial communication
COM2 port
Note2)
Note1)
COM2 port
No. 419 Receive buffer capacity for COM2 port 0 to 2048 words (Initial value: 2048 words)
Note1) When using the C14, the values are DT0 to DT12285.
Note2) The baud rates of 300, 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS1 instruction (Ver 2.0 or
more). However, the setting value of the system register cannot be changed.
Note3) The setting values for the COM2 port of AFPX-COM6 are 9600 bps, 19200 bps and 115200 bps
only. The same baud rate should be specified by the cassette backside switch and the system
register.
7-48

1:1 communication with FP Series PLC
Overview
Connect the FP-X and another FP series PLC using the RS232C interface and the MEWTOCOL-COM
communication protocol.
Note: The MEWTOCOL master function of computer link is recommended as it is easy to

communicate.
• When the data area read command “%01#RDD00000 00001**CR” is sent from the FP-X side, the
values of the data register of the PLC connected to the system are sent as a response. For example, if
the value K100 is stored in DT0 and the value K200 is stored in DT1 of the PLC,
“%01$RD6400C8006F CR” is sent as a response to the command. If there is an error, “%01!○○** CR” is
returned (○○ is the error code).
• In addition to data area read and write commands, MEWTOCOL-COM also provides contact area read
and write as well as many other commands.
System register settings of FP series PLCs (FP0 side)

In the default settings, the COM port is set not to be used. For 1:1 general-purpose serial communication,
the system registers should be set as shown below.
Communication format settings for FP series PLC (FP0 side)
No. Name Set Value
No. 412 Selection of communication mode for COM port Computer link
No. 413 Communication format for COM port Data length: …… 8 bits
Parity check: ….. Odd
Stop bit: ………… 1 bit
Note) These settings should be the
same as the settings of the
connected FP-X.
No. 414 Baud rate setting for COM port 19200 bps
7-49

Connection to FP series PLCs (FP0)
- Connection with FP0 COM port

<Using AFPX-COM4> Combination of 1-channel RS485 and 1-channel RS232C type

<Using AFPX-COM5> Combination of Ethernet and 1-channel RS232C type

7-50

Procedure of communication
In this example, an FP series PLC is connected to COM1 port. K100 and K200 are respectively being
stored in DT0 and DT1 of the PLC on the other end.
7-51

Sample program
In the following example, the FP series PLC is connected to COM1 port.
Buffer statuses
The tables below show the statuses of the send and receive buffers when the sample program is run.
7-52

Key Point:
Contents of the response:
If K100 is stored in DT0 and K200 is stored in DT1 of the FP series PLC on the other end,
“%01$RD6400C8006FCR” is returned from the FP series PLC on the other end as the response when
the program is executed. The received data is stored in the data registers as shown below.
Extracting the data register values from the PLC on the other end
In the program, the data segment of the response from the PLC on the other end is converted to
hexadecimal data using the F72 (AHEX) (hexadecimal ASCII → hexadecimal data conversion)
instruction and stored in DT50 and DT51, only if the character string “$1” stored in DT1 is detected as a
comparison instruction
If an error occurs, “%01!○○□□CR” is returned as the response (○○ is the error code and □□ is the
BCC).
Note: The MEWTOCOL master function of computer link is recommended as it is easy to

communicate.
7-53

The values of DT50 and DT51 are written in DT0 and 1 of PLC.
7-54

7.4.4 1:N Communication (General-purpose Serial Communication)
Overview
The FP-X and the external units are connected using an RS485 cable. Using the protocol that matches
the external units, the F159 (MTRN) instruction is used to send and receive data.
Reference: <7.2.1 Precaution When Using RS485 Port>

• In the default settings, the COM1 port is set to computer link mode.
Settings for COM1 port
No. Name Set Value
No. 412 Selection of communication mode General-purpose serial communication
COM1 port
No. 413 Communication format for COM1port Data length: …… 7 bits/8 bits
Note3)
No. 415 Baud rate setting for COM1port 2400 to 115200 bps
COM1port
No. 417 Receive buffer capacity 0 to 2048 words (Initial value: 2048 words)
for COM1port
Note1) The communication format and baud rate should be set to match the connected devices.
Note2) The terminal units of AFPX-COM3, AFPX-COM4 and AFPX-COM6 are specified by the dip
switch located in the communication cassette.
Note3) The baud rates of 300, 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS1 instruction. However, the
7-55

7.5 Communication Function 3: PC(PLC) Link
7.5.1 PC(PLC) Link

Overview
• The PLC link is an economic way of linking PLCs of the FP-X, FPΣ and FP2-MCU, using a twisted-pair
cable.
• Data is shared between the PLCs using link relays (L) and link registers (LD).
• The statuses of the link relays and link registers of one PLC are automatically fed back to the other
PLCs on the same network.
• PC(PLC) link is not the default setting. Therefore, the setting of system register “COM1 Port setting”
communication mode no. 412 must be changed to “PC Link” in order to use this function.
• Unit numbers and link areas are allocated using the system registers.
• It is available with the COM1 port only.
7-56

Operation of PLC link
• Turning on a link relay contact in one PLC turns on the same link relay in all other PLCs on the same
network.
• Likewise, if the contents of a link register in one PLC are changed, the values of the same link register
are changed in all PLCs on the same network.
7-57

7.5.2 Setting Communication Parameters
Setting of communication mode
In the default settings, the COM1 port is set to computer link mode.
Set the communication mode using the FPWIN GR programming tool. Select “PLC Configuration” under
“Options”, and then click “COM1 port” tab. (The PC(PLC) link is available for COM1 port only.)

Select the COM1 port operation mode:
Click on , and select “PC Link”.
Key Point:
• When using a PC(PLC) link, the communication format and baud rate are fixed:
No. Name Set Value
No. 413 Communication format for COM Data length: …… 8 bits
1port Parity check: ….. Odd
No. 415 Baud rate setting for COM1 port 115200 bps
Note1) The terminal units of AFPX-COM3 and AFPX-COM4 are specified by the dip switch located in the
communication cassette.
7-58

Setting of unit numbers
By default, the unit number for the communication port is set to 1 in the system registers.
In a PC(PLC) link that connects multiple PLCs on the same transmission line, the unit number must be
set in order to identify the different PLCs.
The unit number is specified either by using the SYS1 instruction or the system register.
Note1) The priority order for unit number settings is as follows:

1. SYS1 instruction
2. System registers
Note2) Unit numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively, starting from 1, with no breaks
between them. If there is a missing unit number, the transmission time will be longer.
Note3) If fewer than 16 units are linked, the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest
unit number in system register no. 47.
Unit numbers are the numbers to identify the different PLCs on the same network. The same number
must not be used for more than one PLC on the same network.
Note:
When using the PC(PLC) link with the RS232C/RS422, the number of units is 2.
7-59

Setting with the system register
Set the unit numbers using the FPWIN GR programming tool. Select “PLC Configuration” under
“Options”, and then select “COM1 port” tab.
No. 410 (for COM1 port) Unit number setting

Click on , and select unit number between 1 and 16.
Note1) Unit numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively, starting from 1, with no breaks
between them. If there is a missing unit number, the transmission time will be longer.
Note2) If fewer than 16 units are linked, the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest
unit number in system register no. 47.
Setting with SYS instruction
Reference: <FP series Programming Manual ARCT1F353>.
7-60

Link area allocation
• The link relays and link registers to be used in the PC(PLC) link are allocated in the link area of the
CPU unit. Link area allocations are specified by setting the system registers of the CPU unit.
System registers
Default
No. Name Set value
value
40 Range of link relays used for PC(PLC) link 0 0 to 64 words
41 Range of link data registers used for PC(PLC) link 0 0 to 128 words
42 Starting number for link relay transmission 0 0 to 63
For 43 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words
PC 44 Starting number for link data register transmission 0 0 to 127
(PLC) 45 Link data register transmission size 0 0 to 128 words
link 0 46 PC(PLC) link switch flag Normal Normal: 1st half
Reverse: 2nd half
Note)
47 Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET-W0 16 1 to 16
PC(PLC) link
46 PC(PLC) link switch flag Normal Normal: 1st half
Reverse: 2nd half
50 Range of link relays used for PC(PLC) link 0 0 to 64 words
For 51 Range of link data registers used for PC(PLC) link 0 0 to 128 words
PC 52 Starting number for link relay transmission 64 64 to 127
(PLC) 53 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words
link 1 54 Starting number for link data register transmission 128 128 to 255
55 Link data register transmission size 0 0 to 128 words
Note)
57 Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET-W0 16 1 to 16
PC(PLC) link
Note) The same maximum unit number should be specified for all the PLCs connected in the PC(PLC)
link.
Link area configuration
• Link areas consist of link relays and link registers, and are divided into areas for PC(PLC) link 0 and
PC(PLC) link 1 and used with those units.
• The link relay which can be used in an area for either PC(PLC) link 0 or PC(PLC) link 1 is maximum
1024 points (64 words), and the link register is maximum 128 words.
Note:
The PC link 1 can be used to connect with the second PC link W0 of the FP2 Multi Communication Unit
(MCU). At that time, the link relay number and link register number for the PC link can be the same
values as the FP2 (from WL64, from LD128).
Reference:
For the information on FP2-MCU, <Chapter 5 Communication Function PC(PLC) Link in FP2 Multi
Communication Unit Technical Manual ARCT1F396E>.
7-61

Example of allocation
The areas for PC(PLC) link are divided into send areas and receive areas. The link relays and link
registers are sent from the send area to the receive area of a different PLC. Link relays and link registers
with the same numbers as those on the transmission side must exist in the receive area on the receiving
side.
For PC(PLC) link 0

Link relay allocation
System registers
Setting for various units
No. Name
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
40 Range of link relays used 64 64 64 64
42 Starting No. of word for link relay transmission 0 20 40 0
43 Link relay transmission size 20 20 24 0
Note) No. 40 (range of link relays used) must be set to the same range for all the units.
Link register allocation
System registers
No. Name
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
41 Range of link registers used 128 128 128 128
44 Starting No. for link register transmission 0 40 80 0
45 Link register transmission size 40 40 48 0
Note) No. 41 (range of link registers used) must be set to the same range for all the units.
When link areas are allocated as shown above, the No. 1 send area can be sent to the No. 2, No. 3 and
No. 4 receive areas. Also, the No. 1 receive area can receive data from the No. 2 and No. 3 send areas.
No. 4 is allocated as a receive area only, and can receive data from No. 1, No. 2 and No. 3, but cannot
transmit it to other stations.
7-62

For PC(PLC) link 1
System registers
No. Name
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
50 Range of link relays used 64 64 64 64
52 Starting No. of word for link relay transmission 64 84 104 64
53 Link relay transmission size 20 20 24 0
Note) No. 50 (range of link relays used) must be set to the same range for all the units.
System registers
No. Name
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
51 Range of link registers used 128 128 128 128
54 Starting No. for link register transmission 128 128 208 128
55 Link register transmission size 40 40 48 0
Note) No. 51 (range of link registers used) must be set to the same range for all the units.
When link areas are allocated as shown above, the No. 1 send area can be sent to the No. 2, No. 3 and
No. 4 receive areas. Also, the No. 1 receive area can receive data from the No. 2 and No. 3 send areas.
No. 4 is allocated as a receive area only, and can receive data from No. 1, No. 2 and No. 3, but cannot
transmit it to other stations.
Note:
The PC link 1 can be used to connect with the second PC link W0 of the FP2 Multi Communication Unit
(MCU). At that time, the link relay number and link register number for the PC link can be the same
values as the FP2 (from WL64, from LD128).
Reference:
For the information on FP2-MCU, <Chapter 5 Communication Function PC(PLC) Link in FP2 Multi
Communication Unit Technical Manual ARCT1F396E>.
7-63

Partial use of link areas
In the link areas available for PC(PLC) link, link relays with a total of 1024 points (64 words) and link
registers with a total of 128 words can be used. This does not mean, however, that it is necessary to
reserve the entire area. Parts of the area which have not been reserved can be used as internal relays
and internal registers.

No. Name No.
No. 40 Range of link relays used 50
No. 42 Starting No. of word for link relay transmission 20
No. 43 Link relay transmission size 20
With the above settings, the 14 words (224 points) consisting of

WL50 to WL63 can be used as internal relays.

No. Name No.
No. 41 Range of link registers used 100
No. 44 Starting No. for link register transmission 40
No. 45 Link register transmission size 40
With the above settings, the 28 words consisting of LD100 to

LD127 can be used as internal registers.
7-64

Note: Precautions When Allocating Link Areas
If a mistake is made when allocating a link area, be aware that an error will result, and communication
will be disabled.
Avoid overlapping send areas

When sending data from a send area to the receive area of another PLC, there must be a link relay and
link register with the same number in the receive area on the receiving side. In the example shown below,
there is an area between No. 2 and No. 3 which is overlapped, and this will cause an error, so that
communication cannot be carried out.
Example of link relay allocations
System registers
Set value of various control units
No. Name
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
No. 40 Range of link relays used 64 64 64
No. 42 Starting No. of word for link relay transmission 0 20 30
No. 43 Link relay transmission size 20 20 34
Invalid allocations
The allocations shown below are not possible, neither for link relays nor for link registers:
- Send area is split
- Send and receive areas are split into multiple segments
7-65

Setting the largest unit number for a PC(PLC) link
The largest unit number can be set using system register no. 47 (using system register no. 57 for
PC(PLC) link 1).
[Sample setting]
No. of units linked Setting contents
2 1st unit: Unit no. 1 is set
2nd unit: Unit no. 2 is set
A largest unit no. of 2 is set for each.
4 1st unit: Unit no. 1 is set
2nd unit: Unit no. 2 is set
3rd unit: Unit no. 3 is set
4th unit: Unit no. 4 is set
A largest unit no. of 4 is set for each.
n Nth unit: Unit no. n is set
A largest unit no. of n is set for each.
Note:
• Unit numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively, starting from 1, with no breaks between
them. If there is a missing unit number, the transmission time will be longer.
• If fewer than 16 units are linked, the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest unit
number in system register no. 47 (in system register no. 57 for PC(PLC) link 1).
• For all PLCs which are linked, the same value should be set for the largest unit number.
• If there are fewer than 16 units linked and the largest unit number has not been set (default=16), or the
largest unit number has been set but the unit number settings are not consecutive, or the unit number
settings are consecutive but there is a unit for which the power supply has not been turned on, the
response time for the PC(PLC) link (the link transmission cycle) will be longer.
Reference: <7.5.5 PC(PLC) Link Response Time>.
Setting PC(PLC) link switching flag

PC(PLC) link switching flag can be set using system register no. 46.
If it is set to 0 (default value), the first half of the link relays and registers are used. If it is set to 1, the
second half of the link relays and registers are used.
7-66

7.5.3 Monitoring
When using a PC(PLC) link, the operation status of the links can be monitored using the following relays.
Transmission assurance relays

For PC(PLC) link 0: R9060 to R906F (correspond to unit no. 1 to 16)
If the transmission data from a different unit is being used with the various PLCs, check to make sure the
transmission assurance relay for the target unit is on before using the data.
Relay no. R9060 R9061 R9062 R9063 R9064 R9065 R9066 R9067 R9068 R9069 R906A R906B R906C R906D R906E R906F
Unit no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Conditions ON: When the PLC link is normal
for on/off OFF: If transmission is stopped, a problem has occurred, or a PLC link is not used
Operation mode relays

The operation modes (RUN/PROG.) can be checked for any given PLC.
Relay no. R9070 R9071 R9072 R9073 R9074 R9075 R9076 R9077 R9078 R9079 R907A R907B R907C R907D R907E R907F
Unit no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Conditions ON: When the unit is in the RUN mode
for on/off ON: When the unit is in the PROG. mode
PLC link transmission error relay R9050

This relay goes on if a problem is detected during transmission.
Relay no. R9050
Unit no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
ON: When a transmission error has occurred in the PLC link,
Conditions
or when there is an error in the setting for the PLC link area
for on/off
OFF: When the unit is in the PROG. mode
Key Point: Monitoring the PC(PLC) link status

In FPWIN GR, the PC(PLC) link status items, such as the transmission cycle time and the number of
times that errors have occurred, can be monitored by selecting the PC(PLC) link switch on the FPWIN
GR Status Monitor screen.
Note:
Remote programming of the linked PLCs is not possible.
7-67

7.5.4 Connection Example of PC(PLC) Link
When using three PLCs
In the example shown here, link relays are use. When X1 of PLC with unit no. 1 turns on, Y0 of PLC with
unit no. 2 turns on. When X2 of PLC with unit no. 1 turns on, Y0 of PLC with unit no. 3 turns on.

When using a PC(PLC) link, the communication format and baud rate are fixed.
No. Name Set Value
No. 413 Communication format for COM1 Data length: …… 8 bits
port Parity check: ….. Odd
No. 415 Baud rate setting for COM1 port 115200 bps
Unit no. and communication mode settings

- Setting for the FP-X with unit no. 1
No. Name Set value
No. 410 Unit no. for COM1 port 1
No. 412 Selection of communication mode for COM1 port PC link
- Setting for the FPΣ with unit no. 2

No. Name Set value
No. 410 Unit no. for COM1 port 2
No. 412 Selection of communication mode for COM1 port PC link
- Setting for the FP2-MCU with unit no. 3

Name Set value
Unit no. for COM1 port 3 (Set using the unit no. setting switch)
Selection of communication mode for COM1 port PC(PLC) link
(Set using the mode speed setting switch)
Key Point:
Make sure the same unit number is not used for more than one of the PLCs connected through the
PC(PLC) link function, and specify consecutive numbers.
7-68

Link area allocation
- Link relay allocation
System registers
No. Name
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
No. 40 Range of link relays used 64 64 64
No. 42 Starting No. of word for link relay transmission 0 20 40
No. 43 Link relay transmission size 20 20 24
- Link register allocation
System registers
No. Name
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
No. 41 Range of link registers used 128 128 128
No. 44 Starting No. for link register transmission 0 40 80
No. 45 Link register transmission size 40 40 48
Setting the largest unit number

No. Name Set value
No. 47 Largest unit number setting for PC(PLC) link 3
Setting terminal unit

The terminal unit is specified with the dip switch located in the communication cassette.
Reference: <7.1.3 Type of Communication Cassettes AFPX-COM3/COM4/COM6>.

7-69

Sample program
- Unit no. 1
When X1 is input, L0 of the link relay goes on, and when X2 is input, L1 of the link relay goes on.
- Unit no. 2
When L0 of the link relay goes on, Y0 is output.
- Unit no. 3
When L1 of the link relay goes on, Y0 is output.
7-70

7.5.5 PC(PLC) Link Response Time
The maximum value for the transmission time (T) of one cycle can be calculated using the following
formula.
The various items in the formula are calculated as described below.
� Ts (transmission time per station)

Ts = scan time + Tpc (PC(PLC) link sending time)
Tpc = Ttx (sending time per byte) x Pcm (PLC link sending size)
Ttx = 1/(baud rate x 1000) x 11 ms …. Approx. 0.096 ms at 115.2 kbps
Pcm = 23 + (number of relay words + number of register words) x 4
� Tlt (link table sending time)

Tlt = Ttx (sending time per byte) x Ltm (link table sending size)

Ltm = 13 + 2 x n (n = number of stations being added)
� Tso (master station scan time)

This should be confirmed using the programming tool.
� Tlk (link addition processing time) …. If no stations are being added, Tlk = 0.
Tlk = Tlc (link addition command sending time) + Twt (addition waiting time) + Tls (sending time for
command to stop transmission if link error occurs) + Tso (master station scan time)
Tlc = 10 x Ttx (sending time per byte)

Twt = Initial value 400 ms (can be changed using SYS1 system register instruction)
Tls = 7 x Ttx (sending time per byte)
Ttx = 1/(baud rate x 1000) x 11 ms …. Approx. 0.096 ms at 115. 2 kbps
Tso = Master station scan time
Calculation example 1
When all stations have been added to a 16-unit link, the largest station number is 16, relays and
registers have been evenly allocated, and the scan time for each PLCs is 1 ms.
Ttx = 0.096 Each Pcm = 23 + (4 + 8) x 4 = 71 bytes Tpc = Ttx x Pcm = 0.096 x 71 ≒ 6.82 ms
Each Ts = 1 + 6.82 = 7.82 ms Tlt = 0.096 x (13 + 2 x 16) = 4.32 ms
Given the above conditions, the maximum value for the transmission time (T) of one cycle will be:
T max. = 7.82 x 16 + 4.32 + 1 = 130.44 ms
registers have been evenly allocated, and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms
Ttx = 0.096 Each Pcm = 23 + (4 + 8) x 4 = 71 bytes Tpc = Ttx x Pcm = 0.096 x 71 ≒ 6.82 ms
Each Ts = 5 + 6.82 = 11.82 ms Tlt = 0.096 x (13 + 2 x 16) = 4.32 ms
T max. = 11.82 x 16 + 4.32 + 5 = 198.44 ms
7-71

When all but one station have been added to a 16-unit link, the largest station number is 16,
relays and registers have been allocated evenly, and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms.
Ttx = 0.096 Each Ts = 5 + 6.82 = 11.82 ms
Tlt = 0.096 x (13 + 2 x 15) ≒ 4.13 ms
Tlk = 0.96 + 400 + 0.67 + 5 ≒407 ms
Note: The default value for the addition waiting time is 400 ms.
T max. = 11.82 x 15 + 4.13 + 5 + 407 = 593.43 ms
When all stations have been added to an 8-unit link, the largest station number is 8, relays and
register have been evenly allocated, and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms.
Ttx = 0.096 Each Pcm = 23 + (8 + 16) x 4 = 119 bytes
Tpc = Ttx x Pcm = 0.096 x 119 ≒ 11.43 ms
Each Ts = 5 + 11.43 = 16.43 ms Tlt = 0.096 x (13 + 2 x 8) ≒ 2.79 ms
T max. = 16.43 x 8 + 2.79 + 5 = 139.23 ms
registers have been evenly allocated, and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms.
Tpc = Ttx x Pcm = 0.096 x 407 ≒ 39.072 ms
T max. = 44.072 x 2 + 1.632 + 5 = 94.776 ms
When all stations have been added to a 2-unit link, the largest station number is 2, 32 relays and
2 register words have been evenly allocated, and the scan time for each PLC is 1 ms.
Tpc = Ttx x Pcm = 0.096 x 31 ≒ 2.976 ms
T max. = 3.976 x 2 + 1.632 + 1 = 10.584 ms
Note:
• In the description, “stations that have been added” refers to stations which are connected between
station no. 1 and the largest station number and for which the power supply has been turned on.
• Comparing examples 2 and 3, the transmission cycle time is longer if there is one station that has not
been added to the link. As a result the PC(PLC) link response time is longer.
• The SYS1 instruction can be used to minimize the transmission cycle time even if there are one or
more stations that have not been added to the link.
7-72

Reducing the transmission cycle time when there are stations that have not been added
If there are stations that have not been added to the link, the Tlk time (link addition processing time) and
with this the transmission cycle time will be longer.
With the SYS1 instruction, the link addition waiting time Twt in the above formula can be reduced. Thus,
SYS1 can be used to minimize the increase in the transmission cycle time.
<Programming example of SYS1 instruction>
(SYS1, M PCLK1T0, 100)

Function:
Setting SYS1 to change the waiting time for a link to be added to the PC(PLC) link from the default value
of 400 ms to 100 ms.
Keywords:
Setting for key word no. 1: PCLK1T0
Permissible range for key word no. 2: 10 to 400 (10 ms to 400 ms)
Note) Enter one space after M and then enter 12 characters to be aligned to the right.
If the second keyword is 2 digits, put 2 spaces, and if it is 3 digits, put one space.
Note:
If there are any units that have not been added to the link, the setting should not be changed as
long as a longer link transmission cycle time does not cause any problem.
• The SYS1 instruction should be executed at the beginning of the program, at the rise of R9014. The
same waiting time should be set for all linked PLCs.
• The waiting time should be set to a value of at least twice the maximum scan time for any of the PLCs
connected to the link.
• If a short waiting time has been set, there may be PLCs that cannot be added to the link even if their
power supply is on. (The shortest time that can be set is 10 ms.)
7-73

Error detection time for transmission assurance relays
The power supply of any given PLC fails or is turned off, it takes (as a default value) 6.4 seconds for the
transmission assurance relay of the PLC to be turned off at the other stations. This time period can be
shortened using the SYS1 instruction.
<Programming example of SYS1 instruction>
(SYS1, M PCLK1T1, 100)

Function:
Setting SYS1 to change the time that the PC(PLC) link transmission assurance is off from the default
value of 6400 ms to 100 ms.
Keywords:
Setting for key word no. 1: PCLK1T1
Permissible range for key word no. 2: 100 to 6400 (100 ms to 6400 ms)
Note) Enter one space after M and then enter 12 characters to be aligned to the right.
If the second keyword is 3 digits, put 2 spaces, and if it is 4 digits, no space is needed.
Note:
The setting should not be changed as long as a longer transmission assurance relay detection
time does not cause any problems.
• The SYS1 instruction should be executed at the beginning of the program, at the rise of R9014. The
same time should be set for all linked PLCs.
• The time should be set to a value of at least twice the maximum transmission cycle time when all of the
PLCs are connected to the link.
• If short time has been set, the transmission assurance relay may not function properly. (The shortest
time that can be set is 100 ms.)
7-74

7.6 Communication Function 4: MODBUS RTU
Communication
7.6.1 MODBUS RTU Communication

Function overview
• The MODBUS RTU protocol enables the communication between the FP-X and other devices
(including our FP-e, Programmable display GT series and KT temperature control unit).
• Enables to have conversations if the master unit sends instructions (command messages) to slave
units and the slave units respond (response messages) according to the instructions.
• Enables the communication between the devices of max. 99 units as the master function and slave
function is equipped.
• The communication cassette can be used.
About MODBUS RTU

• The MODBUS RTU communication is a function for the master unit to read and write the data in slave
units communicating between them.
• There are ASCII mode and RTU (binary) mode in the MODBUS protocol, however, the FP-X is
supported with the RTU (binary) mode only.
Master function
Writing and reading data for various slaves is available using the F145 (SEND) and F146 (RECV)
instructions.
Individual access to each slave and the global transmission is possible.
Slave function
If the slave units receive a command message from the master unit, they send back the response
message corresponding to the content.
Do not execute the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV) instructions when the unit is used as a slave unit.
7-75

MODBUS RTU command message frame
START ADDRESS FUNCTION DATA CRC CHECK END
3.5-character time 8 bits 8 bits n*8 bits 16 bits 3.5-character time
ADDRESS (Unit No.) 8 bits, 0 to 99 (decimal)

Note1) 0= Broadcast address
Note2) Slave unit No. is 1 to 99 (decimal)
Note3) For MODBUS, 0 to 247 (decimal)
FUNCTION 8 bits
DATA Varies depending on commands.
CRC 16 bits
END 3.5-character time (Differs depending on baud rate. Refer to reception
judgement time.)
Response in normal status

The same message as a command is returned for single write command.
A part of a command message (6 bytes from the beginning) is returned for multiple write command.
Response in abnormal status

In case a parameter disabled to be processed is found in a command (except transmission error)
Slave address (unit number)

Function code + 80H
One of either 1, 2 or 3
Error code
CRC
Error code contents

1: Function code error
2: Device number error (out of range)
3: Device quantity error (out of range)
Reception done judgment time

The process for receiving a message completes when the time that is exceeding the time mentioned
below has passed after the final data was received.
Baud rate Reception done judgment time

2400 Approx. 13.3 ms
4800 Approx. 6.7 ms
9600 Approx. 3.3 ms
115200 Approx. 0.3 ms
Note) The reception done judgment time is an approx. 32-bit time.
7-76

Supported commands
Executable
Code Name (MODBUS Remarks
instructions for Name for FP-X
(decimal) original) (Reference No.)
master
F146 (RECV) 01 Read Coil Status Read Y and R Coils 0X
F146 (RECV) 02 Read Input Status Read X Input 1X
F146 (RECV) 03 Read Holding Registers Read DT 4X
F146 (RECV) 04 Read Input Registers Read WL and LD 3X
F145 (SEND) 05 Force Single Coil Write Single Y and R 0X
F145 (SEND) 06 Preset Single Register Write DT 1 Word 4X
Cannot be issued 08 Diagnostics Loopback Test
F145 (SEND) 15 Force Multiple Coils Write Multiple Ys 0X
and Rs
F145 (SEND) 16 Preset Multiple Registers Write DT Multiple 4X
Words
Cannot be issued 22 Mask Write 4X Register Write DT Mask 4X
Cannot be issued 23 Read/Write 4X Registers Read/Write DT 4X
Table for MODBUS reference No. and FP-X device No.

MODBUS reference No. Data on BUS (hexadecimal) FP-X device No.
000001-001760 0000-06DF Y0-Y109F
Coil
002049-006144 0800-17FF R0-R255F
Input 100001-101760 0000-06DF X0-X109F
Note)
Holding register 400001-432765 0000-7FFC DT0-DT32764
300001-300128 0000-007F WL0-WL127
Input register
302001-302256 07D0-08CF LD0-LD255
Note) For C14; MODBUS reference No. → 400001-411285, data on BUS (hexadecimal) → 0000-2FFC,
FP-X device No. → DT0-DT12784.
Setting using FPWIN GR

1. Change the display to the “Online monitor” by selecting “Online Edit Mode” under “Online” in the menu
bar or pressing [CTRL] and [F2] keys at the same time.
2. Select “Options” in the menu bar, and then select “PLC Configuration”. Click “COM Port”. There are
separate tabs for setting the COM1 and COM2.
7-77

Dialog box of MODBUS RTU setting
Reference: <MODBUS RTU Specifications>

It can be downloaded from our website.
http://industrial.panasonic.com/ac/e/dl_center/manual/
7-78

7.6.2 MEWTOCOL Master (Sample Program)
Use the F145 (SEND) “Data send” or F146 (RECV) “Data receive” instruction to use the MEWTOCOL
master function.
Note: Available for the transistor type and relay type Ver 1.21 or later version only.
Sample program
7-79

Flow chart
The above program executes the operation 1 to 3 repeatedly.

4. Updates the write data if the write data (DT50 and DT51) and the read data (DT60 and DT61) are
matched.
5. Writes the DT50 and DT51 of the local unit into the data DT0 and DT1 in the unit number 1 from the
COM1 port.
6. Reads the data DT0 and dT1 in the unit number 1 into the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit from
the COM1 port.
Note) The above COM1 port will be COM2 port for the COM2 port.
7-80

7.7 Ethernet Communication (AFPX-COM5)
7.7.1 AFPX-COM5
Overview
The communication cassette AFPX-COM5 has an Ethernet interface at the COM1 port and a 3-wire
RS232C interface at the COM2 port.
The Ethernet at the COM1 port supports the computer link and general-purpose serial communication,
and the RS232C at the COM2 port supports the computer link, general-purpose serial communication
and MODBUS RTU.
The use of the COM2 port is the same as other cassettes such as the AFPX-COM2, and it is selectable
from the COM2 port or the FP-X USB communication.
Although the Ethernet interface is connected to other device via Ethernet, the AFPX-COM5
communicates with the FP-X via RS232C, and it functions as a converter between Ethernet and RS232C.
7.7.2 Functions of APFX-COM5

Port (Name) Communication function
- Computer link (Max. 1 connection (Client))
Ethernet
Note1) (Max. 3 connections (Server))
(COM1 port)
- General-purpose serial communication (Max. 1 connection)
- Computer link
RS232C
- General-purpose serial communication
(COM2 port)
- MODBUS RTU (1:1)
Note1) For Ver1.10 or later, the PC (PLC) link function of the FP-X is available via Ethernet.
7.7.3 Additional Functions (Ver 1.10 or Later)

Additional functions
- Support UDP/IP, too. As it supports two protocols, which are TCP/IP*1) and UDP/IP*2), communication
with various devices on a network such as computers can be established.
- Broadcast transmission is available with UDP/IP communication. Also, the PC (PLC) link function of the
FP-X is available using broadcast transmission.
- Data can be transmitted to multiple destinations for separate unit numbers (station numbers) (max. 99
units) (when selecting the computer link).
- IP can be automatically get. (DHCP function)
- The information such as own IP address can be confirmed on the FP-X using the network information
notification and confirmation functions.
Note) When the firmware version of AFPX-COM5 is older than Ver1.10, it can be upgraded by
downloading the later version from our website.
7-81

Differences between Ver1.00 and Ver1.10
TCP communication setting
Communication mode select Operation mode select Ver1.00 Ver1.10
Client connection Not available Available
Computer link
Server connection Available Available
General-purpose Client connection Available Available
communication Server connection Available Available
UDP communication setting

Communication Operation mode Transmission
Ver1.00 Ver1.10
mode select select method
Broadcast Not available Available
Client connection
Unicast Not available Available
Computer link
Broadcast Not available Available
Server connection
Unicast Not available Available
General-purpose Broadcast Not available Available
Not selectable
communication Unicast Not available Available
Option setting
Communication mode select Ver1.00 Ver1.10
Response timeout Not available Available
End code Not available Available
Judgment time without termination Not available Available
Network information notification Not available Available
Network information confirmation Not available Available
Connection information confirmation Not available Available
Target IP address for unit number Not available Available
7-82

7.7.4 Communication Tool Software Configurator WD (Ver1.10 or Later)
The communication tool software “Configurator WD” is required to set Ethernet communication for the
AFPX-COM5. Install the Configurator WD before setting the AFPX-COM5.
The Configurator WD can be downloaded from our website free of charge.

(Member registration is required. Free of charge)
The setting is saved in the AFPX-COM5.
IP address setting
Item Description Default
Obtain IP
When selecting “Obtain an IP address automatically”, an IP address is Use the
address
obtained from the DHCP server. When selecting “Use the following IP following IP
automatically
Note1) address”, an IP address is set manually. address
Unit name Unit name for Communication cassette AFPX-COM5 can be specified. FPX_ET
IP address of Communication cassette AFPX-COM5
IP address 192.168.1.5
Set an IP address other than 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255.
Subnet mask Netmask of Communication cassette AFPX-COM5 255.255.255.0
Gateway Gateway of Communication cassette AFPX-COM5 192.168.1.1
Note1) When an error occurs, the ERROR LED will be turned on.
7-83

Communication setting
Communica-
Communication protocol of AFPX-COM5
tion protocol TCP
Select TCP or UDP.
select
Communicati Communication mode of AFPX-COM5
Computer link
on mode Select Computer link or General communication.
Connection mode of AFPX-COM5
Select Client mode or Server mode.
Action mode Server mode
Common When selecting Computer link for Communication mode, Client
setting mode cannot be selected.
Baud rate for communicating with the COM1 port of FP-X.
Baud rate
Note3) Change the baud rate according to the baud rate for the COM1
9600 bps
port of FP-X.
(COM1)
Select 9600 bps or 115200 bps.
Transmi- It is valid when selecting UDP in the communication protocol.
ssion Method for transmitting data to partner devices. UNICAST
method Select UNICAST or BROADCAST.
Source port Port number that AFPX-COM5 opens.
9094
No. Setting range: 1025 to 32767
Server If AFPX-COM5 not communicate with a destination device
setting during this setting time (seconds) in the state that connection is
Note1)
Time out established, connection will be cut. 0
Setting range: 0 to 1800 s When 0 is set, the connection will
not be cut.
Destination IP address of a destination device
192.168.1.100
IP Set an IP address other than 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255.
Destination Destination port number of a destination device
9094
port No. Setting range: 1025 to 32767
Source port number of a destination device
Source port
Client Setting range: 0, 1025 to 32767 0
No.
setting When 0 is set, optional.
Note2)
If AFPX-COM5 not communicate with a destination device
during this setting time (seconds) in the state that connection is
Time out established, connection will be cut. 0
Setting range: 0 to 1800 s When 0 is set, the connection will
not be cut.
When failed in the connection with a destination device.
Retry time 15
Setting range: 0 to 1800 s
Note1) Set when the server mode has been selected for the action mode.
Note2) Set when the client mode has been selected for the action mode.
Note3) As the communication between the FP-X and AFPX-COM5 is performed using serial
communication, the baud rate for them should be set to the same value.
7-84

Option setting
Response timeout
(When selecting the Set the wait time for the response. 5000 ms
computer link only)
This is the code for the AFPX-COM5 to confirm the end of the
message (data) to be received from the FP-X.
CR, CR+LF or NONE can be selected.
End code CR
Reception continues until the end of the message (CR, CR+LF)
will be received. When selecting NONE, the end code is not
confirmed.
Set the wait time for the end code.
If the next message (data) is not received within the judgment
time without termination (ms) after the last received message
(data), the AFPX-COM5 judges that is no termination, and
Judgment time without performs the following operation.
20 ms
termination (End code: when selecting CR, CR+LF)
The received message (data) is discarded. For TCP, the
connection is disconnected.
(End code: when selecting NONE)
The message (data) is transmitted to the connected destination.
Set the area of DT to be used for the network information and
Information
connection information. 10000
area first No.
Setting range: 3000 to 12000
Network
When the power turns on, the network information will be
information Invalid
Network notified to the FP-X.
notification
informa-
Network
tion When using the computer link and client, the network
information Invalid
information can be confirmed.
confirmation
Connection
When using the computer link and server, the connection
information Invalid
information can be confirmed from the LAN side.
confirmation
Destination
unit No. and A command is transmitted to the IP address corresponding to
Target IP Invalid
IP address is the unit number.
address
specified.
for unit
Select a unit number.
No. Unit No. Invalid
Can be selected from the range of 1 to 99.
IP address Set an IP address. 192.168.1.100
7-85

7.7.5 Communication Mode 1: Computer Link (Ethernet)
The supplement is described below to perform Ethernet communication by the computer link.
Overview
• Communication is conducted between a computer and a PLC using Ethernet by the computer link.
• Remote programming and monitoring is possible via LAN line by using a programming tool such as
FPWIN GR.
• Establish connection between a computer and the FP-X.
• In that case, the connected computer is called “Client” and the connected FP-X is called “Server”. After
connection establishment, communication via TCP/IP is conducted. Up to 3 connections can be
established at the specified source port.
7-86

Setting of communication environment for Computer link (Ethernet)
The following two settings for the FP-X and communication cassette AFPX-COM5 should be set.
- Communication environment of FP-X
- Communication environment of Communication cassette AFPX-COM5
Setting communication environment of FP-X

The programming tool FPWIN GR is used to set the baud rate or communication format of the COM1
port. Select [Option] → [PLC Configuration] in the menu bar, and click [COM1 Port ] tab.
COM1 port setting (AFPX-COM5)

No. Setting item Setting value
No.410 Unit number 1 to 99
No.412 Communication mode Computer link
Character bit 8 bits
Communication format
No.413 Parity check Odd
(Fixed)
Stop bit 1 bit
Note1)
No.415 Baud rate 115200 bps/9600 bps
Note1) The communication format for Ethernet communication with the COM5 cassette is fixed. Set as
the above table.
Note2) Set the baud rate to match the setting of Configurator WD.
7-87

Setting Ethernet communication environment of Communication cassette AFPX-COM5
The Configurator WD is used to set Ethernet communication environment of the AFPX-COM5.
Start the Configurator WD.

Search the AFPX-COM5.
Select the AFPX-COM5 from the search result, and set an IP address to connect with a computer.
After that, search again. Select the AFPX-COM5, and select [Edit] → [Communication Setting] in the
menu, or right-click to select [Communication Setting].
Dialog box of communication setting
Note:
If the TCP is selected for the communication protocol, up to three connections are established using the
computer link (Ethernet), however, when using the programming tool FPWIN GR for connection (using
registration monitor command, multi-frame), more than two connections cannot be established. Also, If
the UDP is selected for the communication protocol, the UDP communication cannot be used as the
programming tool FPWIN GR does not support it, although no restriction on connections.
7-88

7.7.6 Communication (Computer Link (Ethernet))
Overview
A 1:1 computer link connects the FP-X and a computer using a UTP cable (CAT5). Communication is
conducted via commands from the computer and responses from the PLC.
1:1 Communication setting (Computer link (Ethernet))

This setting enables the 1:1 communication between the FP-X and a computer using the computer link
(Ethernet).
System register setting of FP-X (specified using FPWIN GR)

No.410 Unit number 1
No.412 Communication mode Computer link
Char. bit 8 bits
Communication format
No.413 Parity check Odd
(Fixed)
Stop bit 1 bit
the above table.
7-89

Setting of Communication cassette AFPX-COM5 (specified using Configurator WD)
IP address setting
Item Default
Get IP address Manual
Unit name FPX_ET
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Default gateway 192.168.1.1
Item Default
Communication protocol TCP
Baud rate (COM1) 115200 bps/9600 bps
Communication mode Computer link
Source port No. 9094
Time out 0
Note1) Specify the same baud rate as the
communication environment setting of the
COM1 port of the FP-X.
Setting of a computer
IP address setting
Item Default
Note)
IP address 192.168.1.100
Note) The IP address of a computer is an example.
Set the IP addresses of the computer and
communication cassette AFPX-COM5
according to the network environment to be
used.
7-90

7.7.7 1:N Communication (Computer Link (Ethernet))
Overview
A computer is connected respective PLCs through Ethernet. The computer and the PLC communicate
via commands and responses: The computer sends a command specifying the destination IP address,
and the PLC with that IP address sends a response back to the computer.
It is no problem if the unit number of the PLC overlaps with other PLCs.
1:N Communication setting (Computer link (Ethernet))

The settings for the FP-X system register and communication cassette AFPX-COM5 are the same as the
settings for the connection (computer link (Ethernet)) by a 1:1 communication.
However, set the IP address for a FP-X not to overlap with other FP-X units.
7-91

7.7.8 MEWTOCOL Master Communication Setting (Ver 1.10)
For using as the MEWTOCOL master, set the AFPX-COM5 to the computer link and client. Also,
specifying the simultaneous transmission by broadcast or the target IP address for unit number in the
option setting enables the communication with various PLCs.
MEWTOCOL master setting in TCP

Item Default
Action mode Client connection
Note)
Destination IP address IP address of destination
Destination port No. 1025 to 32767
Source port No. 0, 1025 to 32767
Timeout 0 to 1800 secs
Retry time 0 to 1800 secs
Note:
If you want to transmit data when connection is not established, the connection can be established from
the AFPX-COM5 and data can be transmitted.
In the TCP, it takes some time for connection. The connection timeout for the AFPX-COM5 is the same
as the response timeout value. Set the timeout time for the SEND/RECV instruction longer than the
response timeout value to judge the connection timeout.
7-92

MEWTOCOL master setting in UDP
Item Default
Communication protocol UDP
Action mode Client connection
Note1)

Send type UNICAST/BROADCAST
Note2)
Destination IP address IP address of destination

Note2) When selecting BROADCAST, the setting of
the destination IP address is not required.
Note:
After the AFPX-COM5 is powered on, it will take about 5 seconds for initializing the Ethernet.
Until the Ethernet is initialized, data cannot be transmitted or received. For the Ethernet communication,
programming is necessary to start the communication after 5 seconds since the power turned on.
Generally, as a router does not transmit a broadcast packet, communication over the router cannot be
achieved. Using the broadcast, processing load is applied on all equipment on the network. Confirm that
the broadcast does not affect other equipment before using it.
7-93

7.7.9 MEWTOCOL Master (Ethernet) (Sample Program) (Ver 1.10 or Later)
Overview
MEWTOCOL communication can be performed with the FP-X using the F145 and F146 instructions. The
following sample program executes 4 MEWTOCOL commands in sequence for 2 slave units using the
F145 and F146 instructions.
Note: It is available for the transistor type and relay type of Ver 1.21 or later.
Description
R100: Stores the data for 10 words from DT1000 of the slave unit 1 into the area from DT100 of the
master unit.
R101: Writes the data for 10 words from DT100 of the master unit to the area form DT1010 of the slave
unit 1.
R102: Stores the data for 10 words from DT1000 of the slave unit 2 into the area from DT120 of the
master unit.
R103: Writes the data for 10 words from DT130 of the master unit to the area form DT1010 of the slave
unit 2.
Set the system registers for each units by a tool software (such as FPWIN GR).
System register setting
Master unit No. 412: Computer link mode
No. 415: 115200 bps
No. 413: 8 bits, Odd, 1 bit
Slave unit 1 No. 410: Unit No. 1
No. 412: Computer link mode
No. 415: 115200 bps
No. 143 8 bits, Odd, 1 bit
Slave unit 2 No. 410: Unit No. 2
No. 415: 115200 bps
No. 413: 8 bits, Odd, 1 bit
7-94

1. When using the MEWTOCOL master function in TCP
Set as follows for each unit using Configurator WD.
IP address setting Communication setting Option setting
Master unit IP address: 192.168.1.5 Communication protocol: TCP Destination unit No.
Netmask: 255.255.255.0 Action mode: Client connection and IP address is
Gateway: 192.168.1.1 Baud rate: 115200 bps specified: On
Communication mode:
Computer link Target IP address
Destination IP address: for unit No.:
192.168.1.11 No.1: 192.168.1.11
Destination port No.: 9094 No.2: 192.168.1.12
Source port No.: 0
Timeout: 0
Retry time: 15
Slave unit 1 IP address: 192.168.1.11 Communication protocol: TCP Not necessary.
Netmask: 255.255.255.0 Action mode: Server connection
Gateway: 192.168.1.1 Baud rate: 115200 bps
Communication mode:
Computer link
Source port No.: 9094
Timeout: 0
Slave unit 2 IP address: 192.168.1.2 Communication protocol: TCP Not necessary.
Communication mode:
Computer link
Timeout: 0
2. When using the MEWTOCOL master function in UDP, UNICAST communication

Master unit IP address: 192.168.1.5 Communication protocol: UDP Destination unit No.
Netmask: 255.255.255.0 Action mode: Client connection and IP address is
Gateway: 192.168.1.1 Baud rate: 115200 bps specified: On
Communication mode:
Computer link Target IP address for
Send type: UNICAST unit No.:
Destination IP address: No.1: 192.168.1.11
192.168.1.11 No.2: 192.168.1.12
Destination port No.: 9094
Source port No.: 0
Slave unit 1 IP address: 192.168.1.11 Communication protocol: UDP Not necessary.
Communication mode:
Computer link
Send type: UNICAST
Communication mode:
Computer link
Send type: UNICAST
7-95

3. When using the MEWTOCOL master function in UDP, BROADCAST communication
Master unit IP address: 192.168.1.5 Communication protocol: UDP Not necessary.
Netmask: 255.255.255.0 Action mode: Client connection
Communication mode:
Computer link
Send type: BROADCAST
Destination IP address:
192.168.1.11
Destination port No.: 9094
Source port No.: 0
Communication mode:
Computer link
Communication mode:
Computer link
7-96

Master unit sample program
Reference: For information on the F145(SEND) and F146(RECV) instructions, <7.7.3

Communication Tool Software Configurator WD>
7-97

7.7.10 Communication Function 2: General-purpose Serial Communication
(Ethernet)
The supplement is described below to conduct Ethernet communication by the general-purpose
serial communication.
Reference: <7.4 Communication Function 2: General-purpose Serial Communication>
Overview
• Data can be sent and received between the FP-X and an external device using Ethernet.
• Data is read from and written to an external device connected to Ethernet by means of FP-X data
registers, and the programs are required for the FP-X.
• Connection with an external device is established using the general-purpose serial communication
(Ethernet). Number of connection is one.
• Select either the client mode or server mode.
• In case of the client mode, connection is established by the AFPX-COM5 for a predetermined IP
address after turning on the power supply of the FP-X.
• There are “Send data” and “Receive data” for the data transfer with an external device.
7-98

Setting for using the general-purpose serial communication (Ethernet)
The following two settings for the FP-X and communication cassette AFPX-COM5 should be set.
- Communication environment of FP-X
- Communication environment of Communication cassette AFPX-COM5

port. Select [Option] → [PLC Configuration] in the menu bar, and click [COM1 Port ] tab.

No.410 Unit number 1 to 99
No.412 Communication mode General communication
Character bit 8 bits
Parity check Odd
No.413 Communication format Stop bit 1 bit
Terminator CR, CR+LF, None
Header STX not exist, STX exists
Note1)
the above table.

Start the Configurator WD.

Search the AFPX-COM5.
Select the AFPX-COM5 from the search result, and set an IP address to connect with a computer.
After that, search again. Select the AFPX-COM5, and select [Edit] → [Communication Setting] in the
menu, or right-click to select [Communication Setting].
7-99

[When Communication cassette AFPX-COM5 is in the TCP client mode]
Dialog box of communication setting: Setting of AFPX-COM5
Item Setting value
Action mode Client mode
Note)
Communication mode General communication
Destination IP No. Destination IP address
Time out 0 to 1800 s
Retry time 0 to 1800 s
Note) Specify the same baud rate as the communication
environment setting of the COM1 port of the FP-X.
[When Communication cassette AFPX-COM5 is in the TCP server mode]

Item Setting value
Action mode Client mode
Note)
Timeout 0 to 1800 s
Note) Specify the same baud rate as the communication
environment setting of the COM1 port of the FP-X.
7-100

[When Communication cassette AFPX-COM5 is in the UDP mode]
Item Setting value
Note1)
Note2)
Send type UNICAST/BROADCAST
Destination IP No. Destination IP address
communication environment setting of the COM1
port of the FP-X.
Note2) When selecting BROADCAST, the setting of the
destination IP address is not required.
Note:
Initializing Ethernet takes approx. 5 seconds on the AFPX-COM5 after turning on the power supply. Until
it finishes, data cannot be sent or received. For Ethernet communication, programming is necessary to
start communication after a lapse of 5 seconds after the power activation.
7-101

7.7.11 PC(PLC) Link Communication (Ethernet) (Ver 1.10 or Later)
Overview
Data sharing is available using the PC (PLC) link function of the FP-X via Ethernet.
How to use and set is the same as the PC(PLC) link via RS485.
7-102

PC(PLC) link communication setting
When the PC(PLC) link function has been selected on the FP-X, the baud rate is automatically 115200
bps. Set the baud rate in the COM1 port communication setting for the AFPX-COM5 to 115200 bps as
well.

Dialog box of Communication setting

Setting item Setting value
Baud rate 115200bps
Communication mode General-purpose
communication
Send type BROADCAST
Source port No. 0､1025 to 32767
Note1) Specify the same number for the

destination port No. and the source port No. for
the AFPX-COM5 to be used in the PC(PLC) link.

port.
Select [Option] → [PLC Configuration] in the menu bar, and click [COM1 Port] tab.
Dialog box of PLC Configuration setting
No. Setting item Default

No.410 Unit No. 1
No.412 Communication mode PC link
Do not use the same unit number for multiple FP-X units.
7-103

7.7.12 Applied Usage (Ethernet) (Ver 1.10 or Later)
- How to confirm the network information on the FP-X.
The network information (own IP address, destination IP address, destination port No., version)
that has been set for the AFPX-COM5 can be confirmed from the FP-X by the option setting. The
connection information (destination IP address, own IP address, version) of the AFPX-COM5 can
be confirmed from the LAN side.
Dialog box of option setting
1. Network information notification: Network information is notified to the FP-X from the AFPX-
COM5. (Network information is written to the data register of FP-X by the AFPX-COM5.)
2. Network information confirmation: Network information on the AFP-COM5 can be confirmed
from the FP-X. (The virtual data register within the AFP-COM5 is read from the FP-X.)
3. Connection information confirmation: Connection information on the AFPX-COM5 can be
confirmed from a destination device from a device on a LAN. (The virtual data register within
the AFPX-COM5 is read from a destination device on a LAN.)
7-104

- Network information notification area
Set the area to be used for the network information notification, network information confirmation and
connection information confirmation.
When DT1000 (default) is set for the network information notification area, the following areas will be
used.
Network information notification and network information confirmation areas

Register Description Description
Explanation
No. (Higher bytes) (Lower bytes)
Note1) st
DT10000 Error code Own IP address (1 ) - When own IP address is 192.168.1.5,
nd H00C0 (K192) is notified/confirmed in
DT10001 0x00 (reserve) Own IP address (2 )
rd
DT10000, and H00A8 (K168) is in
DT10002 0x00 (reserve) Own IP address (3 ) DT10001.
th
DT10003 0x00 (reserve) Own IP address (4 ) - When destination port No. is 9094,
DT10004 0x00 (reserve)
st
Destination IP address (1 ) H2386 (K9094) is notified/confirmed in
nd DT10008.
DT10005 0x00 (reserve) Destination IP address (2 )
- When the version of AFPX-COM5 is
rd
DT10006 0x00 (reserve) Destination IP address (3 ) 1.10, H1100 is notified/confirmed.
th Note) The destination IP address and
destination port No. can be
DT10008 Destination port No.
notified/confirmed only when selecting
DT10009 Version of AFPX-COM5 the computer link and client setting.
Note1) Error code: 0: Normal, 1: DHCP acquisition error, 2: IP address duplicate error
Connection information confirmation area

Register Description Description
No. (Higher bytes) (Lower bytes)
Note1) st
DT10010 Error code Destination IP address (1 )
nd
rd
th
st
nd
rd
th
DT10018 0x0000 (reserve)
DT10019 Version of AFPX-COM5
7-105

- Network information notification
If the network information notification setting is enabled, the AFPX-COM5 notifies the network
information to the FP-X on completion of the initialization of Ethernet. (Ethernet is initialized after the
power turns on, and when the unit is restarted after the change in settings.) The information is notified by
the data area write command (“WD”) of 10 words from the information area first number with
MEWTOCOL. (For the memory area, “DT” is fixed. For the unit number, “EE” is fixed.) Using this
notification enables the completion of the initialization of Ethernet to be confirmed in a ladder program
and to start communication.)
When using the general-purpose communication, start the communication after receiving the data area
write command for the network information notification and after the response timeout time.
[Sample program] (Set DT10000 in the network information notification area.)
- Network information confirmation

When selecting the computer link and client setting, the network information can be confirmed from the
FP-X by enabling the network information confirmation setting. It can be confirmed by reading the
confirmation area by the MEWTOCOL data area read command (“RD”). (For the memory area, “DT” is
fixed. The unit number is arbitrary.) If the network information confirmation setting is enabled, the AFPX-
COM5 responds to the MEWTOCOL data area read command for the confirmation area regardless of
unit numbers.
7-106

[Sample program] (Set DT10000 in the network information notification area.)
- Connection information confirmation

When selecting the computer link and server setting, the connection information can be confirmed from
the LAN side by enabling the connection information confirmation setting. It can be confirmed by reading
the confirmation area by the MEWTOCOL data area read command (“RD”) from the LAN. (For the
memory area, “DT” is fixed.) If the connection information confirmation setting is enabled, the AFPX-
COM5 responds to the MEWTOCOL data area read command for the confirmation area regardless of
unit numbers.
7-107

- How to transmit a command message to each unit
- Target IP address for unit number

If “Destination unit number and IP address is specified” is checked, a command can be sent to the IP
address corresponding to each unit number.
Settable conditions
- When selecting the client and computer link
- When selecting the UDP and general-purpose communication
- When selecting the broadcast (IP address takes priority, and a command is transmitted via unicast.)
Setting method
1. Check “Destination unit number and IP address is specified.” in the [Option] dialog box.
2. Check the destination unit number you want to set, and double-click the IP address.
(Unit numbers 1 to 99)
3. Specify the destination IP address that is corresponding to the unit number.
Note) When connecting to the IP corresponding to a unit number via TCP, a new connection should be
established after disconnecting the existing connection.
7-108

7.7.13 Example of Connections (Ethernet) (Ver 1.10 or Later)
- Connection with FP2 ET-LAN unit
Overview
Connection can be established with a maximum of 8 FP-X simultaneously using a FP2 ET-LAN unit, and
transmission is performed by the computer link.
Example of connection
- Setting of FP2 ET-LAN unit

Item Setting value
Communication method TCP/IP
Open method Active open
Application in which connection is used General-purpose communication
(Transparent communication)
Source node port No. Arbitrary
Destination node IP address IP address of the destination FP-X
Destination node port No. 9094 (can be changed.)
7-109

- Setting of FP-X
1) FP-X System register setting
2) Setting of AFPX-COM5
Item Setting value
Time out 0
UDP/IP can be used for the communication method.

In that case, change the communication method of the FP2 ET-LAN unit to UDP/IP.
Set the communication protocol of the AFP-COM5 to UDP, and set the send type to UNICAST.
Note:
For MEWTOCOL master function of the FP2 ET-LAN unit, MEWTOCOL-COM is not available. For
communicating with the FP-X by the computer link, transmit the MEWTOCOL-COM data format using
the transparent communication on the FP2 ET-LAN unit. In this case, an exclusive header is not required
for the ET-LAN unit.
7-110

7.7.14 Initialization Procedure
Overview
• The Ethernet communication environment setting of the AFPX-COM5 can be initialized.
Initialization procedure
1. Turn on the switch at the back of the AFPX-COM5.

2. Install the AFPX-COM on the FP-X and turn on the power supply.
3. The ERR. LED of the AFPX-COM5 flashes every 5 seconds. (Initialization completes.)
4. Turn off the power supply of the FP-X. Remove the AFPX-COM5.
5. Turn off the switch at the back of the AFPX-COM5.
6. Install the AFPX-COM5 on the FP-X, and turn on the power supply.
Note) The Ethernet communication setting (including the IP address) cannot be changed when the
switch at the back of the AFPX-COM5 is on. Always turn it off after initialization.
Setting for initialization

IP address setting
Item Default
Get IP address Manual
Unit name FPX_ET
Item Default
Baud rate (COM1) 9600 bps
Time out 0
7-111

7-112

Chapter 8
Application Cassette

8.1 Expansion of Application Cassette
Following two methods of expansion are available for the FP-X.
1. Add on the FP-X expansion unit or FP0 expansion unit (expansion FP0 adapter) with the
expansion cable.
2. Add on the add-on cassette in the cassette mounting part of the FP-X control unit.
For the FP-X, the add-on cassette (application cassette and communication cassette) can be installed on
the FP-X control unit. The number of the expansion units that can be installed varies depending on the
types of the control unit.
8-2

8.2 Application Cassettes
CH0 WX10
2-channel
FP-X analog WX20
analog input AFPX-AD2
input cassette CH1 WX11
(non-isolated)
WX21
2-channel CH0 WY10

FP-X analog
analog output (isolated) WY20
output AFPX-DA2
(isolated between CH1 WY11
cassette
channels) WY21
2-channel CH0 WX10

analog input (isolated) WX20
(non-isolated between CH1 WX11
FP-X analog
channels) WX21 AFPX-A21
I/O cassette
1-Channel WY10
analog output (isolated) WY20
2-channel
CH0 WX10
FP-X thermocouple input
WX20
thermocouple (isolated) AFPX-TC2
CH1 WX11
cassette (isolated between
WX21
channels)
2-channel CH0 WX10

FP-X RTD RTD input (insulated) WX20
AFPX-RTD2
cassette (insulated between CH1 WX11
channels) WX21
FP-X input From X100

8-point DC input AFPX-IN8
cassette From X200
8-3

FP-X output 8-point From Y100

AFPX-TR8
cassette transistor output (NPN) From Y200
FP-X output 6-point From Y100

AFPX-TR6P
cassette transistor output (PNP) From Y200
From X100
4-point DC input
FP-X I/O From Y100
3-point transistor output AFPX-IN4T3
cassette From X200
(NPN)
From Y200
From X100
2-channel high-speed
FP-X pulse I/O From Y100
Note2) counter + 1-channel AFPX-PLS
cassette From X200
pulse output
From Y200
FP-X master
Master memory +
memory − AFPX-MRTC
Clock/Calendar
cassette
Note1) The I/O numbers are the cassette mounting part 1 (from X100 and Y100) and cassette mounting
part 2 (from X200 and Y200).
Reference: <4.5 I/O Allocation of FP-X Add-on Cassette>

Note2) The pulse I/O cassette cannot be used with the Tr type.
8-4

8.3 Specifications
8.3.1 FP-X Analog Input Cassette

Product No.: AFPX-AD2
Item Specifications
No. of input points 2 channels/cassette
Voltage 0 to 10 V
Input range
Current 0 to 20 mA
Note)
Digital conversion value K0 to K4000
Resolution 1/4000 (12 bits)
Conversion speed 1 ms/channel
Total accuracy ±1% F.S. or less (0 to 55 °C)
Voltage 40 kΩ
Input impedance
Current 125 Ω
Voltage -0.3 to +15 V
Absolute max. rating
Current -2 to +30 mA
Input protection Diode
Insulation Non-isolated between analog part and internal digital circuit part
Occupation No. of I/O contacts Input 32 points
Note1) When the analog input values exceed the upper and lower limits, the digital values maintain the
upper and lower limit values. As the resolution is 12 bits, the higher 4 bits of the input contact are
always 0.
Note2) Following time is required to reflect the analog data in the input of the control unit.
Note3) Averaging cannot be processed with the cassette. If averaging is necessary, use a ladder
program to execute averaging process.
Terminal layout
CH0 V Voltage input
I Current input
SEL Voltage/current select
COM Common
CH1 V Voltage input
I Current input
SEL Voltage/current select
COM Common
Note) There is no LED indication. NC Not used
8-5

Connection method
DC input: 0 mA to 20 mA
Conversion characteristics graph
Table of A/D converted values

Input current (mA) A/D converted value
0.0 0
2.5 500
5.0 1000
7.5 1500
10.0 2000
12.5 2500
15.0 3000
17.5 3500
20.0 4000
When exceeding the rated range

Input voltage (V) Converted value
0 mA or less (Negative value) 0
20 mA or more 4000
8-6

DC input: 0 V to 10 V

Input voltage (V) A/D converted value
0.0 0
1.0 400
2.0 800
3.0 1200
4.0 1600
5.0 2000
6.0 2400
7.0 2800
8.0 3200
9.0 3600
10.0 4000

0 V or less (Negative value) 0
10 V or more 4000
Each channel data is allocated as I/O data as shown below.

Installed slot No.
Analog input cassette
Cassette mounting part 1 Cassette mounting part 2
Input channel
(Slot 0) (Slot 1)
CH0 WX10 WX20
CH1 WX11 WX21
Note:
• Use double-core twisted-pair shielded wires. It is recommended to ground them. However, depending
on the conditions of the external noise, it may be better not to ground the shielding.
• Do not have the analog input wiring close to AC wires, power wires, or load.
8-7

8.3.2 FP-X Analog Output Cassette
Product No.: AFPX-DA2
Item Specifications
No. of output points 2 channels/cassette
Voltage 0 to 10 V
Output range
Current 0 to 20 mA
Note1)
Digital value K0 to K4000
Conversion speed 1 ms/1 channel
Output impedance 0.5 kΩ (Voltage output)
Output max. current 10 mA (Voltage output)
Output allowable load resistance 600 Ω or less (Current output)
Between analog output terminal and internal digital circuit part
Transformer insulation, Isolation IC insulation
Insulation
Between each channel of analog output terminals
Transformer insulation , Isolation IC insulation
Note1) When the digital value exceeds the upper and lower limits, D/A conversion will not be performed.
Note2) Following time is required to reflect the output of the control unit in the analog output.
Terminal layout
CH0 V Voltage output
I Current output
COM0 Common
CH1 V Voltage output
I Current output
COM1 Common
NC Not used
Connection method
8-8

0 mA to 20 mA output
Table of D/A converted values

Digital input value Output current (mA)
0 0.0
500 2.5
1000 5.0
1500 7.5
2000 10.0
2500 12.5
3000 15.0
3500 17.5
4000 20.0

Digital input value Analog output value
Unchanged
Negative value
(Value preceding the input of a negative value)
Unchanged
4001 or more
(Value preceding the input of 4001)
0 V to 10 V output
8-9

Digital input value Output voltage (V)
0 0.0
400 1.0
800 2.0
1200 3.0
1600 4.0
2000 5.0
2400 6.0
2800 7.0
3200 8.0
3600 9.0
4000 10.0

Unchanged
Negative value
Unchanged
4001 or more

Installed slot No.
Analog output cassette
Output channel
(Slot 0) (Slot 1)
CH0 WY10 WY20
CH1 WY11 WY21
Note:
• Do not have the analog output wiring close to AC wires, power wires, or load.
DA part Internal block diagram

A voltage amplifier and a current amplifier is connected in parallel to one DA converter IC.
Do not connect an analog device to the voltage output terminal and current output terminal of the same
channel simultaneously.
8-10

8.3.3 FP-X Analog I/O Cassette
Product No.: AFPX-A21
Item Specifications
Voltage 0 to 10 V, 0 to 5 V
Input range
Current 0 to 20 mA
Digital conversion value K0 to K4000
Conversion speed 1 ms/channel
Voltage 1M Ω
Input impedance
Current 250 Ω
Voltage -0.5, +15 V (Voltage input)
Absolute max. input
Current +30 mA (Current input)
Insulation
Between each channel of analog output terminals
Note1) When the analog input values exceed the upper and lower limits, the digital values maintain the
upper and lower limit values. As the resolution is 12 bits, the higher 4 bits of the input contact are
always 0.
Note2) Following time is required to reflect the analog data in the input of the control unit.
Note3) Averaging cannot be processed with the cassette. If averaging is necessary, use a ladder
program to execute averaging process.
Item Specifications
No. of output points 1 channels/cassette
Voltage 0 to 10 V
Output range
Current 0 to 20 mA
Note)
Digital value K0 to K4000
Conversion speed 1 ms/1 channel
Output impedance 0.5 kΩ (Voltage output)
Output max. current 10 mA (Voltage output)
Output allowable load resistance 600 Ω or less (Current output)
Insulation
Between analog output terminal and analog input terminal
8-11

Terminal layout
V Voltage input
CH0
I Current input
V Voltage input
CH1
I Current input
Input COM Common (for input)
Input range selection
Note)
SEL 0 to 10 V or
0 to 5 V, 0 to 20 mA
V Voltage output
Output I Current output
COM Common (for output)
Note) The CH0 and CH1 will be the same range
according to switching of the SEL terminal.
However, the inputs of 0 to 5 V and 0 to 20
mA can be used at the same time depending
on the connection.
Connection method
8-12

DC input: 0 mA to 20 mA

Input current (mA) A/D converted value
0.0 0
2.5 500
5.0 1000
7.5 1500
10.0 2000
12.5 2500
15.0 3000
17.5 3500
20.0 4000

0 mA or less (Negative value) 0
20 mA or more 4000
8-13


0.0 0
1.0 400
2.0 800
3.0 1200
4.0 1600
5.0 2000
6.0 2400
7.0 2800
8.0 3200
9.0 3600
10.0 4000

10 V or more 4000
8-14


0.0 0
0.5 400
1.0 800
1.5 1200
2.0 1600
2.5 2000
3.0 2400
3.5 2800
4.0 3200
4.5 3600
5.0 4000

5 V or more 4000

Installed slot No.
Analog input cassette
Input channel
(Slot 0) (Slot 1)
CH0 WX10 WX20
CH1 WX11 WX21
Note:
• Do not have the analog input wiring close to AC wires, power wires, or load.
8-15

0 mA to 20 mA output

Digital input value Output current (mA)
0 0.0
500 2.5
1000 5.0
1500 7.5
2000 10.0
2500 12.5
3000 15.0
3500 17.5
4000 20.0

Unchanged
Negative value
Unchanged
4001 or more
8-16

0 V to 10 V output

Digital input value Output voltage (V)
0 0.0
400 1.0
800 2.0
1200 3.0
1600 4.0
2000 5.0
2400 6.0
2800 7.0
3200 8.0
3600 9.0
4000 10.0

Unchanged
Negative value
Unchanged
4001 or more

Installed slot No.
Analog output cassette
Output channel
(Slot 0) (Slot 1)
CH0 WY10 WY20
Note:
• Do not have the analog output wiring close to AC wires, power wires, or load.
DA part Internal block diagram

A voltage amplifier and a current amplifier is connected in parallel to one DA converter IC.
Do not connect an analog device to the voltage output terminal and current output terminal of the same
channel simultaneously.
8-17

8.3.4 FP-X Thermocouple Cassette
Product No.: AFPX-TC2
Item Specifications
Thermocouple type K (-50.0 to 500.0 °C)
Input range
Thermocouple type J (-50.0 to 500.0 °C)
In normal condition: K-500 to K5000
When exceeding rated range: K-501, K5001 or K8000
Digital value
When wire is broken: K8000
When data is getting ready: K8001
Resolution 0.2 °C (The indication is 0.1 °C by the software averaging procedure.)
Sampling cycle 200 ms/ 2 channels
Total accuracy 0.5% F.S. or less + Cold junction error 1.5 °C
Input impedance 344 kΩ
Insulation Transformer insulation, isolation IC insulation
Note1) When the wire of thermocouple is broken, the digital value will change to K8000 within 70
seconds. Practice in the ladder program a process for avoiding a risk, would be resulting from a
broken wire, and exchange the thermocouple.
Note2) From the Power-on to the converted data Ready, the digital value will be K8001. Create a ladder
program not to use the data obtained during that period.
Terminal layout
CH0 + Thermocouple input +
- Thermocouple input -
CH1 + Thermocouple input +
- Thermocouple input -
NC Used by the system.
Do not connect
anything.
Connection method
Keep the space more than 100 mm between the input line and the power line/high-voltage line.
It is recommended to ground the unit using the shielded compensating wire.
8-18

Range setting switch
Select the thermocouple type K or J with the switch at the back. (The CH0 and CH1 will be the same
range.)
Switch (backside)
Thermocouple type K
Thermocouple type J
K and J range

Input value Converted value
-50.1 °C or less K –501
500.1 °C or more K 5001 or K 8000
When wire is broken K 8000
8-19

8.3.5 FP-X RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) Cassette
Product No.: AFPX-RTD2
Item Specifications
(-200.0 to +850.0 °C)
Note1)
Input range RTD Pt100
In normal condition : K-2000 to K8500
Note2)
When exceeding rated range : K-2150 to K-2001, K8501 to K8650
Digital conversion value
When wire is broken : K20000
Note3) Note4)
When data is getting ready : K20001
Resolution 0.1 °C (Minimum unit)
Note5)
Conversion speed 200 ms or less
Note6)
Total accuracy ±0.2% F.S. or less (Ambient temperature: 0 to +55°C)
Allowable input wire
Resistance value per wire: 10 Ω or less
resistance
Between analog input circuit and internal circuit: Transformer insulation,
Insulation photo coupler insulation
Between analog input channels: Transformer insulation
Occupation No. of I/O Note7)
Input 32 points
contacts
Note1) Use a 3-wire type RTD.
Note2) When exceeding the rated range, reference values which are not in the range of the conversion
accuracy assurance are indicated up to ±15 °C. However, if the temperature drops (below -230
°C) or rise (over 900 °C) more, the data will be the same value (K20000) as the one at the time of
disconnection.
Note3) The digital value will be K20001 from the Power-on to the converted data Ready (approx. 3
seconds) or when an error occurs (watchdog timer time-out error) on the microcomputer for the
RTD cassette. Take care of the use of the data during this period not to influence other programs.
Note4) From the disconnection to the recovery and converted data Ready (approx. 3 seconds), the
digital value will be K20001. Take care of the use of the data during this period not to influence
other programs.
Note5) The conversion speed is 200 ms or less regardless of the number of channels to be used.
And it will be reflected in the internal data register after the completion of a scan.
Note6) The full scale (F.S.) is -200 to 850 °C for the accuracy range of RTD Pt100.
Note7) Each channel data is allocated as I/O data as the table below.
Installed slot
RTD cassette
Expansion slot 0 Expansion slot 1
Input channel
(Cassette position) (Cassette position)
Channel 0 (CH0) WX10 WX20
Channel 1 (CH1) WX11 WX21
Note8) Supply power for 15 minutes or more after the power-on for performing the accurate
measurement before using the cassette.
Terminal layout
CH0 A RTD input A
B RTD input B
B RTD input B
CH1 A RTD input A
B RTD input B
B RTD input B
NC Do not connect anything.
8-20

Connection method
Connect each channel as mentioned below. After the connection, confirm that the polarity and terminal
positions are correctly connected.
Note1) When extending the lead wire of RTD, use 3 wires in the same resistance and the same length.
Note2) Do not place the input signal line close to an AC power line or high-voltage line. Also, do not
bundle it with them.
Note3) Use shielded wires for the input signal line. It is recommended to ground them.
However, depending on the conditions of the external noise, it may be better not to ground the
shielding.
Noter4) Do not connect one RTD to other equipment in parallel (input).
RTD input range

Table of converted values

Input value (°C) Converted value
-200 -2000
0 0
850 8500

(Reference values which accuracy is not assured are indicated up to ±15 °C.)
Input value Converted value
-215 °C or less -2150
865 °C or more 8650
Disconnection 20000
Note) When exceeding the maximum/minimum value (exceeding the rated range), the converted values
will be the values as mentioned above. However, if the temperature drops (below -230 °C) or rise (over
900 °C) more, the data will be the same value (+20000) as the one at the time of disconnection.
Note:
About RTD input range
- From the Power-on to the converted data Ready (approx. 3 seconds), the digital value will be K20001.
Take care of the use of the data during this period not to influence other programs.
- From the disconnection or exceeding the rated range (digital value: K20000) to the recovery and
converted data Ready (approx. 3 seconds), the digital value will be K20001.
Take care of the use of the data during this period not to influence other programs.
8-21

8.3.6 FP-X Input Cassette
Product No.: AFPX-IN8
Item Description
8 points/common
Input points per common (Either the positive or negative of input power supply can be
Response time
LED indication/Terminal layout
Circuit diagram
8-22

8.3.7 FP-X Output Cassette
Product No.: AFPX-TR8
Item Description
Output type Open collector (NPN)
Operating load voltage range 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
Output points per common 8 points/common
Off state leakage current 1µ A or less
Response time
Limitations on number of simultaneous on points

Circuit diagram
8-23

Product No.: AFPX-TR6P
Item Description
Output type Open collector (PNP)
Max. surge current 1.5 A
Response time
Limitations on number of simultaneous on points

Circuit diagram
8-24

8.3.8 FP-X I/O Cassette
Product No.: AFPX-IN4T3
Input specifications
Item Description
Input points per common 4 points/common
Response time 1 ms or less
Item Description
Response time
Circuit diagram
8-25

8.3.9 FP-X Pulse I/O Cassette
Product No.: AFPX-PLS
Note:
The pulse I/O cassette cannot be used with the FP-X Control Unit Tr type.
High-speed counter part

Item Specifications
For high-speed counter Single-phase 2 channels, 2-phase 1 channel
No. of
For Pulse catch 3 points
input
For interrupt input 3 points
points
For normal input 3 points
Rated input current Approx. 8 mA
Input points per common 3 points/common
Max. off voltage/Max. off current 2.4 V DC/1.3 mA
Input impedance Approx. 3 kΩ
5 µs or less
Note)
off→on
Response time
5 µs or less
Note)
on→off
Note) This is the specification when the rated input voltage is 24 V DC at 25 °C.
As the input of the pulse I/O cassette is for the counter input, the response time is quick. Therefore,
if it is used as a normal input, it is recommended to add a timer by a ladder program to prevent
chattering or noises to be received as input signals.
Pulse output part
Item Description
No. of For pulse output 1 ch
output For PWM output 1 ch
points For normal input 3 points
Max. surge current 1.5 A
Y0 off→on 2 µs or less (when the load current is 15 mA or more.)
Y1 on→off 5 µs or less (when the load current is 15 mA or more.)
Response time
off→on 1 ms or less
Y2
on→off 1 ms or less
External power supply (+, - terminals) 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
8-26

Circuit diagram
High-speed counter part Pulse output part
8-27

8.3.10 FP-X Master Memory Cassette
Product No.: AFPX-MRTC
Item Specifications
Year, month, day hour (24-hour display), minute, second and
Setting items
day of week
Clock/Calendar At 0 °C: less than 104 seconds per month
Accuracy At 25 °C: less than 51 seconds per month
At 55 °C: less than 155 seconds per month
Memory capacity Flash ROM (512 kB)
System registers
Master memory Ladder programs
function Storable data Comment data (328 kB)
F-ROM data area
Security function
Note: Only the Clock/Calendar function is valid at the factory setting. Install a battery in the
control unit to use the Clock/Calendar function.
If the battery is not installed, the Clock/Calendar does not function.
Function changeover switch (between the Clock/Calendar and the master memory)
Use the switch at the back of the cassette to switch between the Clock/Calendar and master memory
functions.
8-28

Chapter 9
High-speed Counter, Pulse Output and
PWM Output Functions
(For Tr Type)

9.1 Overview of Each Functions
9.1.1 Usable Units and Cassettes

1. The pulse input can be counted using the inputs X0 to X7 of the main unit (Single-phase 8 channels,
2-phase 4 channels)
2. The pulse output can be carried out using the output of the main unit.
C14 Tr type: 3 ch
C30, C60 Tr type: 4 ch
(0 ch, 1ch: High-speed pulse 2 ch, 3ch: Medium-speed pulse)
3. The pulse I/O cassette (AFPX-PLS) cannot be used with the FP-X Tr type control unit.
Restrictions on the pulse I/O functions of each control unit

C14 Tr C30 Tr C60 Tr
type type type
Input of main unit X0 to X7 A A A
Output of main unit Y0 to Y7 A (Y0 to Y5) A A
Input and output of Cassette mounting part 1 N/A N/A N/A
Pulse I/O cassette (AFPX-PLS) Cassette mounting part 2 N/A N/A N/A
9.1.2 Three Pulse I/O Functions

There are three pulse I/O functions built into the FP-X Tr type
High-speed counter function (Control unit)
The high-speed counter function counts
external inputs such as those from sensors or
encoders. When the count reaches the target
value, this function turns on/off the desired
output.
Pulse output function (Control unit)

Combined with a commercially available
motor driver, the function enables positioning
control. With the exclusive instruction, you
can perform trapezoidal control, home return,
and JOG operation.
9-2

PWM output function (Control unit)
By using the exclusive instruction, the PWM
output function enables a pulse output of the
desired duty ratio.
Note) The pulse I/O cassette (AFPX-PLS) cannot be used with the FP-X Tr type control unit.
9.1.3 Performance of Pulse I/O Function

Number of Channel
I/O to be used High-speed counter Pulse output
Single-phase 8 channels or 2-phase 4 C14 Tr type: 3 ch
Built in Control unit
channels C30, C60 Tr type: 4 ch
Note) The pulse I/O cassette (AFPX-PLS) cannot be used with the FP-X Tr type control unit.
Counting range
• K-2, 147, 483, 648 to K+2, 147, 483, 647 (Coded 32-bit binary)
• The built-in high-speed counter is a ring counter. Consequently, if the counted value exceeds the
maximum value, it returns to the minimum value. Similarly, if the counted value drops below the
minimum value, it goes back to the maximum value and continues counting from there.
Note:
When the linear interpolation instruction F175 is used, the value for the amount of travel should be set so
that it is within the range indicated below.
-8,388,608 to +8,388,607 (Coded 24-bit binary)
9-3

9.2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items
9.2.1 Specifications
High-speed counter function
High-speed counter by the input of the main unit
Performance
Memory area being used
specifications
Input Reset Min. Max.
Channel No. Elapsed Target
contact input Control input counting
value value
flag pulse speed
area area Note1)
width
DT90300 DT90302 1 CH:
CH0 X0 X6 R9110
DT90301 DT90303 100 kHz
DT90304 DT90306 High- 2 CH:
CH1 X1 None R9111
High- DT90305 DT90307 speed 80 kHz
speed DT90308 DT90310 input 3 CH:
CH2 X2 X7 R9112
DT90309 DT90311 5 µs 60 kHz
DT90312 DT90314 4 CH:
[Single phase] CH3 X3 None R9113 50 kHz
DT90313 DT90315
Incremental,
Decremental DT90316 DT90318
CH4 X4 None R9114
DT90317 DT90319
DT90320 DT90322 Medium-
CH5 X5 None R9115
Medium- DT90321 DT90323 speed 10 kHz
speed DT90324 DT90326 input each
CH6 X6 None R9116
DT90325 DT90327 100 µs
DT90328 DT90330
CH7 X7 None R9117
DT90329 DT90331
X0 DT90300 DT90302 High- 1 CH:
CH0 X6 R9110
High- X1 DT90301 DT90303 speed 35 kHz
[2-phase] speed input 2 CH:
X2 DT90308 DT90310
2-phase input , CH2
X3
X7 R9112
DT90309 DT90311 14.3 µs 25 kHz
One input,
Direction X4 DT90316 DT90318 Medium-
CH4 None R9114
distinction Medium- X5 DT90317 DT90319 speed 5 kHz
speed X6 DT90324 DT90326 input each
CH6 None R9116
X7 DT90325 DT90327 100 µs
Related instructions:
F0(MV) :High-speed counter control
F1(DMV) :Read/write of elapsed value of high-speed counter
F166(HC1S) :Target value match on
F167(CH1R) :Target value match off
Note1) These values are available only when the conditions of each item (such as counting method or
No. of channels) are executed.
These values are not available if executing the HSC match ON/OFF instruction, other pulse I/O
process simultaneously or executing the interrupt program.
9-4

Pulse output function
Pulse output when using CPU output
Input/output contact number used Memory area used
Devi-
CW CW Max.
ation
or or Near Con- Elapsed Target output
Channel No. coun- Home
pulse Sign home trol value value frequency
ter input Note2)
out- out- input flag area area
clear
put put
output
Y4 or DT90348 DT90350 1CH:
CH0 Y0 Y1 X4 R911C
High- Y8 Note1) DT90349 DT90351 100kHz
speed Y5 or DT90352 DT90354 2CH:
CH1 Y2 Y3 X5 R911D
Indepen- Y9 Note1) DT90353 DT90355 100kHz
dence DT90356 DT90358 1CH:
CH2 Y4 Y5 None X6 R911E
Medium- DT90357 DT90359 20kHz
speed DT90360 DT90362 2CH:
CH3 Y6 Y7 None X7 R911F
DT90052 DT90361 DT90363 20kHz
Y4 or <bit4> DT90348 DT90350
High- X axis Y0 Y1 X4 R911C Composite
Y8 Note1) DT90349 DT90351
speed speed
Y5 or DT90352 DT90354
CH0 Y axis Y2 Y3 X5 R911D 100kHz
Linear Y9 Note1) DT90353 DT90355
interpolation DT90356 DT90358
Medium- X axis Y4 Y5 None X6 R911E Composite
DT90357 DT90359
speed speed
DT90360 DT90362
CH2 Y axis Y6 Y7 None X7 R911F 20kHz
DT90361 DT90363
Related instructions
F0 (MV) :high-speed counter control
F1 (DMV) :Read/write of elapsed value of high-speed counter
F171 (SPDH) :trapezoidal control/home return
F172 (PLSH) :JOG operation
F174 (SP0H) :Data table control
F175 (SPSH) :Linear interpolation control
Note1) For C14, Y4 or Y5. For C30/C60, Y8 or Y9.
Note2) These values are available only when the conditions of each item (such as output method or No.
of channels) are executed.
These values are not available if executing the HSC match ON/OFF instruction, other pulse I/O
process simultaneously or executing the interrupt program.
PWM output function

PWM output when using CPU output
High-speed Output Memory area
Output frequency
counter contact used Related instructions
(duty)
channel No. No. used Control flag
-When resolution = 1000, F0(MV) (High-speed counter
CH0 Y0 R911C 1.5 Hz to 12.5 kHz control)
(0.0 to 99.9%) F1(DMV) (Read/write of
-When resolution = 100, elapsed value of high-speed
CH1 Y2 R911D 15.6 kHz to 41.7 kHz counter)
(0 to 99%) F173(PWMH) (PWM output)
CH2 Y4 R911E 1.5 Hz to 12.5 kHz control)
CH3 Y6 R911F 15.6 kHz only counter)
9-5

9.2.2 Functions Used and Restrictions
Simplified chart - Maximum counting speed of High-speed counter
The maximum counting speed of the high-speed counter varies according to No. of channels to be used
or the simultaneous use of the pulse output function. Use the chart below as a guide.
Max. counting speed
(Frequency kHz)
Combination with pulse output function
Combination of high-speed counter No pulse output
2-phase 2-phase Single- Single- 2-

Single-phase high- Single-phase medium- 2-phase
high- medium- phase phase phase
speed channels speed channels medium
speed speed high- medium- high-
-speed
CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH0 CH2 CH4 CH6 speed speed speed
A 100
A A 80
A A A 60
A A A A 50
A 10
A A 10
A A A 10
A A A A 10
A A 100 10
A A A 100 10
A A A A 100 10
A A A A A 100 10
A A A 75 10
A A A A 75 10
A A A A A 75 10
A A A A A A 75 10
A A A A 60 10
A A A A A 60 10
A A A A A A 60 10
A A A A A A A 60 10
A A A A A 50 10
A A A A A A 50 10
A A A A A A A 50 10
A A A A A A A A 50 10
A 35
A A 25
A 5
A A 5
A A 30 5
A A A 30 5
A A A 20 5
A A A A 20 5
A A A A A 10 35
A A A A A A 10 25
A A 100 5
A A A 75 5
A A A A 60 5
A A A A A 50 5
A A A 100 5
A A A A 75 5
A A A A A 60 5
A A A A A A 50 5
Note) The maximum counting speed may be lower than the above-mentioned values when the HSC
target value match ON/OFF instruction and other interrupt programs are executed
simultaneously.
9-6

Max. counting speed
(Frequency kHz)
Combination with pulse output function
Pulse output 2 CH Pulse output 4 CH
Pulse output 1 CH Pulse output 3 CH
(1-axis interpolation) (2-axis interpolation)
Single- Single- 2- Single- Single- 2- Single- Single- 2- Single- Single- 2-
2-phase 2-phase 2-phase 2-phase
phase phase phase phase phase phase phase phase phase phase phase phase
medium- medium- medium- medium-
high- medium- high- high- medium- high- high- medium- high- high- medium- high-
speed speed speed speed
speed speed speed speed speed speed speed speed speed speed speed speed
65 45 40 35
55 40 35 30
45 35 30 25
40 30 25 25
10 10 10 10
10 10 10 10
10 10 10 10
10 10 10 10
65 10 45 10 45 10 35 10
65 10 45 10 45 10 35 10
65 10 45 10 45 10 35 10
65 10 45 10 45 10 35 10
55 10 40 10 35 10 30 10
55 10 40 10 35 10 30 10
55 10 40 10 35 10 30 10
55 10 40 10 35 10 30 10
45 10 35 10 30 10 25 10
45 10 35 10 30 10 25 10
45 10 35 10 30 10 25 10
45 10 35 10 30 10 25 10
40 10 30 10 25 10 25 10
40 10 30 10 25 10 25 10
40 10 30 10 25 10 25 10
40 10 30 10 25 10 25 10
25 20 15 15
20 15 15 14
5 5 5 5
5 5 5 5
25 5 20 5 15 5 15 5
25 5 20 5 15 5 15 5
15 5 15 5 15 5 10 5
15 5 15 5 15 5 10 5
10 25 10 20 10 15 10 15
10 20 10 15 10 15 10 14
65 5 45 5 40 5 35 5
55 5 40 5 35 5 30 5
45 5 35 5 30 5 25 5
40 5 30 5 25 5 25 5
65 5 45 5 40 5 35 5
55 5 40 5 35 5 29 5
45 5 35 5 30 5 25 5
40 5 30 5 25 5 25 5
Note) The maximum counting speed may be lower than the above-mentioned values when the HSC
target value match ON/OFF instruction and other interrupt programs are executed
simultaneously.
9-7

Pulse input/output performance
Independent control
High-speed Medium-speed Maximum output frequency kHz
CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 High-speed CH Medium-speed CH
Available 100
Available Available 100
Available Available Available 100 20
Available Available Available Available 100 20
Note) Even if all channels are used, they can be used within the ranges above.
Interpolation control
Maximum output frequency kHz
High-speed Medium-speed
(Composite speed)
CH0 CH2 High-speed CH Medium-speed CH
Available 100
Available Available 100 20
Note) Even if all channels are used for the interpolation function, they can be used within the ranges
above.
9-8

Restrictions on I/O allocations
• Various functions listed in the table of specifications cannot be allocated to one I/O at the same time.
Allocations of input X and restrictions when using the high-speed counter function
When using the high-speed counter, it is necessary to set how to use the input by system registers.
C14/C30/C60 Tr type
Pulse High-speed Medium-speed
Signal CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7
Single-phase input X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7
2-phase input X0, X1 - X2, X3 - X4, X5 - X6, X7 -
Reset input X6 - X7 - - - - -
Note) The X4, X5, X6 and X7 are also used for the home input of the pulse output. Use them only for
either one signal.
Allocations of output Y and restrictions when using the pulse output function
When using the pulse output function, it is necessary to set how to use the input/output by system
registers.
C14 Tr type
Signal CH0 CH1 CH2
CW PULSE Y0 Y2 Y4
CCW SIGN Y1 Y3 Y5
Deviation counter clear output Y4 Y5 -
Home input X4 X5 X6
Note) The Y4 and Y5 of the medium-speed pulse are also used for the deviation counter clear signal.
The X4, X5 and X6 of the home input are also used for the input of the high-speed counter.
Use them only for either one signal.
Note:
• With the C14, if the home return is executed with the deviation counter clear for the pulse output CH0,
set the Y4 to the normal output by the system register.
• With the C14, if the home return is executed with the deviation counter clear for the pulse output CH1,
set the Y5 to the normal output by the system register.
• If the home return is executed, set the home input by the system register 401.
If the home return is executed without the setting, an operation error occurs.
C30/C60 Tr type
Signal CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3
CW PULSE Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6
CCW SIGN Y1 Y3 Y5 Y7
Deviation counter clear output Y8 Y9 - -
Home input X4 X5 X6 X7
Note) The X4, X5, X6 and X7 of the home input are also used for the input of the high-speed counter.
Use them only for either one signal.
Note:
• If the home return is executed, set the home input by the system register 401.
Restrictions on the execution of related instructions (F166 to F175)

• If an instruction related to the high-speed counter “F166 to F175” is executed, the control flag (special
internal relay: R9110 to R911D) corresponding to the channel used turns on.
• Please be aware that the control flag “in progress” may change while a scan is being carried out. To
prevent multiple read access to this special internal relay, it is recommended to generate a copy of it at
the beginning of the program.
• When the control flag for a channel turns on, another instruction using that same channel cannot be
executed.
9-9

9.2.3 Booting Time
The booting time is the time span from the execution of the instruction to the actual pulse output.
Type of instruction Booting time
CW/CCW is set : Approx. 200 µs (with 30 steps)
Pulse output instruction F171
Approx. 400 µs (with 60 steps)
(SPDH)
Note)
Pulse/direction is set :
Trapezoidal control/home return
Note)

CW/CCW is set : Approx. 20 µs
(PLSH)
Approx. 320 µs
Note)
JOG operation
(SP0H)
Approx. 330 µs
Note)
Data table control
PWM output instruction F173
Approx. 30 µs
(PWMH)
Note) If pulse/direction is set, a waiting time (approx. 300 µs) is included from the time that the direction
output goes on until the pulse output instruction can be executed.
9-10

9.3 High-speed Counter Function
9.3.1 Overview of High-speed Counter Function

• The high-speed counter function counts the input signals, and when the count reaches the target value,
turns on and off the desired output.
• To turn on an output when the target value is matched, use the target value match ON instruction F166
(HC1S). To turn off an output, use the target value match OFF instruction F167 (HC1R).
• Preset the output to be turned on and off with the SET/RET instruction.
Setting the system register

In order to use the high-speed counter function, it is necessary to set the system registers No. 400 and
401.
9.3.2 Input Modes and Count

Incremental input mode Decremental input mode
Two-phase input mode Individual input mode

(Incremental/decremental input mode)
Direction discrimination
9-11

Count for reset input
(Incremental input mode)
The reset input is executed by the interruption at (1) on (edge)

and (2) off (edge).
(1) on (edge) … Count disable, Elapsed value clear
(2) off (edge) … Count enable
DT90052 (bit2): “able/disable” setting of the input can be set
by the reset input.
9.3.3 Minimum Input Pulse Width

For the period T (1/frequency), a minimum input pulse width of T/2 (single-phase input) or T/4 (two-
phase input) is required.
<Single phase> <Two-phase>
9-12

• As shown in the table of specifications, the inputs and outputs used will differ depending on the
channel number being used.
• The output turned on and off can be specified with instructions F166 (HC1S) and F167 (HC1R) for
desired output (Yn:n<300).
When using CH0 of the high-speed counter When using CH0 of the high-speed counter
with incremental input and reset input with two-phase input and reset input
* The output turned on and off when the target * The output turned on and off when the target
value is reached can be specified as arbitrary value is reached can be specified as arbitrary
output of the main unit or add-on cassette. output of the main unit or add-on cassette.
Reference: <9.2.1 Table of Specifications> <9.2.2 Functions Used and Restrictions>
9.3.5 Instructions used with High-speed Counter Function

High-speed counter control instruction (F0)
• This instruction is used for counter operations such as software reset and count disable.
• Specify this instruction together with the special data register DT90052.
• Once this instruction is executed, the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again.
Operations that can be performed with this instruction

• Counter software reset (bit0)
• Counting operation enable/disable (bit1)
• Hardware reset enable/disable (bit2)
• Clear high-speed counter instructions F166 to F167
• Clear target value match interrupt
Example: Performing a software reset

In case of CH0 In case of CH1
In the above program, the reset is performed in step (1) and 0 is entered just after that in step (2). The
count is now ready for operation. If it is only reset, counting will not be performed.
9-13

High-speed counter/pulse output control flag area of FP-X Tr type
• The area DT90052 for writing channels

and control codes is allocated as shown in
the left figure.
• Control codes written with an F0 (MV)
instruction are stored by channel in
special data registers DT90370 to
DT90377.
Note)
• In the reset input setting, the reset input
(X6 or X7) for CH0 or CH2 allocated in the
high-speed counter setting of the system
registers are defined to “enable/disable”.
• The high-speed counter to be used with
the reset input is CH0 and CH2 only.
High-speed counter control code monitor area

High-speed counter Control code monitor area
Channel No. FP-X Ry type FP-X Tr type
ch0 DT90360 DT90370
ch1 DT90361 DT90371
ch2 DT90362 DT90372
ch3 DT90363 DT90373
ch4 DT90364 DT90374
ch5 DT90365 DT90375
ch6 DT90366 DT90376
ch7 DT90367 DT90377
ch8 DT90368 -
ch9 DT90369 -
chA DT90370 -
chB DT90371 -
Elapsed value write and read instruction (F1)

• This instruction changes or reads the elapsed value of the high-speed counter.
• The elapsed value is stored as 32-bit data in the combined area of special data registers DT90300 and
DT90301.
• Use this F1 (DMV) instruction to set the elapsed value.
Example 1: Writing the elapsed value

Set the initial value of K3000 in the high-speed
counter.
Example 2: Reading the elapsed value

Read the elapsed value of the high-speed
counter and copies it to DT100 and DT101.
9-14

Target value match ON instruction (F166)
Example 1:
If the elapsed value (DT90300 and DT90301)
for channel 0 matches K10000, output Y7 turns
on.
Example 2:
on.
Target value match OFF instruction (F167)

Example 1:
off.
Example 2:
off.
FP-X Tr type – Elapsed value and target value areas of high-speed counter ch0 to ch7
High-speed counter
Control flag Elapsed value area Target value area
Channel No.
ch0 R9110 DT90300 to DT90301 DT90302 to DT90303
9-15

9.3.6 Sample program (Control Unit and Main Unit I/O)
Positioning operations with a single speed inverter
Wiring example
Operation chart I/O allocation

I/O No. Description
Main X0 Encoder input
unit X5 Operation start signal
I/O Y0 Inverter operation signal
R100 Positioning operation running
R101 Positioning operation start
R102 Positioning done pulse
R9110 High-speed counter CH0 control flag
Program
When X5 is turned on, Y0 turns on and the conveyor begins moving. When the elapsed value (DT90300
and DT90301) reaches K5000, Y0 turns off and the conveyor stops.
9-16

Positioning operations with a double speed inverter
Wiring example

I/O No. Description
X0 Encoder input
Main
X5 Operation start signal
unit
Y0 Inverter operation signal
I/O
Y1 Inverter high-speed signal
R102 Arrival at deceleration point
R900C Comparison instruction <flag>
9-17

Program
When X5 is turned on, Y0 and Y1 turn on and the conveyor begins moving. When the elapsed value
(DT90300 and DT90301) reaches K4500, Y1 turns off and the conveyor begins decelerating. When the
elapsed value reaches K5000, Y0 turns off and the conveyor stops.
9-18

9.4 Pulse Output Function
9.4.1 Overview of Pulse Output Function

Instructions used and controls
Together with a commercially available pulse-string input type motor driver, the pulse output function can
be used for positioning control.
Exclusive
Type of control Description
instruction
Provides trapezoidal (table-shaped) control for automatically
Trapezoidal
F171 obtaining pulse outputs by specifying the initial speed, maximum
control
(SPDH) speed, acceleration/deceleration time and target value.
Home return Enables automatic home return operation.
Causes pulses to be output as long as the execution condition is
F172
JOG operation on. A target value can also be set, so that pulse output stops at
(PLSH)
the point when the target value is matched.
Data table F174
Enables positioning control in accordance with the data table.
control (SP0H)
Enables pulses to be output using linear interpolation control, by
Linear F175
specifying the composite speed, the acceleration/deceleration
interpolation (SPSH)
time, and the target value.
Note:
• With the Tr type, the CPU output is used to perform the pulse output function.
The pulse I/O cassette (AFPX-PLS) cannot be used.

When using the pulse output function, it is necessary to set the system register No. 402.
When performing the home return by F174 (SPDH) instruction, the home input should be specified in the
system register No. 401.
9-19

9.4.2 Types of Pulse Output Method and Operation Modes
Clockwise/counter-clockwise output method
Control is carried out using two
pulses: a forward rotation pulse and a
reverse rotation pulse.
Pulse/direction output method (forward: OFF/reverse: ON)

Control is carried out using one pulse
output to specify the speed and
another to specify the direction of
rotation with on/off signals. In this
mode, forward rotation is carried out
when the rotation direction signal is
OFF.
Pulse/direction output method (forward: ON/reverse: OFF)

ON.
Note:
The output signals are the number of the built-in output of the main unit.
When the pulse output has been set, only the pulse is output, and the values of the output memories Y0,
Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4 and Y5 are not output. So, they will not be turned on/off even if monitoring with the tool.
9-20

Operation mode
Incremental <Relative value control>
Outputs the pulses set with the target value.
Selected
Pulse and direction Pulse and direction
Mode HSC counting
CW/CCW forward OFF/ forward ON/
Target Method
reverse ON reverse OFF
value
Pulse output when Pulse output when
Pulse output
Positive direction output is direction output is Incremental
from CW
OFF ON
Pulse output
Negative direction output is direction output is Decremental
from CCW
ON OFF
Example:
When the current position (value of elapsed value area) is 5000, the pulse of 1000 is output from CW by
executing the pulse output instruction with the target value +1000, and the current position will be 6000.
Absolute <Absolute value control>

Outputs a number of pulses equal to the difference between the set target value and the current value.
Selected
Mode HSC counting
Target method
value
Target value Pulse output when Pulse output when
Pulse output
greater than direction output is direction output is Incremental
from CW
current value OFF ON
Pulse output
less than direction output is direction output is Decremental
from CCW
current value ON OFF
Example:
When the current position (value of elapsed value area) is 5000, the pulse of 4000 is output from CCW
by executing the pulse output instruction with the target value +1000, and the current position will be
1000.
Home return
• When executing the F171 (SPDH) instruction, the pulse is continuously output until the home input (X4,
X5, X6 or X7) is enabled (for the C14 Tr type, X4, X5 or X6).
• To decelerate the movement when near the home position, designate a near home input and set bit 4
of special data register DT90052 to off → on → off.
• The deviation counter clear output can be output when home return has been completed. (However,
the deviation counter clear output is available only for CH0 and CH1.)
JOG operation
• Pulses are output from the specified channel while the trigger for F172 (PLSH) instruction is in the ON
state. Also, the pulse output can be stopped when the specified target value is matched.
• The direction output and output frequency are specified by F172 (PLSH) instruction.
9-21

Precautions on programming
Address Flag conditions The uses of the flag in the program
Use this to prohibit the simultaneous
Turns on during execution of pulse output
R911C execution of other high-speed counter
instructions and then maintains that state
Control flag instructions and pulse output
during pulse output from CH0. This flag is
(CH0) instructions, and to verify completion
the same for instructions F166 to F175.
of an action.
R911D execution of other high-speed counter
of an action.
R911E execution of other high-speed counter
of an action.
R911F execution of other high-speed counter
of an action.
Note:
• The above flags vary during scanning.
Example: If the above flags are used for more than one time as input conditions, there may be the
different states in the same scan. Replace with internal relays at the beginning of the program as a
measure.
9-22

Double pulse input driver
(CW pulse input and CCW pulse input method)
• Two output contacts are used as a pulse output for “CW, CCW”.
• The I/O allocation of pulse output terminal and home input is determined by the channel used.
• Set the control code for F171 (SPDH) instruction to “CW/CCW”.
<When using CH0> <When using CH1>
* Input that is not used for other applications is * Input that is not used for other applications is
specified for the near home input. specified for the near home input.
Note) If the deviation counter clear output Note) If the deviation counter clear output
function is performed when the home function is performed when the home
return is done, Y4 is used for the C14 Tr return is done, Y5 is used for the C14 Tr
type, and Y8 is used for the C30/C60 Tr type, and Y9 is used for the C30/C60 Tr
type. type.
<When using CH2> <When using CH3> (C30, C60 Tr type only)
Note) The deviation counter clear output function is not available for the CH2 and CH3.
9-23

Single pulse input driver
(pulse input and directional switching input method)
• One output point is used as a pulse output and the other output is used as a direction output.
• The I/O allocation of pulse output terminal, direction output terminal, and home input is determined by
the channel used.
• Near home input is substituted by allocating the desired contact and turning on and off the <bit4> of
special data register DT90052.
Note) If the deviation counter clear output Note) If the deviation counter clear output
function is performed when the home function is performed when the home
return is done, Y4 is used for the C14 Tr return is done, Y5 is used for the C14 Tr
type, and Y8 is used for the C30/C60 Tr type, and Y9 is used for the C30/C60 Tr
type. type.
<When using CH2> <When using CH3> (C30, C60 Tr type only)
Note) The deviation counter clear output function is not available for the CH2 and CH3.
9-24

9.4.4 Pulse output control instructions (F0) (F1)
Pulse output control instruction (F0)
• This instruction is used for resetting the built-in high-speed counter, stopping the pulse output, and
setting and resetting the near home input.
• Specify this F0 (MV) instruction together with special data register DT90052.
Example 1:
Enable the near home input during home return operations and begin deceleration.
In case of CH0
In these programs, the near home input is

enabled in step (1) and 0 is entered just after
In case of CH1 that in step (2) to perform the preset operations.
Example 2:
Performing a forced stop of the pulse output.
In case of CH0
The output counting value of the elapsed value

area may be different from the input counting
value of the motor side if the forced stop is
executed by these programs.
In case of CH1
9-25

Key Point: High-speed counter/pulse output control flag area of FP-X Tr type
• The area DT90052 for writing channels and
control codes is allocated as shown in the left
figure.
instruction are stored by channel in special
data register DT90380 to DT90383.
Note) The output counting value of the elapsed
value area may be different from the
input counting value of the motor side if
the pulse output is stopped by the
“Continue/stop of pulse output”. After the
pulse output stops, execute the home
return.
Pulse output control code monitor area

ch0 DT90372 DT90380
ch1 DT90373 DT90381
ch2 - DT90382
ch3 - DT90383
Reference: <9.2.1 Table of specifications> for information on the special data register.

• This instruction is used to read the pulse number counted by the pulse output control.
• Specify this F1 (DMV) instruction together with the special data register DT90348.
• The elapsed value is stored as 32-bit data in the combined area of special data register DT90348 and
DT90349.
• Use only this F1 (DMV) instruction to set the elapsed value.
Example 1:
Writing the elapsed value
Set the initial value of K3000 in the pulse output
CH0.
Reading the elapsed value

Reads the elapsed value of the pulse output
CH0 to DT100 and DT101.
FP-X Tr type - Elapsed value and target value areas of pulse output ch0 to ch3
Pulse output
Channel No.
ch0 R911C DT90348 to DT90349 DT90350 to DT90351
ch1 R911D DT90352 to DT90353 DT90354 to DT90355
ch2 R911E DT90356 to DT90357 DT90358 to DT90359
ch3 R911F DT90360 to DT90361 DT90362 to DT90363
9-26

9.4.5 Wiring for Pulse Output Sample Program (F171 to F174)
Wiring example
Note) When the stepping motor input is a 5 V optical coupler type, connect a 2 kΩ (1/2 W) resistor with
the R1 and a 2 kΩ (1/2 W) to 470 Ω (2 W) resistor with the R2.
Table of I/O allocation

I/O No. Description I/O No. Description
X0 Positioning start signal (+) X7 JOG start signal (-)
X1 Positioning start signal (-) Y0 Pulse output CW
X2 Home return start signal Y1 Pulse output CCW
X3 Overrunning signal R10 Positioning in progress
X4 Home sensor R11 Positioning operation start
X5 Near home sensor R12 Positioning done pulse
X6 JOG start signal (+) R911C High-speed counter control flag for CH0
9-27

9.4.6 Positioning Control Instruction F171 - Trapezoidal
• This instruction automatically performs trapezoidal control according to the specified data table.
9-28

9-29

Sample program
Incremental Position Control Operation: Plus Direction
When X0 turns on, the pulse is output from CW output Y0 of the specified channel CH0.
Note) In that case, the memory Y0 does not turn on/off according to the pulse output, and also the
monitoring is not possible.
Program
Pulse output diagram
9-30

Incremental Position Control Operation: Minus Direction
When X1 turns on, the pulse is output from CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CH0.
Note) In that case, the memory Y1 does not turn on/off according to the pulse output.
Program
9-31

Absolute position control operation
When X1 is turned on, pulses are output from CW output Y0 or CCW output Y1 of the specified channel
CH0. If the current value at that point is larger than 22000, the pulses are output from Y1, and if the
value is smaller than 22000, the pulses are output from Y0.
Note) In that case, the memory Y0 or Y1 does not turn on/off according to the pulse output, and also the
Program
9-32

9.4.7 Positioning Control Instruction F171 – Home Return (Common to
Transistor type)
• This function performs home return according to the specified data table. The elapsed value area CH0
(DT90348, DT90349) and CH1 (DT90352, DT90353) is cleared to zero after the completion of home
return.
Note) If the home return is executed, set the home input by the system register 401.
9-33

9-34

Home return operation modes
There are two operation modes for a home return with the FP-X: Type I and Type II.
Type I home return

The home input is effective regardless of whether or not here is a near home input, whether deceleration
is taking place, or whether deceleration has been completed.
Type II home return

In this mode, the home input is effective only after deceleration (started by near home input) has been
completed.
Reference:
The pulse output control instruction (F0) is used for the near home input.
<9.4.4 Pulse output control instructions (F0) (F1)>.
9-35

Sample program
Home return operation using CH0: Minus direction
When X2 turns on, a pulse is output from CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CH0 and the return to
home begins. When X5 turns on, deceleration begins, and when X4 turns on, home return is completed.
After the return to home is completed, the elapsed value areas DT90348 and DT90349 are cleared to 0.
Program
9-36

Sample program
Home return operation using CH1: Plus direction
When X3 turns on, a pulse is output from CW output Y2 of the specified channel CH1 and the return to
home begins. When X6 turns on, deceleration begins, and when X5 turns on, home return is completed.
Program
9-37

9.4.8 Pulse Output Instruction F172 – JOG operation
• This instruction is used for JOG operation by obtaining a pulse from the desired output when the
execution condition (trigger) turns on.
9-38

Key Point:
The FP-X supports two operation modes for JOG operation, one in which no target value is specified,
and one in which feed stops when the target value is reached.
Normal jogging operation feed (no target value specified)

Pulses are output in accordance with the conditions set in the data table, as long as execution condition
is on.
Output stops when target value is reached

A target value at which pulse output stops can be specified for jogging operation. As shown below, this
mode is selected in the control code, and the target value (an absolute value) is specified in the data
table.
9-39

Sample program
JOG operation : Plus direction
While X6 is in the ON state, a pulse is output from the CW output Y0 of the specified channel CH0.
Program
9-40

JOG operation : Minus direction
While X7 is in the ON state, a pulse is output from the CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CH0.
Program
Reference:
The pulse output control instruction (F0) is used for the pulse output stop.
<9.4.4 Pulse output control instruction (F0) (F1)>
9-41

9.4.9 Positioning Control Instruction F174 – Data Table Control
• Positioning is performed according to the specified data table.
9-42

9-43

9.4.10 Pulse Output Instruction F175 – Linear Interpolation
• The linear interpolation controls positioning with two axes according to the specified data table.
Note:
The linear interpolation function can be used in the combination of (ch0 and ch1) or (ch2 and ch3).
9-44

9-45

Sample program of interpolation control
Wiring example

I/O No. Description
X0 Home return start signal
X1 Positioning start
X2 Emergency stop
X6 Near home sensor
X4 Home sensor
CH0
Y0 Pulse output CW
Y1 Pulse output CCW
X7 Near home sensor
X5 Home sensor
CH1
Y2 Pulse output CW
Y3 Pulse output CCW
9-46

Restrictions on positioning data setting
• Designate settings for the target position and moving amount so they are within the following range.
Allowable range: -8,388,608 to +8,388,608
• When using in combination with other positioning instructions like F171, designate so the target value
is within the above range, even in those instructions.
Sample program
Continuous interpolation control
• Using the linear interpolation function, perform positioning control that draws trajectory like the one
shown below.
Relay allocation
Relay No. Description Relay No. Description
X1 Positioning start R9010 Always ON
X2 Emergency stop switch R911C Pulse output flag (CH0)
R20 From P1 to P2 start R911D Pulse output flag (CH1)
R21 From P2 to P3 start
R2F Positioning done
Data register allocation

Data register
Item Details On this program details
No.
Control code when executing linear interpolation,
DT0 to DT1 Control code
absolute
DT2 to DT3 Startup speed 2000 Hz
User setting DT4 to DT5 Target speed 2000 Hz
area for Acceleration/de-
DT6 0 ms
linear celeration time
interpolation Target position Specify the target position of X-axis when moving
DT8 to DT9
(X-axis) from P1 → P2 → P3 → P4 → P1.
Target position Specify the target position of Y-axis when moving
DT10 to DT11
(Y-axis) from P1 → P2 → P3 → P4 → P1.
Operation result Parameters calculated due to instruction
Work area DT12 to DT23
storage area execution are stored.
9-47

Program
9-48

Home return operation (Minus direction)
When X0 turns on, the pulse is output from CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CH0 and CCW
output Y3 of the specified channel CH1, and the return to home begins.
In CH0, when X6 turns on, deceleration begins, and when X4 turns on, home return is completed. After
the return to home is completed, the elapsed value areas DT90348 and DT90349 are cleared to 0.
In CH1, when X7 turns on, deceleration begins, and when X5 turns on, home return is completed. After
the return to home is completed, the elapsed value areas DT90352 and DT90353 are cleared to 0.
When the operations in both CHs is completed, the return to home completes.
9-49

Program
Key Point:
As there is not interpolation function for the home return, the home return should be executed for each
channel. After the home return for both channels is completed, the positioning operation running
program (R40) turns off.
9-50

9.5 PWM Output Function (Pulse I/O Cassette)
9.5.1 Overview of PWM Output Function

PWM output function
With the F173 (PWMH) instruction, the pulse width modulation output of the specified duty ratio is
obtained.

When using the PWM output function, set the channel corresponding to the system register 402 to
“PWM output”.
Note:
The pulse I/O cassette (AFPX-PLS) cannot be used with the FP-X Tr type.
9.5.2 Instruction to be Used for PWM Output Function

PWM Output Instruction F173
Data table
DT100 Control code *1 : K1
DT101 Duty *2 : 50%
*1: Specify the control code by setting the K constant.
Resolution of 1000 Resolution of 100
K Frequency (Hz) Period (ms) K Frequency (Hz) Period (ms)
K0 1.5 666.67 K20 15.6 k 0.06
K1 2.0 502.51 K21 20.8 k 0.05
K2 4.1 245.70 K22 25.0 k 0.04
K3 6.1 163.93 K23 31.3 k 0.03
K4 8.1 122.85 K24 41.7 k 0.02
K5 9.8 102.35
K6 19.5 51.20 However, for the medium-speed channel
K7 48.8 20.48 CH2 and CH3 of the Tr type, it is not possible
K8 97.7 10.24 to specify from K21 to k24.
K9 201.6 4.96
K10 403.2 2.48
K11 500.0 2.00
K12 694.4 1.44
K13 1.0 k 0.96
K14 1.3 k 0.80
K15 1.6 k 0.64
K16 2.1 k 0.48
K17 3.1 k 0.32
K18 6.3 k 0.16
K19 12.5 k 0.08
9-51

*2: specification of duty (specify using K constant)
If the control code is K0 to K19, the duty is K0 to K999 (0.0% to 99.9%).
If the control code is K20 to K24, the duty is K0 to K990 (0% to 99%).
Values are specified in units of 1% (K10) (digits behind the decimal point are rounded off).
Note:
• If a value outside the specified range is written to the duty area while the instruction is being executed,
a frequency corrected to the maximum value is output. If written when instruction execution is started,
an operation error is occurred.
9-52

Chapter 10
High-speed counter, Pulse Output and
PWM Output functions
(For Ry Type)

10.1 Overview of Each Functions
Describes the functions of the relay type (Ry type) FP-X control unit.
10.1.1 Usable Units and Cassettes

1. The pulse input can be counted using the inputs X0 to X7 of the main unit (Single-phase 8 channels,
2-phase 4 channels)
2. The pulse input can be counted (high-speed counter) or the pulse output and PWM output can be
carried out using the pulse I/O cassette (AFPX-PLS).
Single-phase 2-channel or 2-phase 1-channel pulse count can be carried out for one pulse I/O
cassette (AFPX-PLS). Also, 1-ch pulse output is available.
Using the pulse I/O cassette enables the count of the faster pulse than the input of the main unit.
Restrictions on the pulse I/O functions of each control unit

C14 Ry C30 Ry C60 Ry
type type type
Input of main unit X0 to X7 A A A
Input and output of Cassette mounting part 1 A A A
Pulse I/O cassette (AFPX-PLS) Cassette mounting part 2 N/A A A
10.1.2 Three Pulse I/O Functions

There are three pulse I/O functions built into the FP-X Ry type
High-speed counter function (Control unit/Pulse I/O cassette)
The high-speed counter function counts external
inputs such as those from sensors or encoders.
When the count reaches the target value, this
function turns on/off the desired output.
Pulse output function (Pulse I/O cassette)

Combined with a commercially available motor
driver, the function enables positioning control.
With the exclusive instruction, you can perform
trapezoidal control, home return, and JOG
operation.
10-2

PWM output function (Pulse I/O cassette)
By using the exclusive instruction, the PWM output
function enables a pulse output of the desired duty
ratio.
10.1.3 Performance of Pulse I/O Function

Number of Channel
High-speed counter Pulse output
Single-phase 8 channels or
Built in Control unit None
2-phase 4 channels
Max. single-phase 4
When using C30/C60
Note1) channels and 2-phase 2 Max. 2 channels
Pulse I/O cassette
channels
(AFPX-PLS)
Note1) Single-phase 2 channels or
When using C14 1 channel
2-phase 1 channel
Note) When one unit is added for C14, and 2 units are added for C30 and C60.
Counting range
• K-2, 147, 483, 648 to K+2, 147, 483, 647 (Coded 32-bit binary)
• The built-in high-speed counter is a ring counter. Consequently, if the counted value exceeds the
maximum value, it returns to the minimum value. Similarly, if the counted value drops below the
minimum value, it goes back to the maximum value and continues counting from there.
Note:
When the linear interpolation instruction F175 is used, the value for the amount of travel should be set so
that it is within the range indicated below.
-8,388,608 to +8,388,607 (Coded 24-bit binary)
10-3

10.2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items
10.2.1 Specifications
High-speed counter function
High-speed counter by the input of the main unit
Memory area being used Performance specifications
Maximum
Channel No. Input contact Control Elapsed Target Minimum input
counting
flag value area value area pulse width Note1)
speed Note2)
DT90300 DT90302
CH0 X0 R9110
DT90301 DT90303
DT90304 DT90306
CH1 X1 R9111
DT90305 DT90307
DT90308 DT90310
CH2 X2 R9112
DT90309 DT90311
DT90312 DT90314
[Single phase] CH3 X3 R9113
DT90313 DT90315
Incremental, 50 µs 10 kHz
DT90316 DT90318
Decremental CH4 X4 R9114
DT90317 DT90319
DT90320 DT90322
CH5 X5 R9115
DT90321 DT90323
DT90324 DT90326
CH6 X6 R9116
DT90325 DT90327
DT90328 DT90330
CH7 X7 R9117
DT90329 DT90331
X0 DT90300 DT90302
CH0 R9110
X1 DT90301 DT90303
[2-phase] X2 DT90308 DT90310
CH2 R9112
X3 DT90309 DT90311
2-phase input 100 µs 5 kHz
X4 DT90316 DT90318
One input CH4 R9114
X5 DT90317 DT90319
X6 DT90324 DT90326
CH6 R9116
X7 DT90325 DT90327
Note1) Reference: For information on minimum input pulse width,

<10.3.3 Minimum Input Pulse Width>.
Note2) When using the high-speed counter of the main unit only
10-4

High-speed counter when using pulse I/O cassette (AFPX-PLS)
Memory area being used Performance specifications
Input Elapsed Target Minimum
Channel No. Control Maximum
contact value value input pulse
Note1) flag Note2) counting speed
area area width
X100 DT90332 DT90334
CH8 R9118
(X102) DT90333 DT90335
X101 DT90336 DT90338 Single-phase 2
[Single phase] CH9 R9119
(X102) DT90337 DT90339 6.25 µs channels: 80 kHz
Incremental,
Decremental
CHA X200 DT90340 DT90342 (100 µs) Single-phase 4
Note4) R911A channels: 50 kHz
(X202) DT90341 DT90343
CHB X201 DT90344 DT90346
Note4) R911B
(X202) DT90345 DT90347
X100
[2-phase] DT90332 DT90334
CH8 X101 R9118 2-phase 1
2-phase input DT90333 DT90335
(X102) 16.7 µs channel: 30 kHz
One input
X200 (100 µs) 2-phase 2
Direction CHA DT90340 DT90342 channels: 25 kHz
Note4) X201 R911A
distinction DT90341 DT90343
(X202)
Note1) The values in parentheses are for the reset input. The reset input X102 can be set to either CH8
or CH9. The reset input X202 can be set to either CHA or CHB.
Note2) Reference: For information on minimum input pulse width,
<10.3.3 Minimum Input Pulse Width>.
Note3) When using the AFPX-PLS only
Note4) CHA/CHB can be used when 2 units of AFPX-PLS are installed.
10-5

Pulse output function
Pulse output when using pulse I/O cassette (AFPX-PLS)
Input/output contact number used Memory area used
CCW Devi-
High-speed CW Near
or ation Elapsed Target
counter channel or Home home Control
dire- counter value value
No. pulse input input flag
ction clear Note3) area area
output
output output
DT90052 DT90348 DT90350

CH0 Y100 Y101 Y102 X102 R911C
<bit4> DT90349 DT90351
Indepen-
dence
DT90052 DT90352 DT90354
CH1 Y200 Y201 Y202 X202 R911D
<bit4> DT90353 DT90355
DT90348 DT90350
Y102 X102
Inter- Y100 Y101 DT90052 R911C DT90349 DT90351
Linear Y202 X202
polation Y200 Y201 Note1) Note1) <bit4> R911D DT90352 DT90354
DT90353 DT90355
Max. output frequency Note3)
- Using one ch: Max. 100 kHz
- Using two chs: Max. 80 kHz
Related instructions
F0 (MV) :high-speed counter control
F1 (DMV) :Read/write of elapsed value of high-speed counter
F171 (SPDH) :trapezoidal control/home return
F172 (PLSH) :JOG operation
F174 (SP0H) :Data table control
F175 (SPSH) :Linear interpolation control
Note1) The home return operation of the interpolation axes should be performed for every channel.
Note2) Reference: For DT90052, see <10.4.4 Pulse Output Control Instruction (F0) (F1)>.
Note3) When using the AFPX-PLS only
PWM output function

PWM output when using pulse I/O cassette (AFPX-PLS)
High- Memory area
speed Output used
Output frequency
counter contact No. Related instructions
(duty)
channel used Control flag
No.
CH0 Y100 R911C 1.5 Hz to 12.5 kHz control)
CH1 Y200 R911D 15.6 kHz to 41.7 kHz counter)
10-6

10.2.2 Functions Used and Restrictions
High-speed counter built in the control unit
2-phase Single-phase
No. of channels Max. frequency No. of channels Max. frequency
0 − 1 10 kHz
0 − 2 10 kHz
0 − 3 10 kHz
0 − 4 10 kHz
0 − 5 10 kHz
0 − 6 10 kHz
0 − 7 10 kHz
0 − 8 10 kHz
1 5 kHz 0 10 kHz
1 5 kHz 1 10 kHz
1 5 kHz 2 10 kHz
1 5 kHz 3 10 kHz
1 5 kHz 4 10 kHz
1 5 kHz 5 10 kHz
1 5 kHz 6 10 kHz
2 5 kHz 0 10 kHz
2 5 kHz 1 10 kHz
2 5 kHz 2 10 kHz
2 5 kHz 3 10 kHz
2 5 kHz 4 10 kHz
3 5 kHz 0 10 kHz
3 5 kHz 1 10 kHz
3 5 kHz 2 10 kHz
4 5 kHz 0 −
Pulse I/O set (AFPX-PLS) high-speed counter

2-phase Single-phase
No. of channels Max. frequency No. of channels Max. frequency
0 − 1 80 kHz
0 − 2 80 kHz
0 − 3 50 kHz
0 − 4 50 kHz
1 30 kHz 0 −
1 30 kHz 1 50 kHz
1 30 kHz 2 50 kHz
2 25 kHz 0 −
Conditions: When the duty is 50%, and the match on/off instruction is not used.
10-7

Restrictions on I/O allocations
• Various functions listed in the table of specifications cannot be allocated to one I/O at the same time.
• Except for the examples noted below, inputs and outputs that have been allocated to the various
functions cannot be allocated as normal inputs and outputs.
Exceptional cases (AFPX-PLS)

Example 1:
If no reset input is used in the high-speed counter function, X102 and X202 can be used as normal
inputs.
Example 2:
If no output is used to clear the differential counter in the pulse output function, Y102 and Y202 can be
used as normal outputs.
Restrictions on the execution of related instructions (F166 to F175)

• If an instruction related to the high-speed counter “F166 to F175” is executed, the control flag (special
internal relay: R9110 to R911D) corresponding to the channel used turns on.
• Please be aware that the control flag “in progress” may change while a scan is being carried out. To
prevent multiple read access to this special internal relay, you should generate a copy of it at the
beginning of the program.
• When the control flag for a channel turns on, another instruction using that same channel cannot be
executed.
10.2.3 Booting Time

The booting time is the time span from the execution of the instruction to the actual pulse output.
Type of instruction Booting time
CW/CCW is set : Approx. 200 µs (with 30 steps)
(SPDH)
Note)
Trapezoidal control/home return
Note)

(PLSH)
Approx. 320 µs
Note)
JOG operation
(SP0H)
Approx. 330 µs
Note)
Data table control
PWM output instruction F173
Approx. 30 µs
(PWMH)
Note) If pulse/direction is set, a waiting time (approx. 300 µs) is included from the time that the direction
output goes on until the pulse output instruction can be executed.
10-8

10.3 High-speed Counter Function
10.3.1 Overview of High-speed Counter Function

• The high-speed counter function counts the input signals, and when the count reaches the target value,
turns on and off the desired output.
• To turn on an output when the target value is matched, use the target value match ON instruction F166
(HC1S). To turn off an output, use the target value match OFF instruction F167 (HC1R).
• Preset the output to be turned on and off with the SET/RET instruction.

In order to use the high-speed counter function, it is necessary to set the system register No. 402 for the
input of the main unit, and the system registers No. 400 to 401 for the pulse I/O cassette.
10.3.2 Input Modes and Count

Incremental input mode Decremental input mode
Two-phase input mode Individual input mode: only for pulse I/O
cassette
(Incremental/decremental input mode)
Direction discrimination: only for pulse I/O cassette
10-9

Count for reset input: only for pulse I/O cassette
(Incremental input mode)
The reset input is executed by the interruption at (1) on (edge)

and (2) off (edge).
(1) on (edge) … Count disable, Elapsed value clear
(2) off (edge) … Count enable
DT90052 (bit2): “able/disable” setting of the input can be set
by the reset input.
10.3.3 Minimum Input Pulse Width

For the period T (1/frequency), a minimum input pulse width of T/2 (single-phase input) or T/4 (two-
phase input) is required.
<Single phase> <Two-phase>
10-10

• As shown in the table of specifications, the inputs and outputs used will differ depending on the
channel number being used.
• The output turned on and off can be specified with instructions F166 (HC1S) and F167 (HC1R) for
desired output relays (Yn:n<300).
When using CH8 of the pulse I/O cassette When using CH8 of the pulse I/O cassette
with incremental input and reset input with two-phase input and reset input
* The output turned on and off when the target * The output turned on and off when the target
value is reached can be specified as desired value is reached can be specified as desired
from the outputs of the main unit or add-on from the outputs of the main unit or add-on
cassette. cassette.
Reference: <10.2.1 Table of Specifications>
10.3.5 Instructions used with High-speed Counter Function

High-speed counter control instruction (F0)
• This instruction is used for counter operations such as software reset and count disable.
Operations that can be performed with this instruction

• Counter software reset (bit0)
• Counting operation enable/disable (bit1)
• Hardware reset enable/disable (bit2)
• Clear high-speed counter instructions F166 to F167
• Clear target value match interrupt
Example: Performing a software reset

In case of CH0 In case of CH1
In the above program, the reset is performed in step (1) and 0 is entered just after that in step (2). The
count is now ready for operation. If it is only reset, counting will not be performed.
10-11

High-speed counter/pulse output control flag area of FP-X Ry type
• The area DT90052 for writing channels

and control codes is allocated as shown in
the left figure.
instruction are stored by channel in
special data registers DT90360 to
DT90373.
Note) In the reset input setting, the reset

input (X102 or X202) allocated in the
high-speed counter setting of the
system registers are defined to
“enable/disable”.
High-speed counter control code monitor area

ch0 DT90360 DT90370
ch1 DT90361 DT90371
ch2 DT90362 DT90372
ch3 DT90363 DT90373
ch4 DT90364 DT90374
ch5 DT90365 DT90375
ch6 DT90366 DT90376
ch7 DT90367 DT90377
ch8 DT90368 -
ch9 DT90369 -
chA DT90370 -
chB DT90371 -

• This instruction changes or reads the elapsed value of the high-speed counter.
• The elapsed value is stored as 32-bit data in the combined area of special data registers DT90300 and
DT90301.
• Use this F1 (DMV) instruction to set the elapsed value.
Example 1: Writing the elapsed value

Set the initial value of K3000 in the high-speed
counter.
Example 2: Reading the elapsed value

Read the elapsed value of the high-speed
counter and copies it to DT100 and DT101.
10-12

Target value match ON instruction (F166)
Example 1:
on.
Example 2:
on.
Target value match OFF instruction (F167)

Example 1:
off.
Example 2:
off.
FP-X Ry type – Elapsed value and target value areas of high-speed counter ch0 to chB
High-speed counter
Channel No.
chA R911A DT90340 to DT90341 DT90342 to DT90343
chB R911B DT90344 to DT90345 DT90346 to DT90347
10-13

10.3.6 Sample program (Control Unit and Main Unit I/O)
Wiring example

I/O No. Description
Program
When X5 is turned on, Y0 turns on and the conveyor begins moving. When the elapsed value (DT90300
and DT90301) reaches K5000, Y0 turns off and the conveyor stops.
10-14

Wiring example

I/O No. Description
X0 Encoder input
Main
unit
I/O
10-15

Program
When X5 is turned on, Y0 and Y1 turn on and the conveyor begins moving. When the elapsed value
(DT90300 and DT90301) reaches K4500, Y1 turns off and the conveyor begins decelerating. When the
elapsed value reaches K5000, Y0 turns off and the conveyor stops.
10-16

10.3.7 Sample program (Pulse I/O Cassette)
Wiring example

I/O No. Description
Program
When X102 is turned on, Y100 turns on and the conveyor begins moving. When the elapsed value
(DT90332 and DT90333) reaches K5000, Y100 turns off and the conveyor stops.
10-17

Wiring example

I/O No. Description
X100 Encoder input
Main
unit
I/O
10-18

Program
When X102 is turned on, Y100 and Y101 turn on and the conveyor begins moving. When the elapsed
value (DT90332 and DT90333) reaches K4500, Y101 turns off and the conveyor begins decelerating.
When the elapsed value reaches K5000, Y100 turns off and the conveyor stops.
10-19

10.4 Pulse Output Function (Pulse I/O Cassette)
10.4.1 Overview of Pulse Output Function

Instructions used and controls
Together with a commercially available pulse-string input type motor driver, the pulse output function can
be used for positioning control.
Exclusive
Type of control instru- Description Usable cassette
ction
Provides trapezoidal (table-shaped)
control for automatically obtaining
pulse outputs by specifying the initial
Trapezoidal control
F171 speed, maximum speed,
(SPDH) acceleration/deceleration time and
target value.
Enables automatic home return
Home return
operation. AFPX-PLS
Causes pulses to be output as long
as the execution condition is on. A
F172
JOG operation target value can also be set, so that
(PLSH)
pulse output stops at the point when
the target value is matched.
F174 Enables positioning control in
Data table control
(SP0H) accordance with the data table.
Enables pulses to be output using
linear interpolation control, by
F175 Only when using 2
Linear interpolation specifying the composite speed, the
(SPSH) units of AFPX-PLS
acceleration/deceleration time, and
the target value.
Note:
• With the Ry type, the pulse I/O cassette (AFPX-PLS) is necessary to use the pulse I/O function.

When using the pulse output function, set the channels corresponding to system registers 400 and 401
to “Use output Y0 to 2 as pulse output” or “Use output Y0 as PWM output”.
10-20

10.4.2 Types of Pulse Output Method and Operation Modes
Clockwise/counter-clockwise output method
Control is carried out using two
pulses: a forward rotation pulse and a
reverse rotation pulse.
Pulse/direction output method (forward: OFF/reverse: ON)

OFF.
Pulse/direction output method (forward: ON/reverse: OFF)

ON.
Note:
The output signals are the numbers on the pulse I/O cassette.
When executing the pulse output, only pulses are output. The output memory Y100, Y200 and Y201is
not output.
10-21

Operation mode
Incremental <Relative value control>
Outputs the pulses set with the target value.
Selected
Mode HSC counting
Target Method
value
Pulse output
Positive direction output is direction output is Incremental
from CW
OFF ON
Pulse output
Negative direction output is direction output is Decremental
from CCW
ON OFF
Example:
When the current position (value of elapsed value area) is 5000, the pulse of 1000 is output from CW by
executing the pulse output instruction with the target value +1000, and the current position will be 6000.
Absolute <Absolute value control>

Outputs a number of pulses equal to the difference between the set target value and the current value.
Selected
Mode HSC counting
Target method
value
Pulse output
greater than direction output is direction output is Incremental
from CW
current value OFF ON
Pulse output
less than direction output is direction output is Decremental
from CCW
current value ON OFF
Example:
When the current position (value of elapsed value area) is 5000, the pulse of 4000 is output from CCW
by executing the pulse output instruction with the target value +1000, and the current position will be
1000.
Home return
• When executing the F171 (SPDH) instruction, the pulse is continuously output until the home input
(X102 or X202) is enabled.
• To decelerate the movement when near the home position, designate a near home input and set bit 4
of special data register DT90052 to off → on → off.
• The deviation counter clear output can be output when home return has been completed.
JOG operation
• Pulses are output from the specified channel while the trigger for F172 (PLSH) instruction is in the ON
state. Also, the pulse output can be stopped when the specified target value is matched.
• The direction output and output frequency are specified by F172 (PLSH) instruction.
10-22

Precautions on programming
Address Flag conditions The uses of the flag in the program
R911C execution of other high-speed counter
of an action.
R911D execution of other high-speed counter
of an action.
Note:
• The above flags vary during scanning.
Example: If the above flags are used for more than one time as input conditions, there may be the
different states in the same scan. Replace with internal relays at the beginning of the program as a
measure.
10-23

Double pulse input driver
(CW pulse input and CCW pulse input method)
• Two output contacts are used as a pulse output for “CW, CCW”.
• The I/O allocation of pulse output terminal and home input is determined by the channel used.
• Set the control code for F171 (SPDH) instruction to “CW/CCW”.
* Input such as X100 or X101 on the pulse I/O * Input such as X200 or X201 on the pulse I/O
cassette can be specified for the near home cassette can be specified for the near home
input. input.
Note) If there is no input remained on the pulse I/O cassette, the input of the main unit can be used.
Single pulse input driver

(pulse input and directional switching input method)
• One output point is used as a pulse output and the other output is used as a direction output.
• The I/O allocation of pulse output terminal, direction output terminal, and home input is determined by
the channel used.
• Near home input is substituted by allocating the desired contact and turning on and off the <bit4> of
special data register DT90052.
• Up to two driver systems can be connected.
* Input such as X100 or X101 on the pulse I/O * Input such as X200 or X201 on the pulse I/O
cassette can be specified for the near home cassette can be specified for the near home
input. input.
Reference: <10.2.1 Table of Specifications>
10-24

10.4.4 Pulse output control instructions (F0) (F1)
Pulse output control instruction (F0)
• This instruction is used for resetting the built-in high-speed counter, stopping the pulse output, and
setting and resetting the near home input.
• Specify this F0 (MV) instruction together with special data register DT90052.
Example 1:
Enable the near home input during home return operations and begin deceleration.
In case of CH0
In these programs, the near home input is

enabled in step (1) and 0 is entered just after
In case of CH1 that in step (2) to perform the preset operations.
Example 2:
Performing a forced stop of the pulse output.
In case of CH0
The output counting value of the elapsed value

area may be different from the input counting
value of the motor side if the forced stop is
executed by these programs.
In case of CH1
10-25

Key Point: High-speed counter/pulse output control flag area of FP-X Ry type
• The area DT90052 for writing channels and
control codes is allocated as shown in the left
figure.
instruction are stored by channel in special
data register DT90372 and DT90373.
Note) The output counting value of the elapsed
value area may be different from the input
counting value of the motor side if the
pulse output is stopped by the
“Continue/stop of pulse output”. After the
pulse output stops, execute the home
return.
Pulse output control code monitor area

ch0 DT90372 DT90380
ch1 DT90373 DT90381
ch2 - DT90382
ch3 - DT90383
Reference: <10.2.1 Table of specifications> for information on the special data register.

• This instruction is used to read the pulse number counted by the pulse output control.
• Specify this F1 (DMV) instruction together with the special data register DT90348.
• The elapsed value is stored as 32-bit data in the combined area of special data register DT90348 and
DT90349.
• Use only this F1 (DMV) instruction to set the elapsed value.
Example 1:
Writing the elapsed value
Set the initial value of K3000 in the pulse output
CH0.
Reading the elapsed value

Reads the elapsed value of the pulse output
CH0 to DT100 and DT101.
FP-X Ry type - Elapsed value and target value areas of pulse output ch0 to ch1
Pulse output
Channel No.
ch0 R911C DT90348 to DT90349 DT90350 to DT90351
ch1 R911D DT90352 to DT90353 DT90354 to DT90355
10-26

10.4.5 Wiring for Pulse Output Sample Program (F171 to F174)
Wiring example

I/O No. Description I/O No. Description
X0 Positioning start signal (+) X102 Home sensor input
X1 Positioning start signal (-) Y100 Pulse output CW
X2 Home return start signal Y101 Pulse output CCW
X3 JOG start signal (+) R10 Positioning in progress
X4 JOG start signal (-) R11 Positioning operation start
X5 Overrunning signal R12 Positioning done pulse
X100 Near home sensor input R911C High-speed counter control flag for CH0
10-27

10.4.6 Positioning Control Instruction F171 - Trapezoidal
• This instruction automatically performs trapezoidal control according to the specified data table.
10-28

10-29

Sample program
Incremental Position Control Operation: Plus Direction
When X0 turns on, the pulse is output from CW output Y100 of the specified channel CH0.
Note) In that case, the memory Y100 does not turn on/off according to the pulse output, and also the
Program
10-30

Incremental Position Control Operation: Minus Direction
When X1 turns on, the pulse is output from CCW output Y101 of the specified channel CH0.
Note) In that case, the memory Y101 does not turn on/off according to the pulse output.
Program
10-31

Absolute position control operation
When X1 is turned on, pulses are output from CW output Y100 or CCW output Y101 of the specified
channel CH0. If the current value at that point is larger than 22000, the pulses are output from Y101, and
if the value is smaller than 22000, the pulses are output from Y100.
Note) In that case, the memory Y100 or Y101 does not turn on/off according to the pulse output, and
also the monitoring is not possible.
Program
10-32

10.4.7 Positioning Control Instruction F171 – Home Return (Common to
Transistor type)
• This function performs home return according to the specified data table. The elapsed value area CH0
(DT90348, DT90349) and CH1 (DT90352, DT90353) is cleared to zero after the completion of home
return.
10-33

10-34

Home return operation modes
There are two operation modes for a home return with the FP-X: Type I and Type II.
Type I home return

The home input is effective regardless of whether or not here is a near home input, whether deceleration
is taking place, or whether deceleration has been completed.
Type II home return

In this mode, the home input is effective only after deceleration (started by near home input) has been
completed.
Reference:
The pulse output control instruction (F0) is used for the near home input.
<10.4.4 Pulse output control instructions (F0) (F1)>.
10-35

Sample program
Home return operation using CH0: Minus direction
When X2 turns on, a pulse is output from CCW output Y101 of the specified channel CH0 and the return
to home begins. When X100 turns on, deceleration begins, and when X102 turns on, home return is
completed. After the return to home is completed, the elapsed value areas DT90348 and DT90349 are
cleared to 0.
Program
10-36

Sample program
Home return operation using CH1: Plus direction
When X3 turns on, a pulse is output from CW output Y200 of the specified channel CH1 and the return
to home begins. When X200 turns on, deceleration begins, and when X202 turns on, home return is
completed. After the return to home is completed, the elapsed value areas DT90352 and DT90353 are
cleared to 0.
Program
10-37

10.4.8 Pulse Output Instruction F172 – JOG operation
• This instruction is used for JOG operation by obtaining a pulse from the desired output when the
execution condition (trigger) turns on.
10-38

Key Point:
The FP-X supports two operation modes for JOG operation, one in which no target value is specified,
and one in which feed stops when the target value is reached.
Normal jogging operation feed (no target value specified)

Pulses are output in accordance with the conditions set in the data table, as long as execution condition
is on.
Output stops when target value is reached

A target value at which pulse output stops can be specified for jogging operation. As shown below, this
mode is selected in the control code, and the target value (an absolute value) is specified in the data
table.
10-39

Sample program
JOG operation : Plus direction
While X3 is in the ON state, a pulse is output from the CW output Y100 of the specified channel CH0.
Program
10-40

JOG operation : Minus direction
While X4 is in the ON state, a pulse is output from the CCW output Y101 of the specified channel CH0.
Program
Reference:
The pulse output control instruction (F0) is used for the pulse output stop.
<10.4.4 Pulse output control instruction (F0) (F1)>
10-41

10.4.9 Positioning Control Instruction F174 – Data Table Control
• Positioning is performed according to the specified data table.
10-42

10-43

10.4.10 Pulse Output Instruction F175 – Linear Interpolation
• The linear interpolation controls positioning with two axes according to the specified data table.
Note:
The linear interpolation function can be used only when 2 units of the AFPX-PLS are being used.
10-44

10-45

Sample program of interpolation control
Wiring example

I/O No. Description
X0 Home return start signal
X1 Positioning start
X2 Emergency stop
X100 Near home sensor
X102 Home sensor
CH0
Y100 Pulse output CW
Y101 Pulse output CCW
X200 Near home sensor
X202 Home sensor
CH1
Y200 Pulse output CW
Y201 Pulse output CCW
10-46

Restrictions on positioning data setting
• Designate settings for the target position and moving amount so they are within the following range.
Allowable range: -8,388,608 to +8,388,608
• When using in combination with other positioning instructions like F171, designate so the target value
is within the above range, even in those instructions.
Sample program
Continuous interpolation control
• Using the linear interpolation function, perform positioning control that draws trajectory like the one
shown below.
Relay allocation
Relay No. Description Relay No. Description
X1 Positioning start R9010 Always ON
X2 Emergency stop switch R911C Pulse output flag (CH0)
R20 From P1 to P2 start R911D Pulse output flag (CH1)
R2F Positioning done
Data register allocation

Data register
Item Details On this program details
No.
Control code when executing linear interpolation,
DT0 to DT1 Control code
absolute
DT2 to DT3 Startup speed 2000 Hz
User setting DT4 to DT5 Target speed 2000 Hz
area for Acceleration/de-
DT6 0 ms
linear celeration time
interpolation Target position Specify the target position of X-axis when moving
DT8 to DT9
(X-axis) from P1 → P2 → P3 → P4 → P1.
Target position Specify the target position of Y-axis when moving
DT10 to DT11
(Y-axis) from P1 → P2 → P3 → P4 → P1.
Operation result Parameters calculated due to instruction
Work area DT12 to DT23
storage area execution are stored.
10-47

Program
10-48

Home return operation (Minus direction)
When X0 turns on, the pulse is output from CCW output Y101 of the specified channel CH0 and CCW
output Y201 of the specified channel CH1, and the return to home begins.
In CH0, when X100 turns on, deceleration begins, and when X102 turns on, home return is completed.
In CH1, when X200 turns on, deceleration begins, and when X202 turns on, home return is completed.
When the operations in both CHs is completed, the return to home completes.
10-49

Program
Key Point:
As there is not interpolation function for the home return, the home return should be executed for each
channel. After the home return for both channels is completed, the positioning operation running
program (R40) turns off.
10-50

10.5 PWM Output Function (Pulse I/O Cassette)
10.5.1 Overview of PWM Output Function

PWM output function
With the F173 (PWMH) instruction, the pulse width modulation output of the specified duty ratio is
obtained.

When using the PWM output function, set the channel CH0 and CH1 with system registers 400 and
401 to “Use output Y0 (Y3) as PWM output”.
Note:
With the FP-X Ry type, the pulse I/O cassette (AFPX-PLS) is necessary to use the pulse output function.
10.5.2 Instruction to be Used for PWM Output Function

PWM Output Instruction F173
Data table
DT100 Control code *1 : K1
DT101 Duty *2 : 50%
*1: Specify the control code by setting the K constant.
Resolution of 1000 Resolution of 100
K Frequency (Hz) Period (ms) K Frequency (Hz) Period (ms)
K0 1.5 666.67 K20 15.6 k 0.06
K1 2.0 502.51 K21 20.8 k 0.05
K2 4.1 245.70 K22 25.0 k 0.04
K3 6.1 163.93 K23 31.3 k 0.03
K4 8.1 122.85 K24 41.7 k 0.02
K5 9.8 102.35
K6 19.5 51.20
K7 48.8 20.48
K8 97.7 10.24
K9 201.6 4.96
K10 403.2 2.48
K11 500.0 2.00
K12 694.4 1.44
K13 1.0 k 0.96
K14 1.3 k 0.80
K15 1.6 k 0.64
K16 2.1 k 0.48
K17 3.1 k 0.32
K18 6.3 k 0.16
K19 12.5 k 0.08
10-51

*2: specification of duty (specify using K constant)
If the control code is K0 to K19, the duty is K0 to K999 (0.0% to 99.9%).
If the control code is K20 to K24, the duty is K0 to K990 (0% to 99%).
Values are specified in units of 1% (K10) (digits behind the decimal point are rounded off).
Note:
• If a value outside the specified range is written to the duty area while the instruction is being executed,
a frequency corrected to the maximum value is output. If written when instruction execution is started,
an operation error is occurred.
10-52

Chapter 11
Security Functions

11.1 Type of Security Functions
There are mainly three functions as the security function of the FP-X.
It is possible to rewrite data during any of these functions is being used.
1: Password protect function

It is used to restrict the access to the programs in the FP-X from the programming tool by setting
a password. Writing and reading ladder programs or system registers will be unperformable by
setting a password and setting to the protect mode.
There are two types of passwords as below.
• 4-digit password: 4 characters of 16 characters that are “0” to “9” and “A” to “F” can be used.
• 8-digit password: A maximum of 8 English one byte characters (case-sensitive) and symbols
can be used.
2: Upload protection
Ladder programs or system registers cannot be uploaded from the FP-X by setting that the
program is not uploaded. As transferring programs to the master memory cassette as well as the
programming tool will be unperformable, it ensures higher security.
3: Password protect function and upload protection for FP memory loader

Those functions are available only when using the FP-X V2.5 or later, FP memory loader V2.0 or
later and FPWIN GR V2.8 or later and when setting a 8-digit password.
Reference: <11.4 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader>
The state of the security can be checked at two displays of the programming tool FPWIN GR.
1. Select [Online Edit Mode] under the [Online] on the menu bar, or press the [CTRL] and [F2] keys at
the same time, to switch to the [Online] screen.
2. Select “Security information” or “Set PLC Password” under “Tool” on the menu bar.
The following displays will be shown.

Security information dialog box Set PLC Password dialog box
11-2

11.2 Password Protect Function
This function is used to prohibit reading and writing programs and system registers by setting a
password on the FP-X.
There are two ways to set a password as below.
1. Sets using the programming tool.
2. Sets using an instruction (SYS1 instruction).
Note: Precautions on the password setting

Do not forget your password. If you forget your password, you cannot read
programs. (Even if you ask us for your password, we cannot crack it.)
11.2.1 Password Setting

2. Select or “Set PLC Password” under “Tool” on the menu bar. The following display will be shown.
Security information dialog box

○
1 Indicates the current status of the password
setting.
○
2 Specify the type of the password to be used.
○
3 Specify an operation mode.
Access: Accesses programs by inputting a

password.
Protect: Sets a password.
Unprotect: Releases the password setting.
○
4 Input a password.
○
5 Optional setting for FP memory loader
Use the FP-X V2.5 or later and FPWIN GR

V2.8 or later, and set it to download to the FP
memory loader (Ver2.0 or later).
Confirmation the contents of the password setting

Confirm the settings indicated in the dialog box.
Current status
Indicates the current status of the password setting. There are following five statuses.
1. Password is not set : Password is not set.

2. 4 digits Protect : Password is 4-digit password, and access is prohibited.
3. 4 digits Available to access : Password is 4-digit password, and access is allowed.
(The status that inputting the password completes and that can access
programs.)
4. 8 digits Protect : Password is 8-digit password, and access is prohibited.
5. 8 digits Available to access : Password is 8-digit password, and access is allowed.
(The status that inputting the password completes and that can access
programs.)
11-3

Available retry counts
This is the number of times that you can input the password in succession. Every time incorrect
password is input, the number will decrease (up to 3 times).
If you fail to input the correct password for 3 times in succession, you cannot access the
program.
Turn the power supply of the FP-X off and then on again to try to input the password again.
Note:
If the power supply of the PLC is turned on/off with the setting that the access is allowed, the setting will
be that the PLC is protected again.
Setting the Password protect function

As the dialog box is shown, select as below.
Digit number:
Select “4 digits” or “8 digits”.
Operation Mode:
Select “Protect”.
4 digits (or 8 digits) password:

Input a password to be set.
Click “Settings”.
Input the password for confirmation again, and

click [OK].
The setting has completed.
11-4

Setting to allow the access to the program by inputting a password
Digit number:
Operation Mode:
Select “Access”.

Note:
If the power supply of the PLC is turned on/off with the setting that the access is allowed, the setting will
be that the PLC is protected again.
How to cancel the password setting

Following two methods are available to cancel the password setting.
Description Program
Unprotect Cancels the registered password to be specified. All programs are retained.
All programs are deleted.
Erases all programs and security information to
Force cancel (The upload protection setting is
cancel the setting forcibly.
also deleted.)
Releasing the protection of PLC (Programs are retained.)

Digit number:
Operation Mode:
Select “Unprotect”.

Click [OK].
Note) The protection cannot be released if the access is not allowed.

11-5

Executing the force cancel (Programs and security information are all deleted.)
Click [Force cancel].
Click [Yes].
If the current status is “Password is not set”, this

procedure has completed.
All programs and security information were
deleted.
About the password data of the master memory cassette (AFPX-MRTC)
The data on the password setting can be transferred to the master memory cassette together with the
programs from the FP-X.
The password information stored in the master memory cassette will be automatically transferred to
another control unit when it is installed, and the control unit will be protected.
The procedure of the transfer to the master memory is as below.
1. Turn off the power supply of the PLC, and set the RUN/PROG mode switch to the PROG mode. Install
the master memory cassette to transfer the program on the control unit.
2. 2. Turn on the power supply of the PLC, and transfer the program to the master memory cassette
using “Internal memory => Master memory” in the programming tool.
Reference:
For the information on the transmission to the master memory cassette,
<12.2.2 Master Memory Function>
11-6

11.3 Upload Protection
This function is to prohibit reading programs and system registers by setting to disable program
uploading on the FP-X.
If the FP-X is set to prohibit program uploading, note that the ladder programs and system registers will
be disabled to be uploaded after that.
However, editing the files that are controlled with a PC can be carried out online using the programming
tool. Note that the programs will be broken if the programs are not absolutely matched.
When using this function, store ladder programs as files without fail.
Unperformable operations on the FP-X set to prohibit uploading

1. Uploading ladder programs and system registers to PCs
2. Transferring programs to the master memory cassette and FP memory loader
The setting for this function can be cancelled using the programming tool, however, all ladder programs,
system registers and password information will be deleted when the setting is cancelled.
Note: When cancelling this setting forcibly:

All programs and security information will be deleted when the upload protection
setting is cancelled.
We cannot restore the deleted programs even if you ask us.
We cannot read the data of the control units that are set to prohibit uploading.
Keeping your programs is your responsibility.
Interaction with the password protect function

The password setting can be specified for the FP-X that this function is set at the same time.
Also, this function can be specified for the FP-X that a password is set.
11.3.1 Upload Protection Setting

Following two methods are available to set the upload protection.
1. Set in the control unit using the programming tool.

2. Specify the information on the upload protection in the master memory cassette, and set in the control
unit.

2. Select or “Upload settings” under “Tool” on the menu bar. The following display will be shown.
Select “Set that PLC cannot be uploaded”.
Click “Execute”.
11-7

Specifying the information on upload protection in the master memory cassette
Programs cannot be transferred from the FP-X prohibited uploading to the master memory
cassette.
The upload protection can be set to the master memory cassette from the FP-X that is not prohibited
uploading using the “Internal memory to Master memory” function of the programming tool.
At that time, if there is the information on the password protect, it will be transferred simultaneously.
If the master memory cassette that is prohibited uploading is installed on another FP-X, the information
on the settings will be transferred to the FP-X automatically, therefore, that FP-X will be prohibited
uploading as well.
Reference: For the information on the transmission to the master memory cassette,
<12.2.2 Master Memory Function>
Cancelling the upload protection using the programming tool

2. Select “Upload settings” under “Tool” on the menu bar.
The following displays will be shown.

Upload settings dialog box Set PLC Password dialog box
Select “Release the upload-protection by

compulsion”.
Click “Execute”.
Click “Force Cancel”.
Note:
1. If the setting for the upload protection is cancelled, all ladder programs, system registers and
password information will be deleted.
2. If “Force Cancel” is executed in the setting for PLC password, the setting for the upload protection will
be also cancelled.
Note: When cancelling this setting forcibly:

All programs and security information will be deleted when the upload protection
setting is cancelled.
We cannot restore the deleted programs even if you ask us.
We cannot read the data of the control units that are set to prohibit uploading.
Keeping your programs is your responsibility.
11-8

11.4 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader
The following three functions of the FP memory loader (AFP8670/AFP8671) can be set through the FP-X.
The setting will be effective when it is transferred to another FP-X after the upload to the FP
memory loader from the set FP-X.
Setting conditions
- FP-X V2.5 or later
- FP memory loader V2.0 or later
- FPWIN GR V2.8 or later
- 8-digit password is set.
11.4.1 Download Protection Setting to Previous Versions

(Allow the download to older than Version 2.5)
This is a function to disable the download from the FP-X V2.5 or later to the FP-X older than V2.5 for
enhanced security.
When setting the download to be enabled, the download can be performed regardless of the version of
FP-X, however, the limited distribution and upload protection settings cannot be used.
11.4.2 Limited Distribution Function

(Allow the download in case of same password)
When downloading a program from the memory loader, the program can be downloaded only when the
program stored in the memory loader matches the password set for the PLC with this function enabled.
Note: This function cannot be used when the setting to disable the download to the FP-X older
than V2.5 has not been made.
11-9

11.4.3 Upload Protection Setting Function
(Set that PLC cannot be uploaded)
If this function is valid, the PLC will be in the upload protection state by downloading a program to the
PLC from the FP memory loader.
Note: This function cannot be used when the setting to disable the download to the FP-X older
than V2.5 has not been made.
11-10

11.4.4 Version Check List
Version check list
State of target PLC to be written PLC Password 4 digits 8 digits 8 digits
version to Protected
Not set Protected Protected
Program in FP memory loader be written Note4)
V2.40
- No password
FP-X or older Note1)
or
All versions V2.50
- 4-digit or 8-digit password
or later Note1)
V2.40
- 8-digit password
or older
and
V2.50
- Download prohibition to old ver.
or later Note1) Note1) Note1)
- 8-digit password V2.40
and or older
- Download protection to old ver.
and V2.50
- Download permission only for or later Note1)
models with same password.
FP-X - 8-digit password V2.40
Ver2.50 or later and or older
V2.50
and
or later Note1) Note1) Note1) Note2)
- Upload protection
- 8-digit password V2.40
and or older
and
- Download permission only for V2.50
models with same password or later Note5) Note5) Note1)
and
- Upload protection
: Download possible : Download possible only for models with same password
: Download impossible -: No target model
Note1) Program downloading is not possible for FP memory loader Ver.1.*.
Note2) Upload protection cannot be set for FP memory loader Ver.1.*.
Note3) When downloading programs with 8-digit password, FP memory loader Ver.1.* will not enter
protection state after downloading finishes. To enter protection state, turn off the power and then
turn it on again.
Note4) The state that the setting has been made not to disable downloading to the old version on the
FP-X Ver.2.50 or later .
Note5) When transferring data from FP memory loader to PLC, program data cannot be transferred by
Ver. 2 or later, however, only the "Upload protection" setting is effective.
Status of PLC that program has been downloaded

downloading a program to the PLC from the FP memory loader, the password that has been already set
on the unit may be changed. Note the followings.
Status of FP memory loader Password setting for PLC after download

No password setting The password will be cleared.
4-digit password setting The password will be overwritten with a new 4-digit password.
8-digit password setting The password will be overwritten with a new 8-digit password.
8-digit password setting
The password will be overwritten with a new 8-digit password.
Limited distribution setting: Off
8-digit password setting The password will not change.
Limited distribution setting: On (The program itself will not be downloaded.)
11-11

11.4.5 Setting using FPWIN GR
2. Select or “Set PLC Password” under “Tool” on the menu bar. The following display will be shown.
1. Select "8 digits" for "Digit number".
2. Uncheck "Allow the download to older than

Version 2.5" in "Setting for FP memory
loader option".
3. Check the functions to be used of "Options

for FP memory loader".
- Limited distribution function

→ ”Allow the download in case of same
password”
- Enable the upload protection setting.

→ ”Set that PLC cannot be uploaded”
4. After setting the above check box, input a

8-digit password, and then click "Setting".
Note) This function is available only when the

version of FP-X is Ver2.5 or later and a
8-digit password has been set.
11-12

11.5 Table of Security Settings/Cancel
When setting the security on FP-X control unit
When the master memory cassette is not installed on the FP-X control unit
Status of security
Security not Upload 4-digit 8-digit
set protection password password
Upload protection A A A
Sets/
4-digit password A A N/A
Cancels
8-digit password A A N/A
When the master memory cassette is installed on the FP-X control unit
Status of security
Security not Upload 4-digit 8-digit
set protection password password
Upload protection N/A N/A N/A
Sets/
4-digit password N/A N/A N/A
Cancels
8-digit password N/A N/A N/A
11-13

11-14

Chapter 12
Other Functions

12.1 Transfer Function between Memories
Flow of program information
RAM to ROM transfer function

All points of the contents of the DT in the internal RAM are transferred to the internal F-ROM data area.
This function is used to transfer large volumes of the default data to be used on the DT. The necessary
data is read from the internal F-ROM area to be used for ladder programs. This function is only available
by using the programming tool software in the PROG mode. In this case, data can be transferred in both
cases when the master memory cassette is installed, and it is not installed.
ROM to RAM transfer function
All points of the contents of the F-ROM data area stored in the internal ROM are read to the operation
memory DT. This function is only available by using the programming tool software in the PROG mode.
In this case, data can be transferred in both cases when the master memory cassette is installed, and it
is not installed.
Internal memory to Master memory transfer function
The program information (such as ladder programs, system registers, F-ROM data, comments and
passwords) stored in the internal ROM is transferred to the master memory. The upload disabled
information is specified using the programming tool software.
It is selectable to transfer the F-ROM data area and comments with the programming software or not.
When transferring the F-ROM data area, specify the block number that starts transferring and the
number of blocks. This function is only available by using the programming tool software in the PROG
mode.
When data is transferred to the master memory, the data not to be transferred will be erased.
Master memory to Internal memory transfer function
The information stored in the master memory is transferred to the internal ROM when the PROG mode is
changed to the RUN mode, when the power supply is turned on in the RUN mode, or when the transfer
instruction is executed by then programming tool software in the PROG. mode.
Nonexistent data is not transferred.
Once the data is transferred, afterwards, the information in the internal memory and the master memory
are compared, and the matched information is not transferred.
Key Point: Selectable using FPWIN GR

(Select from [Tool] of the menu in the PROG mode or online monitor mode.)
Reference: <FPWIN GR Operation Guide Book ARCT1F332E>

12-2

12.2 Function of Master Memory Cassette
The clock/calendar to set year, month, day, day of week and time, and the master memory is
equipped in the master memory cassette.
The following 2 methods can be selected with the switch at the back.
1. Clock/calendar only (default setting)

2. Clock/calendar + Master memory
Note:
It cannot be used as master memory when it has been specified to be used as clock/calendar
only.
Install the optional battery in the control unit to use the clock/calendar.
The clock/calendar does not work without the battery.
12.2.1 Clock/Calendar Function

The clock/calendar function can be used if the backup battery is attached in the FP-X and the FP-X
master memory cassette (AFPX-MRTC) is installed.
Note that this function cannot be used without the backup battery.
Reference: <5.9 Installation and Setting of Backup Battery>
Specifications
Item Specifications
Year, month, day hour (24-hour display), minute, second and
Setting items
day of week
Clock/calendar At 0 °C: less than 104 seconds per month
Accuracy At 25 °C: less than 51 seconds per month
At 55 °C: less than 155 seconds per month
Area of clock/calendar
With the clock/calendar function, data indicating the hour, minute, second, day, year and other
information stored in the special data registers DT90053 to DT90057 can be read using the transmission
instruction and used in sequence programs.
A: Available, N/A: Available
Special data register No. Higher bytes Lower bytes Read Write
Hour data Minute data
DT90053 A N/A
H00 to H23 H00 to H59
Minute data Second data
DT90054 A A
H00 to H59 H00 to H59
Day data Hour data
DT90055 A A
H01 to H31 H00 to H23
Year data Month data
DT90056 A A
H00 to H99 H01 to H12
Day-of-the-week data
DT90057 - A A
H00 to H06
12-3

Setting of clock/calendar
There are two ways to set the clock/calendar, as described below.

2. Select “Set PLC Date and Time” under “Tool” on the menu bar.
Set PLC Date and Time dialog box
The above steps display the “Set PLC Date and Time dialog box”
shown at the left. Input the date and time, and click on the “OK”
button.
Setting and changing using program

1. The values written to the special data registers DT90054 to DT90057, which are allocated as the
clock/calendar setting area, are sent..
2. A value of H8000 is written to DT90058.
Note) The value can be sent using the differential instruction “DF”, or by changing H8000 to H0000.
Do not always write H8000.
Example showing the date and time being written

Set the time to 12:00:00 on the 5th day when the X0 turns on.
Note:
No values have been set in the default settings, so the programming tool or another means must be
used to specify the values.
Example showing the clock/calendar being used

Sample program for fixed schedule and automatic start
In the example shown here, the clock/calendar function is used to output (Y0) signal for one second, at
8:30 a.m. every day.
Here, the “Hour/minute” data stored in the special data register DT90053 is used to output the signal at
the appointed time.
The hour data is stored in the upper 8 bits of DT90053 and the minute data in the lower 8 bits, in the
BCD format. This hour and minute data is compared with the appointed time (BCD), and the R900B
(=flag) special internal relay is used to detect whether or not it matches the appointed time.
30-second compensation
The compensation for 30 seconds is performed in the DT90058.
12-4

12.2.2 Master Memory Function
Overview
This function enables to transfer the data in the control unit (internal memory) such as programs to the
master memory cassette, and to copy them into another control unit (internal memory) by installing the
master memory cassette on it.
• Following data can be transferred to the master memory cassette.

1. Ladder programs
2. System registers
3. Comments
4. F-ROM data area
5. Security information (Password or uploading disabled information)
When there is no security information, no security information exists.
Change the switch on the back of the master memory cassette

The changeover switch is located at the back of the FP-X master memory cassette (AFPX-MRTC).
The default setting is “Clock/calendar only”.
Transfer from the master memory to the control unit

There are two ways to transfer data.
1. Operation using the FPWIN GR

Transferring is available in the PROG mode only.
2. Automatic transfer: when the PROG mode was changed to the RUN mode
When the power supply turns on (when started in the RUN mode)
Transferring using the FPWIN GR

2. Select “Internal memory => Master memory” under “Tool” on the menu bar.
Internal memory  Master memory dialog box

Select either “Internal memory => Master
memory” or “Master memory => Internal
memory”.
Transferring is available in the PROG mode only.
12-5

Select the data to be simultaneously transferred with programs and registers
Following three data can be transferred at the same time.

(Internal memory: Memory in the control unit)
Internal memory to Master memory Master memory to Internal memory
Sets a master memory cassette to the
upload protection setting.
Upload The control unit that data is transferred
(Cannot be selected)
protection with this master memory cassette
mounted will be also set to the upload
protection setting.
Note2) Transfers comments to the master Transfers comments to the control
Comments
memory cassette. unit.
Transfers the data in the F-ROM data Transfers data registers to the F-ROM
area of the control unit (internal ROM) data area in the control unit (internal
F-ROM data area
Note2) Note3) to the master memory cassette. ROM).
Specify the starting block No. and No. Specify the starting block No. and No.
of blocks to be transferred. of blocks to be transferred.
Once the data is transferred,
The data in the master memory is all afterwards, the information in the
Precautions deleted. So the devices not to be internal memory and the master
transferred will be deleted. memory are compared, and the
matched information is not transferred.
Note1) When a password has been specified, data is transferred automatically.
Note2) If there is no data, transferring cannot be performed.
Note3) Reads using the F12 (ICRD) instruction and writes using the P13 (ICWT) instruction.
(It is possible to write data in the F-ROM data area using the RAM => ROM transfer function of
the FPWIN GR.)
The storage area is composed of 16 blocks (1 block = 2048 words) that are from the blocks No. 0
to No. 15.
Reference: For the details on the F12 (ICRD) and P13 (ICWT) instructions,
<Programming Manual ARCT1F353>
12.2.3 Relation between Security Setting and Transmission

Status of FP-X (master memory cassette is installed)
Security not Uploading 4-digit and 8-digit
specified disabled passwords
Transmission from the internal
A N/A A
memory to master memory
Transmission from the master
A A A
memory to internal memory
A: Available, N/A: Available
12-6

12.2.4 Handling of Master Memories Created with Different Models
PLC that created master memory
Ry type Tr type
C14 C30 C60 C14 C30 C60
C14 A E25 E25 E25
Ry type C30 A A A E25 E25 E25
Installed C60 A A A E25 E25 E25
PLC C14 E25 E25 E25 A
Tr type C30 E25 E25 E25 A A A
C60 E25 E25 E25 A A A
A: Can be installed and operated.
: Can be installed depending on the program capacity.
E25: Master memory model unmatch error
Note1) If the E25 occurs, the mode will not be the RUN.
Also, the transfer operation from the master memory to the internal memory of the controller will
not be executed.
The transfer operation from the internal memory of the controller to the master memory can be
executed even if the E25 occurs.
Note2) If the version of the Ry type is older than Ver2.0, the E26 (User’s ROM error) is detected not the
E25.
Note3) Use the tool software to execute the program conversion between different models.
12-7

12.3 P13 (ICWT) Instruction
Data registers of 32765 words can be stored and used in the built-in ROM (F-ROM data area) of
the FP-X control unit using the P13 (ICWT) instruction.
However, note the followings for the use:
1. Restrictions on the number of writing

Writing can be performed within 10000 times. If writing continues for more than that, the correct
operation cannot be guaranteed.
2. The power supply turns off when the P13 (ICWT) instruction is being executed.
If the power supply turns off during this instruction is being executed, the hold type area may not be kept.
(Also, when the power is shut off during rewriting in the RUN mode, the same event may occur.)
12-8

12.4 Analog Potentiometer
12.4.1 Overview of Analog Potentiometer

The FP-X is equipped with two analog potentiometers (four for C60 only) as a standard feature. Turning
the potentiometers changes the values of the special data registers DT90040 to DT90044 within a range
of K0 to K1000.
Using this function makes it possible to change the internal set values in the PLC without using the
programming tool, so this can be used, for example, with analog clocks, to change the set value
externally by turning the potentiometer.
Applicable special data register

Symbol Potentiometer No. Special data register Range of values Control unit
V0 Volume 0 DT90040
C14/C30
V1 Volume 1 DT90041
K0 to K1000
V2 Volume 2 DT90042
C60
V3 Volume 3 DT90043
12.4.2 Example Showing How to Use Analog Potentiometer

The FP-X is provided with special data registers, in which the values in the registers change in response
to the analog potentiometers being moved. If the values of these registers are sent to the clock setting
value area, a clock can be created that allows the time to be set using the potentiometer.
Example: Writing of the clock setting value

The value of the special data register (DT90040) that corresponds to the analog potentiometer V0 is sent
to the setting value area (SV0) of TMX0 to set the time for the clock.
12-9

12.5 Sampling Trace Function
12.5.1 Overview
The FP-X control unit Ver2.0 and later versions support the sampling trace function.
Using this function enables to take samplings and record (accumulate) the state of arbitrary data of 16
bits + 3 data registered in the PLC at an arbitrary timing, and to examine the changes in the bit and data
in details after stopping sampling at an arbitrary timing.
The sampling trace function is used in the time chart monitor function under the online menu of the
FPWIN-GR.
The instructions, functions, special relays and special registers related to the sampling trace
function are as below.
F155(SMPL) sampling instruction
F156(STRG) sampling stop trigger instruction
Time charge monitor of FPWIN GR
R902C : Sample point flag OFF=Sampling by instruction

ON=Sampling at regular time intervals
R902D : Sampling trace end flag When sampling trace starts=0 stops=1
R902E : Sampling trigger flag Turns on when sampling stop trigger is on.
R902F : Sampling enable flag Turns on when sampling operation starts.
DT90028 : Interval of sampling trace k0=For sampling by instruction
k1 to k3000 (10ms to 30 seconds) For sampling at regular time intervals
12.5.2 Details of Sampling Trace Function

No. of data collectable at one sampling: 16 bits +3 data
Sampling capacity (No. of samples accumulable) : C14=300 samples
: C30/C60=1000 samples
Types of sampling timing (When an instruction is executed, or at regular time intervals)
1: Sampling at regular time intervals From 10 ms
2: Sampling by F155(SMPL) instruction
Sampling for every scan can be executed by the instruction.

Also, more than one samplings can be executed in one scan.
Timing for the execution of the F155(SMPL) instruction can be set by the ladder sequence.
Note: It is not possible to activate the sampling at regular time intervals and the sampling by the
F155(SMPL) instruction simultaneously.
How to stop sampling

Methods of the stop trigger (request): Following two methods are available.
1. Deactivate request by the tool software

2. Deactivate request by the F156(STRG) instruction
If the stop trigger activates, the PLC will continue to take samplings for the specified No. of delay, and
then stop the sampling operation. Once the sampling operation stops, the data will be automatically
retrieved by the tool software and will be indicated in a time chart.
It is possible to adjust whether to see before or after the trigger point by the setting of the No. of delay.
12-10

Operation image of sampling trace
12.5.3 How to Use Sampling Trace
1. Sampling at regular time intervals

(1) Register the bit/word device to be monitored by the time chart monitor function of FPWIN-GR.
(2) Specify the sampling configurations.
Set the mode of the sampling configurations to “Trace”.
Set the sampling rate (time).
12-11

(3) Start monitoring. Start with the button.
2. Sampling by instruction
(1) Register the bit/word device to be monitored by the time chart monitor function of FPWIN-GR.
(2) Specify the sampling configurations.
Set the mode of the sampling configurations to “Trace”.
Set the sampling rate (time) to 0.
3. Read data by trigger

(1) Stop sampling by stopping monitoring the trace that has been started in the above procedure 1 or 2
on the time chart display of FPWIN-GR. The data will be indicated in the time chart.
Stop monitoring. (Stop with the button, stop by the “Trigger Break” in the menu, or stop by the F156
instruction.)
Reference: <FPWIN GR Help>

12-12

12.6 Time Constant Processing
The input time constants for 32 points of the CPU input X0 to X1F can be set by the system registers
430 to 437. If this setting is specified, an operation like the equivalent circuit below will be performed.
By the setting, the noises or chattering of input will be removed.
CXn = Input signal of Xn contact

Xn = Image memory of input Xn
Note:
• The input signal of X contact is retrieved at the timing of the normal I/O update.
• If the partial update instruction is executed for the input in the time constant processing, the time
constant processing will be invalid, and the input status at the time will be read out and set.
• The time constant processing can be performed for the input other than X0 to X1F (add-on cassettes
or expansion units) by the F182 (FILTR) instruction.
• The time constant processing is invalid when the high-speed counter, pulse catch or interrupt has been
specified.
12-13

12-14

Chapter 13
Self-Diagnostic and Troubleshooting

13.1 Self-Diagnostic function
13.1.1 LED Display for Status Condition

Status indicator LEDs on control unit
• The control unit has a self-diagnostic function which
identifies errors and stops operation if necessary.
• When an error occurs, the status of the status indicator
LEDs on the control unit vary, as shown in the table above.
LED status
Operation
ERROR/ Description
RUN PROG. status
ALARM
Light (on) Off Off Normal operation Operation
PROG. mode
Off Light (on) Off LED does not flash even if the forcing Stop
Normal
output is performed in program mode.
condition
Forcing input/output in Run mode
Flashes Flashes Off Flashes RUN and PROG. LED Operation
alternately.
Light (on) Off Flashes When a self-diagnostic error occurs Operation
Abnormal Off Light (on) Flashes When a self-diagnostic error occurs Stop
condition Light (on) Light (on) Light System watchdog timer has been
Stop
or off or off (on) activated
Status indicator LEDs on expansion FP0 adapter
LED status
Description
POWER I/F ERROR
Normal
Light (on) Light (on) Off Normal operation
condition
Light (on) Flashes Off FP0 expansion unit is not connected.
The FP0 expansion unit, that had been connected
when the power supply for the FP-X control unit
turned on, came away.
Abnormal Light (on) Light (on) Flashes
An error has occurred in the communication of data
condition
between the expansion FP0 adapter and FP0
expansion unit due to noise, etc.
The expansion FP0 adapter turned on later than the
Light (on) Off Off
FP-X control unit.
13-2

13.1.2 Operation Mode When an Error Occurs
• Normally, when an error occurs, the operation stops.
• For some errors, the user may select whether operation is to be continued or stopped by setting the
system registers. You can set the error which operation is to be continued or stopped using the
programming tool software as shown below.
“PLC System Register” setting menu on programming tool software

To specify the steps to be taken by the FPWIN GR if a PLC error occurs, select “PLC System Register
setting” under “Option” on the menu bar, and click on the “Action on Error” tab. The screen shown below
is displayed.
Example1: When allowing duplicated output

Turn off the check box for No. 20. When operation is resumed, it will not be handled as an error.
Example2: When continuing operation even a calculation error has occurred

Turn off the check box for No. 26. When operation is resumed, it will be continued, but will be handled as
an error.
13-3

13.2 Troubleshooting
13.2.1 If ERROR LED is Flashing

Condition: The self-diagnostic error occurs
Procedure 1
Check the error contents (error code) using the programming tool.
Using FPWIN GR
With the FPWIN GR, if a PLC error occurs during programming or debugging and the RUN mode is
changed to the PROG. mode, the following status display dialog box is displayed automatically. Check
the contents of the self-diagnosed error.
Status display dialog box

If the error is an operation error, the error
address can be confirmed in this dialog
box.
After correcting the error, click on the

“Clear Error” button to clear the error.
Key Point:
To display the status display dialog box, select “Status Display” under “Online” on the menu bar.
Procedure 2
<For error code is 1 to 9>
- Condition
There is a syntax error in the program.
- Operation 1
Change to PROG. mode and clear the error.
- Operation 2
Execute a total-check function using FPWIN GR to determine the location of the syntax error.
<For error code is 20 or higher>

- Condition
A self-diagnostic error other than a syntax error has occurred.
- Operation
Use the programming tool in PROG. mode to clear the error.
13-4

<For error code is 42 (1)>
- Condition
The expansion unit or add-on cassette that had been connected when the power supply of the control
unit was turned on has come off, or the expansion unit has powered off.
- Operation 1
Turn off the power supply of the control unit, and connect the expansion unit and add-on cassette.
- Operation 2
Turn on the power supply of the expansion unit.
<For error code is 42 (2)>

- Condition
A temporary blackout such as a momentary power off occurred and the power supply of the expansion
unit was turned off.
- Operation
Once the power supply of the expansion unit is restored, the control unit will be automatically reset and
restarted.
Using FPWIN GR
Click on the “Clear Error” button in the “Status display dialog box”. Error code 43 and higher can be
cleared.
• In the PROG. mode, the power supply can be turned off and then on again to clear the error, but all of
the contents of the operation memory except hold type data are cleared.
• An error can also be cleared by executing a self-diagnostic error set instruction F148 (ERR).
Key Point:
When an operation error (error code 45) occurs, the address at which the error occurred is stored in
special data registers DT90017 and DT90018. If this happens, click on the “Operation Err” button in the
“Status display dialog box” and confirm the address at which the error occurred before cancelling the
error.
13.2.2 If ERROR LED is ON

Condition: The system watchdog timer has been activated and the operation of PLC has been
activated.
Procedure 1
Set the mode selector of PLC from RUN to PROG. mode and turn the power off and then on.
• If the ERROR LED is turned on again, there is probably an abnormality in the FP-X control unit. Please
contact your dealer.
• If the ERROR LED is flashed, go to chapter 11.2.1.
Procedure 2
Set the mode selector from PROG. to RUN mode.
• If the ERROR LED is turned on, the program execution time is too long. Check the program.
Check
(1)Check if instructions such as “JMP” or “LOOP” are programmed in such a way that a scan never finish.
(2)Check if interrupt instructions are executed in succession.
13-5

13.2.3 ALL LEDs are OFF
Procedure 1
Check wiring of power supply.
Procedure 2
Check if the power supplied to the FP-X control unit is in the range of the rating.
• Be sure to check the fluctuation in the voltage.
Procedure 3
Disconnect the power supply wiring to the other devices if the power supplied to the FP-X control unit is
shared with them.
• If the LED on the control unit turn on at this moment, increase the capacity of the power supply or
prepare another power supply for other devices.
• Please contact your dealer for further questions.
13-6

13.2.4 Diagnosing Output Malfunction
Proceed from the check of the output side to the check of the input side.
Check of output condition 1: Output indicator LEDs are on

Procedure 1
Check the wiring of the loads.
Procedure 2
Check if the power is properly supplied to the loads.
• If the power is properly supplied to the load, there is probably an abnormality in the load. Check the
load again.
• If the power is not supplied to the load, there is probably an abnormality in the output section. Please
Check of output condition 2: Output indicator LEDS are off

Procedure 1
Monitor the output condition using a programming tool.
• If the output monitored is turned on, there is probably a duplicated output error.
Procedure 2
Forcing on the output using forcing input/output function.
• If the output indicator LED is turned on, go to input condition check.
• If the output indicator LED remains off, there is probably an abnormality in the output unit. Please
Check of input condition 1: Input indicator LEDs are off

Procedure 1
Check the wiring of the input devices.
Procedure 2
Check that the power is properly supplied to the input terminals.
• If the power is properly supplied to the input terminal, there is probably an abnormality in the input unit.
Please contact your dealer.
• If the power is not supplied to the input terminal, there is probably an abnormality in the input device or
input power supply. Check the input device and input power supply.
Check of input condition 2: Input indicator LEDs are on

Procedure
Monitor the input condition using a programming tool.
• If the input monitored is off, there is probably an abnormality with the input unit. Please contact your
dealer.
• If the input monitored is on, check the leakage current at the input devices (e.g., two-wire type sensor)
and check the program again.
Check
(1)Check for the duplicated use of output. Check whether the output has been rewritten using the high-
level instruction.
(2)Check the program flow when a control instruction such as MCR or JMP is used.
13-7

13.2.5 A Protect Error Message Appears
When a password function is used
Procedure
Enter a password in the “Set PLC Password” menu in FPWIN GR and turn on the “Access” radio button.
Using FPWIN GR
(1)Select “Set PLC Password” under “Tool” on the menu bar.
(2)The PLC password setting dialog box shown below is displayed. Turn on the radio button next to
“Access”, enter a password, and click on the “Settings” button.
Set PLC password dialog box

4-digit password 8-digit password
Note:
The password setting can be specified when the PLC is being connected online.
When using the master memory cassette

The program editing cannot be carried out with the master memory cassette. Turn off the power supply
and remove the master memory.
13.2.6 PROG Mode does not Change to RUN

Condition: A syntax error or a self-diagnosed error that caused operation to stop has occurred.
Procedure 1
Check if the ERROR LED is flashing.
Example:
If the ERROR LED is flashing, check <13.2.1 If ERROR LED is flashing>.
Procedure 2
Execute a total-check function using the tool software to determine the location of the syntax error.
Using FPWIN GR
Select “Debug” on the menu bar, and select “Totally check program”. Click on the “Execute” button in the
total check dialog box.
13-8

13.2.7 A Communication Error has Occurred through RS485
Procedure 1
Check to make sure the transmission cables have been securely connected between the two (+)
terminals and two (−) terminals of the units, and that the final unit has been correctly connected.
Procedure 2
Check if the transmission cables are within the specifications range. At this point, make sure all of the
cables in the link are of the same type, and that multiple types of cables are not being used.
• Do not designate any unit other than those at both ends of the network as a terminal station.
Procedure 3
Check that link areas do not overlap.
Example:
For the specifications range of the transmission cables, <5.8.1 Selection of Transmission Cables>.
13.2.8 A Communication Error has Occurred through RS232C

Condition: No communication with 1-channel type RS232C cassette (AFPX-COM1)
2-channel type RS232C cassette (AFPX-COM2)
1-channel RS485 + 1-channel RS232C cassette (AFPX-COM4)
Ethernet + 1-channel RS232C cassette (AFPX-COM5)
2-channel type RS485 cassette (AFPX-COM6)
Procedure 1
Check if the receive data terminal of a connected device is connected to the SD and the send data
terminal is connected to the RD. Check if the SG is connected.
Procedure 2
1. Check if the CS signal is on.
2. When the “CS” of the communication cassette LED does not light, the CS signal is not on.
3. If the three-wire type is used, connect the RS signal and the CS signal of the communication cassette,
and turn the CS signal on.
Note) For COM1 only.
Procedure 3
Procedure 4
When the RS232C is either one of the followings, check if “COM. cassette” is selected for “Port
selection”.
1. When controlling the 1-channel type RS232C with 5-wire type.
2. When using the COM2 port with the 2-channel type RS232C
3. When using the COM2 port with the 1-channel RS485 and 1-channel RS232C.
4. When using the COM2 port with the Ethernet and 1-channel RS232C.
Procedure 5
Check that the baud rate is set to 9600 bps, 19200 bps or 115200 bps for the COM2 port of the 2-
channel type RS485. The settings of the system register and the cassette backside switch should be the
same.
Example: <Chapter 7 Communication Cassette>
13-9

13.2.9 A Communication Error has Occurred through RS422
Condition: No communication with 1-channel type RS232C/RS422 cassette (AFPX-COM3)
Procedure 1
Check to make sure the transmission cables have been securely connected between the two (+)
terminals and two (−) terminals of the units, and that the final unit has been correctly connected.
Procedure 2
Check if the transmission cables are within the specifications range. At this point, make sure all of the
cables in the link are of the same type, and that multiple types of cables are not being used.
• Do not designate any unit other than those at both ends of the network as a terminal station.
Procedure 3
Example:
For the specifications range of the transmission cables, <5.8.1 Selection of Transmission Cables>.
13.2.10 Expansion Unit does not Operate

Procedure 1
Check if the terminal setting is specified for the expansion unit.
Check if the terminal setting is specified for multiple expansion units.
Procedure 2
Check if the expansion FP0 adapter is installed at the last position.
When the expansion FP0 adapter is installed at the last position, the terminal setting for other expansion
unit is not necessary.
Procedure 3
Check if the power supply has turned on and off in a short time such as momentary power failure.
There is a possibility that the expansion unit has not been recognized due to the occurrence of
momentary power failure.
Turn off and on the power supply again.
13-10

13.2.11 A Communication Error has Occurred through Ethernet
Condition: No communication with Ethernet port of Ethernet + 1-channel type RS232C
(AFPX-COM5)
Procedure 1
Check if the LAN cable is securely connected to each unit or a PC.
When using a HUB for the connection, check if the power supply of the HUB is on.
Procedure 2
Check if the LINK/ACT LED lights up.
- When the LED is off, the LAN cable is not connected correctly.
Procedure 3
Check the IP addresses and the destination.
Procedure 4
Check if the communication format and baud rate for the COM1 port of the FP-X matches the
configuration setting of the AFPX-COM5.
Condition: The ERR LED of Ethernet + 1-channel type RS232C is flashing.
Procedure 1
Check the status with the Configurator WD.
- If the “IP duplicate error” is indicated for the status, the IP address may be duplicate on the network.
Specify an IP address that is not duplicate.
- If the “DHCP error” is indicated for the status, getting IP from the DHCP server has been failed. Check
if there is no problem on the network system.
13-11

13-12

Chapter 14
Precautions During Programming

14.1 Use of Duplicated Output
14.1.1 Duplicated Output

What is duplicated output?
• Duplicated output refers to repeatedly specifying the same output in a sequence program.
• If the same output is specified for the “OT” and “KP” instructions, it is considered to be duplicated
output.
(Even if the same output is used for multiple instructions, such as the SET, RST instruction or high-
level instruction (such as data transfer), it is not regarded as duplicated output.)
• If you enter RUN mode while the duplicated output condition exists, it will be normally flagged as an
error. (The ERROR/ALARM LED will flash and the self-diagnostic error flag R9000 will go on.)
How to check for duplicated use

You can check for duplicated outputs in the program using the programming tool, by the following
method.
- Using the tool software
Select the “Debug” → “Totally Check Program” in the menu bar, and click “Execute”. If there are any
duplicated outputs, an error message and the address will be displayed.
Enabling duplicated output

• If you need to use output repeatedly due to the content of the program, duplicated output can be
enabled.
• In this case, change the setting of system register 20 to “enable”.
• When this is done, an error will not occur when the program is executed.
14.1.2 When Output is Repeated with an OT, KP, SET or RST Instruction
Condition of internal and output relays during operation
• When instructions are repeatedly used which output to internal and output relays such as transfer
instructions and OT, KP, SET and RST instructions, the contents are rewritten at each step during
operation.
<Example>
Processing when SET, RST and OT instructions are used (X0 to X2 are all on).
14-2

The output is determined by the final operation results
• If the same output is used by several instructions such as the OT, KP, SET, RST or data transfer
functions, the output obtained at the I/O update is determined by the final results of the operation.
<Example>
Output to the same output relay Y0 with OT, KP, SET and RST instructions.
When X0 to X2 are all on, Y0 is output as off at I/O update.
• If you need to output a result while processing is still in progress, use a partial I/O update instruction
(F143).
14-3

14.2 Handling BCD Data
14.2.1 BCD Data

BCD is an acronym for binary-coded decimal, and means that each digit of a decimal number is
expressed as a binary number.
<Example> Expressing a decimal number in BCD:
14.2.2 Handling BCD Data in the PLC

• When inputting data from a digital switch to the PLC or outputting data to a 7-segment display (with a
decoder), the data must be in BCD form. In this case, use a data conversion instruction as shown in the
examples at below.
• BCD arithmetic instructions (F40 to F58) also exist which allow direct operation on BCD data, however,
it is normally most convenient to use BIN operation instructions (F20 to F38) as operation in the PLC
takes place in binary.
Input from a digital switch

Use the BCD-to-BIN conversion instruction F81.
Output to a 7-segment display (with decoder)

Use the BIN-to-BCD conversion instruction F80.
14-4

14.3 Handling Index Registers
14.3.1 Index Registers

• Like other registers, index registers have 14 points, I0 to ID, for reading and writing 16-bit data.
• Use an index register to indirectly specify a memory area number. (This is also called index
modification.)
<Example>
Transferring the contents of data register DT100 to the number specified by the contents of an
index register.
In this example, the number of the destination data register varies depending on the contents of I0 with
DT0 acting as a base. For example, when I0 contains K10, the destination will be DT10, and when I0 is
K20, the destination will be DT20.
• In this way, index registers allow the specification of multiple memory areas with a single instruction,
and thus index registers are very convenient when handling large amounts of data.
14.3.2 Memory Areas Which can be Modified with Index Registers

• Index registers can be used to modify other types of memory areas in addition to data registers DT.
<Example> I0WX0, I0WY1, I0WR0, I0SV0, I0EV2, I0DT100
• Constants can also be modified.
<Example> I0K10, I0H1001
• An index register cannot modify another index register.
<Example> I0I0, I0I1
• When using index modification with an instruction which handles 32-bit data, specify with I0. In this
case, I0 and I1 are handled together as 32-bit data.
14-5

14.3.3 Example of Using an Index Register
Repeatedly reading in external data
<Example>
Writing the contents of input WX3 to a sequence of data registers beginning from DT0.
○
1 When R0 turns on, 0 is written to index register I0.
○
2 When the R1 turns on, the contents of input WX3 is transferred to the data register specified by I0DT0.
○
3 Add 1 to I0. In this case, the contents of I0 will change successively, and the destination data register
will be as follows.
Input times of R1 Contents of I0 Destination data register
1st 0 DT0
2nd 1 DT1
3rd 2 DT2
: : :
Inputting and outputting data based on a number specified by an input

<Example 1> Setting a timer number specified by a digital switch
○
1 Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary and set it in index register I0.
○
2 Convert the BCD timer set value in WX0 to binary and store in the timer set value area SV specified
by contents of I0.
<Example 2>
Taking external output of the elapsed value in a timer number specified by a digital switch
○
1 Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary and set it in index register I0.
○
2 Convert the elapsed value data EV in the timer specified by I0 to BCD, and output it to output relay
WY0.
14-6

14.4 Operation Errors
14.4.1 Outline of Operation Errors

• An operation error is a condition in which operation is impossible when a high-level instruction is
executed.
• When an operation error occurs, the ERROR/ALARM LED on the control unit will blink and the
operation error flags (R9007 and R9008) will turn on.
• The operation error code “E45” is set at special data register DT90000.
• The error address is stored in special data registers DT90017 and DT90018.
Types of operation error

1. Address error
The memory address (number) specified by index modification is outside the area which can be used.
2. BCD data error
Operation is attempted on non-BCD data when an instruction handling BCD is executed, or BCD
conversion is attempted on data which is not within the possible conversion range.
3. Parameter error
In an instruction requiring the specification of control data, the specified data is outside the possible
range.
4. Over area error
The data manipulated by a block instruction exceeds the memory range.
14.4.2 Operation Mode When an Operation Error Occurs

• Normally, the operation stops when an operation error occurs.
• When you set system register 26 to “continuation”, the control unit operates even if an operation error
occurs.
Using programming tool software

1. Set the mode of the CPU to PROG.
2. Select the “Option” in “PLC Configuration” option from the menu bar.
3. On the “PLC Configuration” menu, select “Action on error”. This displays system registers 20 to 26.
4. Remove the check of system register 26.
5. Press the “OK” to write the setting to the PLC.
14.4.3 Dealing with Operation Errors

<Procedure>
1. Check the location of the error.
Check the address where the error occurred, which is stored in DT90017 and DT90018, and make sure
the high-level instruction for that address is correct and appropriate.
2. Clear the error.
Use a programming tool to clear the error.
• Select “Online” → “Status Display” in the menu bar. Execute “Clear Error”.
• An error can be cleared by turning the power off and on in PROG. mode, however, the contents of the
operation memory except the hold type data will be cleared.
• An error can also be cleared by executing a self-diagnostic error set instruction (F148).
• If the mode selector is set to “RUN”, RUN will resume as soon as the error is cleared. So if the cause of
the error is not removed, the error may seem not to be cleared.
14-7

14.4.4 Points to Check in Program
1. Check if an extraordinarily large value or negative value was stored in the index register.
<Example> When a data register is modified using an index register
In this case, index register modifies the address of data register DT0. If data in I0 is too large, it will
exceed the addressable range of the data register. The last address of the data register is DT32764, so
if the contents of I0 exceeds 32764, an operation error will occur. The same is true when the contents of
I0 are a negative value.
2. Is there any data which cannot be converted using BCD ↔ BIN data conversion?
<Example> When BCD-to-BIN conversion is attempted
In this case, if DT0 contains a hexadecimal number with one of the digits A through F such as 12A4,
conversion will be impossible and an operation error will result.
<Example> When BIN-to-BCD conversion is attempted
In this case, if DT1 contains a negative value or a value greater than K9999, an operation error will occur.
3. Check if the divisor of a division instruction is “0”.

<Example>
In this case, if the content of DT100 is “0”, an operation error will occur.
14-8

14.5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method
14.5.1 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method

Instructions using the leading edge detection operation
1. DF (leading edge differential) instructions
2. Count input for CT (counter) instructions
3. Count input for F118 (UDC up-down counter) instructions
4. Shift input for SR (shift register) instructions
5. Shift input for F119 (LRSR left-right shift register) instructions
6. NSTP (next step) instructions
7. Differential execution type high-level instruction (P13)
Leading edge detection method

• An instruction with a leading edge detection method operates only in the scan where its trigger
(execution condition) is detected switching from off to on.
(1) Standard operation
(2) Leading edge detection operation
How to perform leading edge detection

The condition of the previous execution and the condition of the current execution are compared, and the
instruction is executed only if the previous condition was off and the current condition is on. In any other
case, the instruction is not executed.
Precautions when using an instruction which performs leading edge detection

• When RUN begins, for example when the system is powered on, the off → on change of the execution
condition (trigger) is not detected. The instruction is not executed. Execution of the instruction will take
place as explained on the next page.
• When used with one of the instructions indicated in instructions 1 to 6 below which change the order of
execution of instructions, the operation of the instruction may change depending on input timing. Take
care regarding this point.
Be careful when using leading edge detection type instructions with control instructions, such
as:
1. MC and MCE instructions
2. JP and LBL instructions
3. LOOP and LBL instructions
4. CNDE instruction
5. Step ladder instructions
6. Subroutine instructions
14-9

14.5.2 Operation and Precautions When RUN Starts
Operation of first scan after RUN begins
• The leading edge detection instruction is not executed when the mode has been switched to the RUN
mode, or when the power supply is booted in the RUN mode, if the trigger (execution condition) is
already on.
• If you need to execute an instruction when the trigger (execution condition) is on prior to switching to
RUN mode, make a program as below using R9014 (initial pulse off relay). (R9014 is a special internal
relay which is off during the first scan and turns on at the second scan.)
<Example 1> DF (leading edge differential) instruction
<Example 2> CT (counter) instruction
14-10

14.5.3 Precautions When Using a Control Instruction
• If a leading edge detection instruction is in a control instruction, it will be executed only under the
following condition: The leading edge detection instruction was off when the execution condition of the
previous control instruction was reset, and the leading edge detection instruction is on when the
execution condition of the current control instruction becomes on.
• When a leading edge detection instruction is used with an instruction which changes the order of
instruction execution such as MC, MCE, JP or LBL, the operation of the instruction may change as
follows depending on input timing. Take care regarding this point.
<Example 1> Using the DF instruction between MC and MCE instructions
14-11

<Example 2> Using the CT instruction between JP and LBL instructions
14-12

14.6 Precautions for Programming
Programs which are not executed correctly
Do not write the following programs as they will not be executed correctly.
<Example 1>
• When X1 was on prior to X0, Y0 will not be on even if X0 becomes on.
<Example 2>
• TMX will activate if X1 becomes on whether X0 is on or off.
<Example 3>
• When X2 was on prior to X0, Y1 will not be on even if X0 becomes on.
When a combination of contacts are set as the trigger (execution condition) of a differential instruction
(DF) or timer instruction, do not use an AND stack (ANS) instruction, read stack (RDS) instruction, or
pop stack (POPS) instruction.
Examples in which the above programs are rewritten

<Program in which the example 1 is rewritten>
14-13

14.7 Rewrite Function During RUN
14.7.1 Operation of Rewrite During RUN

How operation of rewrite during RUN
Rewriting programs can be executed even in RUN mode. When a rewrite is attempted during RUN, the
tool service time is temporarily extended, program rewriting is performed, and operation is resumed
without the need to change the mode. For this reason, the time of the scan during the RUN rewrite
extends from several ms to several hundreds of ms.
Operation during rewrite

1. External output (Y) is held.
2. External input (X) is ignored.
3. The timer (T) stops the clock.
4. Rise and fall changes in the inputs of differential instructions (DF), counter instructions (CT), and
left/right shift registers are ignored.
5. Interrupt functions are stopped.
6. Internal clock relays (special internal relays) are also stopped.
7. Pulse output is stopped during the rewrite.
Set values for timer/counter instructions

All set values specified with decimal constants (K) in timer and counter instructions are preset in the
corresponding set value areas (SV). Values in the elapsed value area (EV) do not change.
Operation of rewrite during RUN completed flag

The rewrite during RUN completed flag (R9034) is a special internal relay that goes on for only the first
scan following the completion of rewriting in the RUN mode. It can be used instead of the initial pulse
relay following a change in the program.
14-14

14.7.2 Cases Where Rewriting During Run is not Possible
When the timeout error message is indicated:
Even if the timeout error message is indicated, it is highly possible that the program in PLC has been
already rewritten. Carry out the following operations.
1. When ladder symbol mode

As a ladder editing is left, set it to the offline edit mode. Complete the program conversion in the tool
software, and then change to the online edit mode to check.
2. When boolean mode
A ladder editing is cleared.
Set it to the offline edit mode and carry out the editing operation again. After the operation, change to the
online edit mode to check.
When the timeout error occurs using the through mode in GT series programmable display.
Extend the timeout time of the programmable display using the GTWIN.
(The default setting is 5 seconds.)
Select “Transfer” from “File” in the menu bar. The

“transfer data” screen will open. Select “Condition” to
open “Communication Setting” screen.
Change the value for “Timeout”.
Click “OK” button to complete the change of setting.
14-15

Cases where rewriting is not possible during RUN
1. When the result of rewriting is a syntax error.
<Example>
When executing the rewriting which does not form the following pair of instructions.
1. Step ladder instructions (SSTP/STPE)
2. Subroutine instructions (SUB/RET)
3. Interrupt instructions (INT/IRET)
4. JP/LBL
5. LOOP/LBL
6. MC/MCE
Also, rewriting is not possible during RUN in case of other syntax errors.
2. During the forced input/output operation
Interrupt restrictions
When using interrupt, high-speed counter, pulse output or PWM output functions, do not perform a
rewrite during RUN.
If a rewrite during RUN is executed, the operation as below will be performed. Exercise caution.
1. Interrupt programs will be disabled. Enable by executing an ICTL instruction once again.
<Example> Using R9034 (rewrite during RUN completed flag)
2. The high-speed counter will continue to count.

Target value match on/off instructions (F166/F167) will continue.
Coincidence interrupt programs will be disabled when the F166/F167 instruction is running.
3.The pulse output/PWM output stops when the rewriting is performed. The operation after the
completion of the rewriting during RUN varies depending on each instruction.
Instruction Operation after the completion of
Name
number rewriting during RUN
The operation before rewriting
F171 (SPDH) Pulse output (Trapezoidal control)
continues.
F171(SPDH) Pulse output (Home position return)
continues.
F172 (PLSH) Pulse output (JOG operation) Stop
F173 (PWMH) PWM output Stop
Pulse output (Selectable data table The operation before rewriting
F174 (SP0H)
control operation) continues.
F175 (SPSH) Pulse output (Linear interpolation)
continues.
4. The fixed time sampling trace will not be stopped.
14-16

14.7.3 Procedures and Operation of Rewrite During RUN
FPWIN GR FPWIN GR
Item
Ladder symbol mode Boolean mode
Maximum of 128 steps. Rewriting performed by step.
Changes are performed by block. Caution is required as rewriting
When PG conversion is executed takes place simultaneously with
online, the program will be the change.
rewritten.
Rewrite procedure
If an instruction written in block a If an instruction written in block a

is deleted in block b, the condition is deleted in block b, the condition
before the rewrite will be held. before the rewrite will be held.
OT/KP Y contact relays which are on bill
be held in the on status. To turn
them off in the RUN mode, use
forced output.
• If an instruction written in block a • If an instruction written in block a
is deleted in block b, the is deleted in block b, the
condition before the rewrite will condition before the rewrite will
be held. be held.
• Set values specified by K • Set values specified by K
TM/CT
constants in TM/CT instructions constants in TM/CT instructions
are preset in all of the are preset in all of the
corresponding SV’s in the corresponding SV’s in the
program. (Elapsed values EV do program. (Elapsed values EV do
Operation not change.) not change.)
of each Fun If an instruction written in block a • If deleted, the output memory
instruction High-level is deleted in block b, the condition area will be held.
instructions before the rewrite will be held.
When writing MC/MCE Writing or deleting a single
instructions, be sure to write the instruction during RUN is not
MC/MCE instructions as a pair. possible. Write or delete the
instruction in FPWIN GR ladder
symbol mode.
A subroutine is a program Write in the order: RET, SUB,
appearing between SUBn and CALL
CALL/SUB/
RET instructions. Be sure to write Delete in the order: CALL, SUB,
RET
it to an address which follows the RET
ED instruction.
An interrupt program is an Write in the order: IRET, INT
program appearing between INTn Delete in the order: INT, IRET
INT/IRET and IRET instructions. Be sure to
write it to an address which follows
the ED instruction.
14-17

FPWIN GR FPWIN GR
Item
Ladder symbol mode Boolean mode
A distance with the same number Writing and deletion of a single
cannot be defined twice. instruction is not possible for a
An SSTP instruction cannot be program with no step ladder area.
written in a subprogram. Write or delete both instructions
simultaneously in FPWIN GR
SSTP/STPE
ladder symbol mode.
Operation
In the case of an SSTP instruction
of each
only, writing and deletion of a
instruction
single instruction is possible for a
program with a step ladder area.
Be sure to write the instruction for Write in the order: JP-LBL or
JP/LOOP/ setting the loop number before LOOP-LBL
LBL LBL-LOOP instructions. Delete in the order: LBL-JP or
LBL-LOOP
14-18

14.8 Processing During Forced Input and Output
14.8.1 Processing when forced input/output is initiated during RUN
1. Processing of external input (X)

• Regardless of the state of the input from the input device, forced on/off operation will take precedence
at a contact specified for forced input/output in the above procedure B. At this time, the input LED will
not blink, however, the area of input X in the operation memory will be rewritten.
• Contacts not specified will read in the on/off state according to the condition of the input from the input
device.
2. Processing of external output (Y)
• Regardless of the result of operation, forced on/off will take precedence at a contact specified for
forced input/output in the above procedure A. At this time, the area of output Y in the operation memory
will be forcedly rewritten. External output will take place according to the input/output update timing in
the above diagram.
• The on/off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result.
3. Processing of Timer (T) and Counter (C)
• Regardless of the timer/counter input condition, forced on/off operation will take precedence at a
contact specified for forced input/output. At this time, the contact of the timer (T) or counter (C) in the
operation memory will be rewritten. Timing and counting will not take place during control.
• The on/off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result.
Operation during operation
For small-sized PLCs FP0, FP1, FPΣ and FP-X
The internal relay R or output Y specified by OT or KP instruction is rewritten according to the results of
operation. However, as the R or Y is set/reset again right before the peripheral service (as the above
procedure C), the monitoring value with the tooling software or the output to external devices is forcibly
rewritten to a specified value.
For medium-sized PLCs FP2 and FP2SH
For the internal relay R and output Y specified by OT or KP instruction, the value of the forced
processing has a priority. When rewritten by a high-level instruction, the result of the instruction has a
priority.
14-19

14-20

Chapter 15
Specifications

15.1 Table of Specifications
15.1.1 General Specifications

Item Description
Ambient temperature 0 to +55 °C
Storage temperature −40 to +70°C
Ambient humidity 10 to 95%RH (at25°C non-condensing)
Storage humidity 10 to 95%RH (at25°C non-condensing)
AC power supply DC power supply
Between input terminal and output 2300 V AC for 1
Note4) Note2)
terminal min.
Between input terminals and power 500 V AC for 1
Note2)
supply/earth terminals 2300 V AC for 1 min.
Note2)
Between output terminals and min. 2300 V AC for 1
Note2)
power supply/earth terminals min.
Between cassette I/O terminal and
Note3)
power supply/earth terminals 500 V AC for 1
Relay type Note2)
Between cassette I/O terminal and 500 V AC for 1 min.
Note2)
input terminals min.
Between cassette I/O terminal and 2300 V AC for 1 2300 V AC for 1
Note2) Note2)
output terminals min. min.
Between communication cassette
500 V AC for 1
RS485 and power supply/input/ Note2)
Break- Note3) min. 500 V AC for 1
output/earth terminals Note2)
down min.
Between power supply terminal 1500 V AC for 1
voltage Note2)
Note1) and earth terminal min.
Between input terminal and output 500 V AC for 1
Note4)
terminal min.
Between input terminals and power
supply/earth terminals
Between output terminals and 2300 V AC for 1
Note2)
power supply/earth terminals min.
Transistor Note3) 500 V AC for 1
power supply/earth terminals
type min.
input/output terminals
500 V AC for 1
min.
RS485 and power supply/input/
Note3)
output/earth terminals
Between power supply terminal 1500 V AC for 1
Note2)
and earth terminal min.
Between input terminal and output
Note4)
terminal
Between input terminals and power
supply/earth terminals
Between output terminals and
power supply/earth terminals
Between cassette I/O terminal and 100 MΩ or more
Insulation resistance Note3)
Note1) power supply/earth terminals (500 V DC
Between cassette I/O terminal and measured with a megohm-meter)
input/output terminals
RS485 and power supply/input/
Note3)
output/earth terminals
Between power supply terminal
and earth terminal
15-2

Item Description
5 to 9 Hz, single amplitude of 3.5 mm, 1 cycle/min
Vibration resistance 2
9 to 150 Hz, constant acceleration of 9.8 m/s , 1 cycle/min, 10 min on 3 axes
2
Shock resistance Shock of 147 m/s , 4 times on 3 axes
1500 Vp-p with pulse widths 50 ns and 1µs (based on in-house
AC
Noise measurements) (AC power supply terminal)
immunity 1000 Vp-p with pulse widths 50 ns and 1µs (based on in-house
DC
measurements) (DC power supply terminal)
Operation condition Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust
Conformed EC
EMC: EN61131-2, LVD: EN61131-2
directive
Overvoltage category Category II
Pollution level Pollution level 2
Note1) Not isolated between the tool port, USB port, Analog input cassette and Communication cassette
(RS232C part).
Note2) Cutoff current: 5 mA (Factory default setting)
Note3) Excluding between the Analog input cassette, Communication cassette (RS232C part) and
protection earth terminal.
Note4) Excluding between the input terminal and the output terminal of the pulse I/O cassette.
Power supply specifications

AC Power Supply
Specifications
Item
C14 C30/C60 E30
Inrush current
40 A or less 45 A or less 40 A or less
(at 240 V AC, 25 °C)
20,000 hours (at 55 °C)
Guaranteed life
Terminal screw M3
Service Power Supply for Input (Output) (Used for AC power supply type only)
Specifications
Item
C14 C30/C60/E30
Rated output current 0.15 A 0.4 A
Note) Available
function
Terminal screw M3
Note) This is a function to protect overcurrent temporarily. If a current load that is out of the
specifications is connected, it may lead to damages.
15-3

DC power supply
Specifications
Item
C14 C30/C60
20,000 h (at 55 °C)
Guaranteed life
Terminal screw M3
Weight
Unit Model No. Weight Unit Model No. Weight
AFPX-C14R Approx. 280 g COM1 AFPX-COM1
AFPX-C14RD Approx. 260 g COM2 AFPX-COM2 Approx.
AFPX-C14T Approx. 270 g FP-X COM3 AFPX-COM3 20 g
AFPX-C14TD Approx. 250 g Communi- COM4 AFPX-COM4
AFPX-C14P Approx. 270 g cation Approx.
COM5 AFPX-COM5
AFPX-C14PD Approx. 250 g cassette 25 g
AFPX-C30R Approx. 490 g Approx.
COM6 AFPX-COM6
AFPX-C30RD Approx. 470 g 20 g
Control AFPX-C30T Approx. 460 g Analog input cassette AFPX-AD2
unit AFPX-C30TD Approx. 440 g Analog output
AFPX-DA2
AFPX-C30P Approx. 460 g cassette
AFPX-C30PD Approx. 440 g Analog I/O cassette AFPX-A21
AFPX-C60R Approx. 780 g Thermocouple
AFPX-TC2
AFPX-C60RD Approx. 760 g cassette Approx.
AFPX-C60T Approx. 700 g RTD cassette AFPX-RTD2 25 g
AFPX-C60TD Approx. 680 g Input cassette AFPX-IN8
AFPX-C60P Approx. 700 g AFPX-TR8
Output cassette
AFPX-C60PD Approx. 680 g AFPX-TR6P
AFPX-E16X Approx. 190 g I/O cassette AFPX-IN4T3
AFPX-E14YR Approx. 230 g Pulse I/O cassette AFPX-PLS
AFPX-E16R Approx. 195 g Master memory Approx.
AFPX-MRTC
AFPX-E16T Approx. 180 g cassette 20 g
AFPX-E16P Approx. 180 g FP-X backup battery AFPX-BATT Approx. 7 g
Expansion
AFPX-E30R Approx. 470 g
I/O unit
AFPX-E30RD Approx. 450 g
AFPX-E30T Approx. 430 g
AFPX-E30TD Approx. 410 g
AFPX-E30P Approx. 430 g
AFPX-E30PD Approx. 410 g
Expansion
FP0 AFPX-EFP0 Approx. 65 g
adapter
15-4

Unit’s current consumption table
Current consumption of power supply for
Unit type Control unit
100 V AC 200 V AC 24 V DC
AFPX-C14R 185 mA or less 130 mA or less ―
AFPX-C14RD ― ― 235 mA or less
AFPX-C14T 160 mA or less 110 mA or less ―
AFPX-C14P 160 mA or less 110 mA or less ―
Control unit
AFPX-C14TD ― ― 160 mA or less
AFPX-C14PD ― ― 160 mA or less
Note1)
AFPX-E16R 65 mA or less 40 mA or less 145 mA or less
Note2)
AFPX-E30R 310 mA or less 210 mA or less ―
AFPX-E30RD ― ― 320 mA or less
Note1)
AFPX-E16T 20 mA or less 10 mA or less 60 mA or less
Note1)
AFPX-E16P 30 mA or less 15 mA or less 90 mA or less
Note2)
Expansion I/O unit AFPX-E30T 345 mA or less 220 mA or less ―
Note2)
AFPX-E30P 350 mA or less 225 mA or less ―
Note2)
AFPX-E30TD ― ― 170 mA or less
Note2)
AFPX-E30PD ― ― 220 mA or less
AFPX-E16X 20 mA or less 10 mA or less 35 mA or less
AFPX-E14YR 75 mA or less 40 mA or less 210 mA or less
Note1)
AFPX-COM1
Note1) 10 mA or less 10 mA or less 10 mA or less
AFPX-COM2
Note1)
Communication AFPX-COM3
cassette AFPX-COM4
Note1)
AFPX-COM5 30 mA or less 20 mA or less 75 mA or less
Note1)
AFPX-COM6 15 mA or less 10 mA or less 15 mA or less
Analog input Note1)
AFPX-AD2 10 mA or less 10 mA or less 15 mA or less
cassette
Analog output Note1)
AFPX-DA2 50 mA or less 30 mA or less 120 mA or less
cassette
Analog I/O Note1)
AFPX-A21 30 mA or less 20 mA or less 70 mA or less
cassette
Thermocouple Note1)
Applica- cassette AFPX-TC2 10 mA or less 5 mA or less 25 mA or less
tion Note1)
RTD cassette AFPX-RTD2 20 mA or less 10 mA or less 35 mA or less
cassette Note1)
Note) Input cassette AFPX-IN8 10 mA or less 5 mA or less 10 mA or less
Note1)
Output cassette AFPX-TR8 10 mA or less 5 mA or less 10 mA or less
Note1)
Output cassette AFPX-TR6P 10 mA or less 5 mA or less 30 mA or less
Note1)
I/O cassette AFPX-IN4T3 10 mA or less 5 mA or less 10 mA or less
Pulse I/O Note1)
AFPX-PLS 10 mA or less 10 mA or less 15 mA or less
cassette
Master memory AFPX-MRTC
cassette
GT01,GT01R
Programmable display 25 mA or less 15 mA or less 80 mA or less
(5 VDC,RS232C)
15-5

Note1) These current consumption indicate the increased amount of the current consumption of the
Control unit (refer to the example of the calculation below).
Note2) The current consumption of E30 is the current consumption at the supply terminal of E30. The
current consumption of the control unit does not increase.
Current consumption
Unit type
24 V DC
Expansion FP0 adapter AFPX-EFP0 10 mA or less
[Example of calculation] (when 100 V AC)
C30R + IN8 + TR8 + E16R + EFP0

410 mA 10 mA 10 mA 65 mA 10mA + Current consumption of FP0
expansion unit
Total 495 mA or less (100 V AC) 10mA + Current consumption of FP0

expansion unit (24V DC)
Example: When one FP0 expansion unit

(FP0-E32T) is connected:
FP0 expansion adapter: 10 mA or less
+ FP0-E32T: 40 mA or less
⇒ total 50 mA or less
15-6

15.1.2 Performance Specifications
Descriptions
Item Relay type Transistor type
C14 C30 C60 C14 C30 C60
14 points 30 points 60 points 14 points 30 points 60 points
DC input: DC input: DC input: DC input: DC input: DC input:
Control unit 8, 16, 32, 8, 16, 32,
Ry output: Ry output: Ry output: Tr output: Tr output: Tr output:
6 14 28 6 14 28
No. of When using E16R Max. 30 Max. 46 Max. 76 Max. 30 Max. 46 Max. 76
contro- expansion I/O units points points points points points points
llable Max. 254 Max. 270 Max. 300 Max. 254 Max. 270 Max. 300
I/O When using E30R points points points points points points
points expansion I/O units (up to 8 (up to 8 (up to 8 (up to 8 (up to 8 (up to 8
units) units) units) units) units) units)
Max. 110 Max. 126 Max. 156 Max. 110 Max. 126 Max. 156
When using FP0 points points points points points points
expansion units (up to 3 (up to 3 (up to 3 (up to 3 (up to 3 (up to 3
units) units) units) units) units) units)
Programming method/Control
Relay symbol/Cyclic operation
method
Program memory Built-in Flash ROM (without backup battery)
C14 : 16k steps
Program capacity
C30/C60: 32k steps
No. of Basic 111
instruction High-level 216
Operation speed From 0.32 µs/step (by basic instruction)
Base time 0.2 ms 0.24 ms 0.3 ms 0.2 ms 0.23 ms 0.28 ms
With E16: 0.34 ms x No. of units
I/O refresh + base time With E30: 0.47 ms x No. of units
With expansion FP0 adapter: 1.4 ms + FP0 expansion unit refresh time Note9)
External input (X)Note1) 1760 points (X0 to X109F)
External output (Y) Note1) 1760 points (Y0 to Y109F)
Internal relay (R) 4096 points (R0 to R255F)
Special internal relay (R) 192 points
Relay
1024 points Note2) (for initial setting, Timer: 1008 points (T0 to T1007), Counter: 16
Operation memory
Timer/ points (C1008 to C1023))

Counter (T/C) Timer: can count up to (in units of 1ms, 10ms, 100ms or 1s)× 32767.
Counter: Can count up to 1 to 32767.
Link relay(L) 2048 points (L0 to L127F)
C14: 12285 words (DT0 to DT12284)
Data register (DT)
Memory area
C30/C60: 32765 words (DT0 to DT32764)

Special data register (DT) 374 words 384 words
Link data register (LD) 256 words (LD0 to LD255)
File register None
Index register (I) 14 words (I0 to ID)
Differential points Unlimited points
Master control relay points
256 points
(MCR)
No. of labels (JP and LOOP) 256 points
No. of step ladders 1000 stages
No. of subroutines 500 subroutines
15-7

Descriptions
C14 C30 C60 C14 C30 C60
Input 14 programs, periodical interrupt 1 Input 8 programs, periodical interrupt 1
No. of interrupt programs
program program
Available Sampling by commands/Sampling at regular time intervals
For one sampling: 16 bits + 3 words
Sampling trace
C14=300 samples
C30/C60=1000 samples
All comments including I/O comments, explanatory notes, interlinear comments
Comment storage
can be stored. (Backup battery is not necessary. 328 kbytes)
Max. 16 units, link relay: 1024 points, link register: 128 words
PLC link function
(Data transmission and remote programming is not possible.)
Constant scan Available
Password Available (4 digits, 8 digits)
Upload protection Available
Self-diagnosis function Such as watchdog timer, program syntax check
Program editing during RUN Available
Single-phase 8 chs (High-speed: 4 chs,
medium-speed: 4 chs), 2-phase 4 chs
(High-speed: 2 chs, medium-speed: 2
chs)
With high-speed single-phase:

1 ch (100 kHz)
2 chs (80 kHz)
Single-phase 8 chs or 2-phase 4 chs 3 chs (60 kHz)
Input of main 4 chs (50 kHz)
unit With single-phase 8 chs (10 kHz each),
with 2-phase 4 chs (5 kHz each) With high-speed 2-phase:
1 ch (35 kHz)
High-speed
2 chs (25 kHz)
counter
Note3) Note4)
With medium-speed single-phase:
4 chs (10 kHz each)
With Medium-speed 2-phase:

2 chs (5 kHz each)
C14: Single-phase 2 chs (2-phase 1 ch)
C30/C60: Single-phase 4 chs (2-phase
2 chs) when 2 cassettes are installed.
Pulse I/O
cassette is Pulse I/O cassette cannot be installed.
With single-phse 2 chs (80 kHz each),
installed
2-phase 1 ch (30 kHz)
with single-phase 4 chs (50 kHz each),
2-phase 2 chs (25 kHz each)
15-8

Descriptions
C14 C30 C60 C14 C30 C60
C14: 3 chs (High-speed 2 chs, medium-
speed 1 ch)
C30/C60: 4 chs (High-speed 2 chs,
medium-speed 2 chs)
Pulse: With high-speed 2 chs (100 kHz

each)
For linear interpolation, composite
speed: 100 kHz
Input of main
None With medium-speed 2 chs (20 kHz
unit
each)
For linear interpolation, composite
Pulse speed: 20 kHz
output/
PWM:
PWM output
Note4) High-speed: 1.5 Hz to 41.7 kHz
Medium-speed: 1.5 Hz to 15.6 kHz
1000 resolution (12.5 kHz or less),
100 resolution (over 12.5 kHz)
C14: 1 ch
C30/C60: 2 chs when 2 cassettes are
installed.
Pulse I/O
cassette is Pulse: with 1 ch (100 kHz), with 2 chs Pulse I/O cassette cannot be installed.
installed (80 kHz each)
PWM: 1.5 Hz to 41.7 kHz
1000 resolution (12.5 kHz or less), 100
resolution (over 12.5 kHz)
14 points
Pulse catch input/interrupt 8 points
(Input of main unit: 8 points X0 to X7,
input (Input of main unit: 8 points X0 to X7)
Pulse I/O cassette: 3 points x 2)
Periodical interrupt 0.5 ms to 30 s
Potentiometer (Volume) C14/C30: 2 points, resolution 10 bits (K0 to K1000)
input C60 : 4 points, resolution 10 bits (K0 to K1000)
Constant scan Available
Available (year, month, day, hour, minute, second and day of week) (However, this
Realtime clock can only be used when AFPX-MRTC and an optional battery has been installed.)
Note5)
Backup by F12,
Flash Data register (32765 words)
P13 instructions
ROM
Automatic backup Counter 16 points (C1008 to C1023) Note10), internal relay 128 points (WR248 to
backup
Note6) when power is cut WR255), data register 55 words
off (C14: DT12230 to DT12284, C30/C60: DT32710 to DT32764)
Memory that is set as hold area at system register (However, only when an
Battery backup
optional battery has been installed.) Note7)
When AFPX-
C14: 3.3 years or more
MRTC is not
C30/C60: 2.7 years or more
installed
Battery
life Note8) C14: 2.1 years or more
When AFPX-
C30/C60: 1.8 years or more
MRTC is
Note) More than 2 batteries can be installed. In that case, the battery life is the
installed
value multiplied by the No. of batteries.
15-9

Note1) The number of points actually available for use is determined by the hardware configuration.
Note2) The number of points can be increased by using an auxiliary timer.
Note3) This is the specifications when the rated input voltage is 24 V DC at 25 °C. The frequency will
decrease depending on voltage, temperature or usage condition.
Note4) The maximum frequency varies depending on the use.
Note5) Precision of realtime clock:
- At 0°C: less than 119 seconds per month
Note6) Writing is available up to 10000 times. When the optional battery is used, all areas can be backed
up. Areas to be held and not held can be specified using the system registers.
Note7) If an area is held when the battery is not installed, the value of data may be indefinite as it is not
cleared to 0 when the power is turned on. When the battery ran out of the power, the data at the
hold area will be indefinite.
Note8) Note that the lifetime in actual use may be shorter than the typical lifetime depending on the use
conditions.
Note9) Refresh time of FP0 expansion unit
8-point unit No. of units used x 0.8 ms
Note10) The contact information and the elapsed value (EV) of the counter is backed up. The setting
value (SV) is not held.
15.1.3 Communication Specifications

Computer link Note1) MODBUS RTU Note1)
communication Note1)
PC(PLC)
1:N 1:N 1:N
1:1 1:1 link 1:1
commu- commu- commu-
communication communication communication
nication nication nication
RS232C
Inter-
RS232C RS422 RS485 RS232C RS422 RS485 RS422 RS232C RS422 RS485
face
RS485
TOOL TOOL AFPX

port AFPX port AFPX -COM1 AFPX AFPX
Target AFPX -COM3 AFPX -COM3 -COM2 -COM1 AFPX -COM3
items AFPX -COM3 -COM4 AFPX -COM3 -COM4 -COM3 -COM2 -COM3 -COM4
-COM1 -COM6 -COM1 -COM6 -COM4 -COM4 -COM6
-COM2 -COM2 -COM6
-COM4 -COM4
Two-wire, Two-wire, Two-wire,
Token
Commu- half- half- half-
Half-duplex Half-duplex bus Half-duplex
nication duplex duplex duplex
communication communication (Floating communication
method communi- communi- communi-
master)
cation cation cation
Note1) Although it has adequate tolerance to noise, it is recommendable to make the user program to
execute retransmission(in order to improve reliability of the communication when a
communication error occurs due to excessive noises or when a receiver equipment cannot
receive data temporarily).
Communication port (Ethernet)
Computer link General-purpose serial communication
No. of connections Max. 1 connection (Client) Max. 1 connection
Max. 3 connections (Server)
Server Client, Server Client, Server
Target item AFPX-COM5
15-10

Communication specifications 1 Interface: : RS232C, RS422, RS485
Item Specifications
RS232C RS422 (isolated)
Interface Note1) RS485 (isolated) Note1) 2)
(non-isolated)
Communication mode 1:1 communication 1:N communication
Two-wire half-duplex
Communication method Half-duplex communication
communication
Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system
Shielded twisted-pair cable
Transmission line Multicore shielded line
or VCTF
Transmission distance 15 m Max. 1200 m Note1) Max. 1200 m Note1) 2)
Baud rate Note3)
(to be set by system register) 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps
Note8)
Computer link ASCII, JIS7, JIS8

Trans-
General-purpose
mission ASCII, JIS7, JIS8, Binary
serial communication
code
MODBUS RTU Binary
Communication Data length 7 bits/8 bits
format Parity None/Even/Odd
(to be set by Stop bit 1 bit/2 bits
system register) Start code STX/No STX
Note4)
End code CR/CR+LF/None/ETX
Max. 99 units
No. of connected units Note5) 6) 7) 2 units (max. 32 units when C-NET
adapter is connected.)
Note1) When connecting a commercially available device that has an RS485 interface, please confirm
operation using the actual device. In some cases, the number of units, transmission distance,
and baud rate vary depending on the connected device.
Note2) The values for the transmission distance, baud rate and number of units should be within the
values noted in the graph below.
When using a baud rate of 300 bps to 38400 bps, you can set up to a maximum of
99 units (stations) and maximum transmission distance of 1200 m.
Note3) Only 9600 bps or 19200 bps can be specified when the C-NET adapter is connected with the
RS485 interface.
Note4) The start code and end code can be used only in the general-purpose serial communication
mode.
Note5) The converter SI-35 manufactured by Lineeye Co., Ltd is recommendable for the RS485 at the
computer side. Adjust the response time for the FP-X by the SYS1 instruction if necessary.
Note6) Unit numbers should be registered by the system register.
Note7) The termination resistance of the RS485/RS422 in the COM3,COM4 and COM6 is specified by
the dip switch in the communication cassette. There is no termination resistance at the RS232C
port.
Note8) The baud rates of 300, 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS instruction only (Ver2.0 or
later).
15-11

Communication specifications 2 Interface: Ethernet
Item Specifications
IEEE802. 3u, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Interface
Connector shape: RJ45
Baud rate 100 Mpbs/10 Mbps
Transmission
Transmission method Baseband
specifications Note1)
Max. segment length 100 m
Communication cable UTP (Category 5)
Protocol TCP/IP, UDP/IP, ICMP, ARP, DHCP
Auto-negotiation function
Function
MDI/MDI-X Auto-crossover function
Note1) The length between a HUB and the module.
15-12

15.2 Table of I/O Number Allocation
15.2.1 I/O Allocation of FP-X Control Unit

The I/O allocation of the FP-X control unit is fixed.
I/O numbers
Type of control unit Number of allocation I/O number
Input (16 points) X0 to XF
Output (1 points) Y0 to YD
X0 to XF
Input (32 points)
X10 to X1F
Y0 to YD
Output (28 points)
Y10 to Y1D
15.2.2 FP0 Expansion Unit Allocation

The FP-X expansion unit is installed on the right side of the FP-X control unit.

Type of expansion unit Number of allocation I/O number
Input (16 points) X300 to X30F
Output (14 points) Y300 to Y30D
Note) E16R cannot be connected on the right side of E16R.
15.2.3 FP0 Expansion Unit Allocation

Only one expansion FP0 adapter can be connected at the last position of the FP-X expansion bus.
The I/O allocation varies depending on the installation location of the expansion FP0 adapter
Expansion location Expansion unit 1 Expansion unit 2 Expansion unit 3
Expansion 1st unit
Expansion 2nd unit
Expansion 3rd unit
Expansion 4th unit
Y600 to Y61F Y620 to Y63F X640 to X65F
Expansion 5th unit
Expansion 6th unit
Expansion 7th unit
Expansion 8th unit
Note) The ranges of the I/O numbers which are actually used differ depending on the units.
15-13

I/O do not need to be set as I/O allocation is performed automatically when an expansion unit is added.
The I/O allocation of expansion unit is determined by the installation location.
Hundred’s digit
Carry the digit of hundreds place one by one since the second expansion unit.
Number of Expansion Expansion Expansion

Type of unit
allocation unit 1 unit 2 unit 3
FP0-E8X Input (8 points) X300 to X307 X320 to X327 X340 to X347
Input (4 points) X300 to X303 X320 to X323 X340 to X343
FP0-E8R
FP0-E8YT/P
FP0-E8YR
FP0
FP0-E16X Input (16 points) X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X340 to X34F
Expansion unit
FP0-E16R Input (8 points) X300 to X307 X320 to X327 X340 to X347
FP0-E16T/P Output (8 points) Y300 to Y307 Y320 to Y327 Y340 to Y347
FP0-E16YT/P Output (16 points) Y300 to Y30F Y320 to Y32F Y340 to Y34F
Input (16 points) X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X340 to X34F
FP0-E32T/P
Output (16 points) Y300 to Y30F Y320 to Y32F Y340 to Y34F
CH0 (X300 to X30F) (X320 to X32F) (X340 to X34F)
FP0 analog I/O Input (16 points) WX31 WX33 WX35
FP0-A21
unit CH1 (X310 to X31F) (X330 to X33F) (X350 to X35F)
WY30 WY32 WY34
Output (16 points)
FP0 A/D Input (16 points) WX30 WX32 WX34
FP0-A80
conversion unit CH0, 2, 4, 6 (X300 to X30F) (X320 to X32F) (X340 to X34F)
FP0-TC4
FP0 thermo- Input (16 points) WX31 WX33 WX35
FP0-TC8
couple unit CH1, 3, 5, 7 (X310 to X31F) (X330 to X33F) (X350 to X35F)
CH0, 2, 4 (X20 to X2F) (X40 to X4F) (X60 to X6F)
FP0 Input (16 points) WX3 WX5 WX7
FP0-RTD6
RTD unit CH1, 3, 5 (X30 to X3F) (X50 to X5F) (X70 to X7F)
WY2 WY4 WY6
Output (16 points)
WX30 WX32 WX34
Input (16 points)
(X300 to X30F) (X320 to X32F) (X340 to X34F)
FP0 D/A FP0-A04V Output (16 points) WY30 WY32 WY34
conversion unit FP0-A04I CH0, 2 (Y300 to Y30F) (Y320 to Y32F) (Y340 to Y34F)
Output (16 points) WY31 WY33 WY35
CH1, 3 (Y310 to Y31F) (Y330 to Y33F) (Y350 to Y35F)
FP0 Input 32 points X300 to X31F X320 to X33F X340 to X35F
FP0-IOL
I/O link unit Output 32 points Y300 to Y31F Y320 to Y33F Y340 to Y35F
• The data for the each channels of FP0 A/D conversion unit (FP0-A80), FP0 thermocouple unit (FP0-
TC4/FP0-TC8), FP0 RTD unit(FP0-RTD6) and FP0 D/A conversion unit (FP0-A04V/FP0-A04I) is
converted and loaded with a user program that includes a switching flag to convert the data.
• Regarding FP0 CC-Link slave unit, please refer to the exclusive manual.
15-14

15.2.4 I/O Allocation of FP-X Add-on Cassette
The FP-X add-on cassette is mounted on the FP-X control unit.
I/O numbers
I/O No.
Cassette Cassette
mounting part 1 mounting part 2
Slot 0 Slot 1
FP-X communication
AFPX-COM1 − −
cassette
FP-X communication
AFPX-COM2 − −
cassette
FP-X communication
AFPX-COM3 − −
cassette FP-X communication
AFPX-COM4 − −
cassette
FP-X communication
AFPX-COM5 − −
cassette
FP-X communication
AFPX-COM6 − −
cassette
FP-X analog input CH0 WX10 CH0 WX20
Note2) AFPX-AD2
FP-X analog output CH0 WY10 CH0 WY20
AFPX-DA2
cassette CH1 WY11 CH1 WY21
CH0 WX10 CH0 WX20
FP-X analog I/O
AFPX-A21 CH1 WX11 CH1 WX21
cassette
WY10 WY20
FP-X thermocouple CH0 WX10 CH0 WX20
AFPX-TC2
Application CH0 WX10 CH0 WX20
FP-X input cassette AFPX-IN8 From X100 From X200
FP-X output cassette AFPX-TR8 From Y100 From Y200
FP-X output cassette AFPX-TR6P From Y100 From Y200
From X100 From X200
From Y100 From Y200
FP-X pulse I/O cassette From X100 From X200
Note3) AFPX-PLS
From Y100 From Y200
FP-X master memory
AFPX-MRTC − −
cassette
Note1) There is no I/O for the communication cassette and master memory cassette.
Note2) Digital conversion values are K0 to 4000. As the resolution is 12 bits, upper 4 bits are always 0.
Note3) The pulse I/O cassette cannot be used with the FP-X Tr type.
15-15

15.3 Relays, Memory Areas and Constants
Number of points and range of
memory area available for use
Item Function
C30
C14
C60
External input
Note1) 1760 points (X0 to X109F) Turns on or off based on external input.
(X)
External
Note1) 1760 points (Y0 to Y109F) Externally outputs on or off state
output (Y)
Internal relay Relay which turns on or off only within
Note2) 4096 points (R0 to R255F)
(R) program.
Note2)
Link relay This relay is a shared relay used for PLC
2048 points (L0 to L127F)
(L) link.
Relay
This goes on when the timer reaches the

Note2)
Timer (T) specified time. It corresponds to the timer
1024 points (T0 to T1007/C1008 number.
Note3)
Note2) to C1023) This goes on when the counter
Counter
increments. It corresponds to the counter
(C)
number.
Special
Relay which turns on or off based on
internal relay 192 points (R9000 to R911F)
specific conditions and is used as a flag.
(R)
External input Code for specifying 16 external input
Note1) 110 words (WX0 to WX109)
(WX) points as one word (16 bits) of data.
External
Note1) Code for specifying 16 external output
output 110 words (WY0 to WY109)
points as one word (16 bits) of data.
(WY)
Internal relay Code for specifying 16 internal relay
Note2) 256 words (WR0 to WR255)
(WR) points as one word (16 bits) of data.
Link relay Code for specifying 16 link relay points as
128 words (WL0 to WL127)
(WL) one word (16 bits) of data.
12285 words 32765 words
Data register Data memory used in program. Data is
(DT0 to (DT0 to
Memory area
Note2)
(DT) handled in 16-bit units (one word).
DT12284) DT32764)
This is a shared data memory which is
Link register
Note2) 256 words (LD0 to LD255) used within the PLC link. Data is handled
(LD)
in 16-bit units (one word).
Timer/Counter Data memory for storing a target value of
set value area 1024 words (SV0 to SV1023) a timer and setting value of a counter.
Note2)
(SV) Stores by timer/counter number
Timer/Counter Data memory for storing the elapsed
elapsed value 1024 words (EV0 to EV1023) value during operation of a timer/counter.
Note2)
area (EV) Stores by timer/counter number.
Data memory for storing specific data.
Special data 374 words (DT90000 to
Various settings and error codes are
register (DT) DT90373)
stored.
Index register Register can be used as an address of
14 words (I0 to ID)
(I) memory area and constants modifier.
15-16

Number of points and range of
memory area available for use
Item Function
C30
C14
C60
Master control
relay points 256 points
(MCR) (MC)
Control instruction point
No. of labels
(JP+LOOP) 256 points
(LBL)
No. of step
1000 stages
ladders (SSTP)
No. of
subroutines 500 subroutines
(SUB)
No. of
interrupt Ry type: 14 input programs, 1 periodical program
programs Tr type: 8 input programs, 1 periodical program
(INT)
Decimal K-32, 768 to K32, 767 (for 16-bit operation)
constants (K)
Constant
K-2, 147, 483, 648 to K2, 147, 483, 647 (for 32-bit operation)
Hexadecimal H0 to HFFFF (for 16-bit operation)
constants (H) H0 to HFFFFFFFF (for 32-bit operation)
-38 38
Floating point F-1.175494 x 10 to F-3.402823 x 10
type (F) -38 38
F 1.175494 x 10 to F 3.402823 x 10
Note1) The number of points noted above is the number reserved as the calculation memory. The actual
number of points available for use is determined by the hardware configuration.
Note2) If no battery is used, only the fixed area is backed up. (counters 16 points: C1008 to C1023,
internal relays 128 points: R2480 (WR248) to R255F (WR255), data registers 55 words, C14:
DT12230 to DT12284, C30/C60: DT32710 to DT32764). Writing is available up to 10000 times.
Then the optional battery is used, all area can be backed up.
Areas to be held and not held can be specified using the system registers. If an area is held
when the battery is not installed, the value of data may be indefinite as it is not cleared to 0 when
the power is turned on. When the battery ran out of the power, the data at the hold area will be
indefinite.
Note3) The points for the timer and counter can be changed by the setting of system register 5. The
number given in the table are the numbers when system register 5 is at its default setting.
15-17

15-18

Chapter 16
Dimensions
16-1

16.1 Dimensions
16.1.1 Control Unit
Note) AFPX-COM5 is 5 mm taller than other communication cassettes.

16-2

16.1.2 Expansion Unit
16.1.3 Expansion FP0 Adapter
16.1.4 Dimension Diagram for Installation
16-3

16.2 Cable/Adapter Specifications
16.2.1 AFC8503/AFC8503S (PC)
(Unit: mm)
16.2.2 AFC85305/AFC8531/AFC8532 (For extending for the tool port)
16-4

Chapter 17
Appendix

17.1 System Registers / Special Internal Relays / Special
Data Registers
Precaution for System Registers
What is the system register area

 System registers are used to set values (parameters) which determine operation ranges and functions
used. Set values based on the use and specifications of your program.
 There is no need to set system registers for functions which will not be used.
Type of system registers
1. Allocation of timers and counters (System registers 5)

The number of timers and counters is set by specifying the starting counter number.
2. Hold/non-hold type setting (System registers 6 to 14)

When these registers are set to "hold type", the values in the relays and data memory will be retained
even if the system is switched to PROG. mode or the power is turned off. If set to "non-hold type" the
values will be cleared to "0".
3. Operation mode setting on error (System registers 4, 20 and 26)

Set the operation mode when errors such as battery error, duplicated use of output, I/O verification error
and operation error occur.
4. Time settings (System registers 31 to 36)

Set time-out error detection time and the constant scan time.
5. MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link settings (System registers 40 to 47, 50 to 57)

These settings are for using link relays and link registers for MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link communication.
Note) The default value setting is "no PC(PLC) link communication".
6. Input settings (System registers 400 to 406)

When using the high-speed counter function, pulse catch function or interrupt function, set the operation
mode and the input number to be used for the function.
7. Tool and COM ports communication settings (System registers 410 to 421)
Set these registers when the Tool port and COM ports are to be used for computer link, general-purpose
serial communication, PC(PLC) link, and modem communication.
8. Input time constant settings (System registers 430 to 437)

Changing the input signal width to be loaded enables to prevent the malfunctions caused by chattering
or noises.
17-2

Checking and changing the set value of system register
If you are going to use a value which is already set(the value which appears when read),
there is no need write it again.
Using programming tool software

Produce:
1. Set the control unit in the PROG mode.
2.Option ->PLC Configuration
3.When the function for which setting are to be entered is selected in the PLC Configuration
dialog box, the value and setting status for the selected system register are displayed.
To change the value and setting status, write in the new value and /or select the setting status.
4.To register these settings, choose OK
Precautions for system register setting

-System register settings are effective from the time they are set.
However, the system registers after No. 400 become effective when the mode is changed from PROG.
mode to RUN. With regard to the modem connection setting, when the power is turned off and on or
when the mode is changed from PROG. to RUN, the controller sends a command to the modem which
enables it for reception.
-When the initialized operation is performed, all set system register values (parameters) will be initialized
17-3

17.1.1 Table of System Registers for FP-X
Add- Default
Item Name Description
ress value
Starting number setting for  These settings
5 1008 0 to 1024
counter are effective if the
Hold type area starting number 0 to 1024 optional backup
6 1008
setting for timer and counter battery is
Hold type area starting number installed.
7 248 0 to 256
setting for internal relays
 If no backup
Hold/ C14: 12230
Hold type area starting number battery is used, do
Non- 8 C30, C60: 0 to 32765
setting for data registers not change the
hold 1 32710
Hold or non-hold setting for step Hold/ default settings.
14 Non-hold Otherwise proper
ladder process Non-hold
functioning of
Previous value is held for a hold/non-hold
Hold/
4 leading edge detection instruction Hold values cannot be
Non-hold
(DF instruction) with MC
guaranteed.
Hold type area starting number for
10 64 0 to 64
PC(PLC) W0-0 link relays
Hold/ 11 128 64 to 128
PC(PLC) W0-1 link relays
Non-
hold 2 12 128 0 to 128
PC(PLC) W0-0 link registers
13 256 128 to 256
PC(PLC) W0-1 link registers
Disable or enable setting for
20 Disabled Disabled/Enabled
duplicated output
Operation setting when an I/O
23 Stop Stop/Continuation of operation
verification error occurs
Operation setting when an
26 Stop Stop/Continuation of operation
operation error occurs
Dis- When a battery error
Action
abled: occurs, a self-diagnostic
on
error is not issued and
error
the ERROR/ALARM
Alarm battery error
LED does not flash.
4 (Operating setting when Disabled
Ena- When a battery error
battery error occurs)
bled: occurs, a self-diagnostic
error is issued and the
ERROR/ALARM LED
flashes.
Wait time setting for multi-frame
31 6500.0 ms 10 to 81900 ms
communication
Timeout setting for SEND/RECV,
32 10000.0 ms 10 to 81900 ms
RMRD/RMWT commands
Time
0: Normal scan
set- Constant value settings for scan Normal
34 0 to 350 ms: Scans once each
ting time scan
specified time interval
0
36 Expansion unit recognition time (No wait 0 to 10 s (0.1 second bit)
time)
17-4

FP-X
Add- Default
ress value
Range of link relays used for
40 0 0 to 64 words
PC(PLC) link
Range of link data registers used for
41 0 0 to 128 words
PC(PLC) link
PC
Starting number for link relay
(PLC) 42 0 0 to 63
transmission
link
43 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words
W0-0
Starting number for link data register
set- 44 0 0 to 127
transmission
ting
46 PC(PLC) link switch flag Normal Normal/reverse
Maximum unit number setting for
47 16 1 to 16
MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link
Range of link relays used for
50 0 0 to 64 words
PC(PLC) link
Range of link data registers used for
51 0 0 to 128 words
PC PC(PLC) link
(PLC) Starting number for link relay
52 64 64 to 127
link transmission
W0-1 53 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words
set- Starting number for link data register
54 128 128 to 255
ting transmission
Maximum unit number setting for
57 16 1 to 16
MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link
17-5

FP-X Tr type
Add-
Item Name Default value Description
ress
Do not set input X0 as high-speed counter.
Incremental input (X0)
CH0: Decremental input (X0)
Do not set input X0 as Two-phase input (X0, X1)
high-speed counter Individual input (X0, X1)
Incremental/decremental control input (X0,
X1)
Cont- CH1: Do not set input X1 as high-speed counter.
High-
roller Do not set input X1 as Incremental input (X1)
speed Decremental input (X1)
input high-speed counter
400 counter
settings Do not set input X2 as high-speed counter.
1 settings Incremental input (X2)
(HSC) (X0 to X3) CH2: Decremental input (X2)
X3)
CH3: Do not set input X3 as high-speed counter.
Do not set input X3 as Incremental input (X3)
high-speed counter Decremental input (X3)
CH4: Decremental input (X4)
X5)
X4: Normal input
Normal input Home input of pulse output CH0
High- high-speed counter Decremental input (X5)
Cont-
roller speed X5: Normal input
input counter/ Normal input Home input of pulse output CH1
settings 401 pulse Do not set input X6 as high-speed counter.
2 output Incremental input (X6)
(HSC/ CH6: Decremental input (X6)
settings
PLS) Do not set input X6 as Two-phase input (X6, X7)
(X4 to X7) Individual input (X6, X7)
high-speed counter
X7)
Normal input
X6:
Home input of pulse output CH2
Normal input Reset input of high-speed counter CH0
high-speed counter Decremental input (X7)
Normal input
X7:
Home input of pulse output CH3
Normal input Reset input of high-speed counter CH2
17-6

FP-X Tr type
Add-
ress
Normal output (Y0, Y1)
CH0:
Pulse output (Y0, Y1)
Normal output PWM output (Y0), Normal output (Y1)
Cont- Normal output (Y2, Y3)
Pulse/ CH1:
roller Pulse output (Y2, Y3)
output PWM output Normal output PWM output (Y2), Normal output (Y3)
402
settings settings Normal output (Y4, Y5)
CH2:
(PLS/ (Y0 to Y7) Pulse output (Y4, Y5)
PWM)
Normal output (Y6, Y7)
CH3:
Pulse output (Y6, Y7)
Pulse catch
403 input Not set
Inter- The pressed contact is set for the pulse catch
rupt/ settings
input.
Pulse
catch Interrupt
settings 404 input Not set
The pressed contact is set for the interrupt
settings
input.
Inter- Interrupt
rupt edge setting
405 Leading edge
edge for controller
settings input The pressed contact is up and set to trailing
edge.
Note1) If CH0, CH2, CH4 and CH6 of the high-speed counter is set to the two-phase input, individual
input or incremental/decremental control input, the settings of CH1, CH3, CH and CH7 will be
invalid.
Note2) Only CH0 and CH2 are available for the reset input of the high-speed counter.
X6 for CH0 and X7 for CH2 can be allocated.
Note3) X4 to X7 can be used as the home input of the pulse output CH0 to CH3.
When using the home return function of the pulse output, always set the home input. In that
case, X4 to X7 cannot be set as the high-speed counter.
Note4) When using the pulse output/PWM output, the controller output settings must be specified.
The output that has been set to the pulse output/PWM output cannot be used as the normal
output.
Note5) If the same input has been set to the high-speed, pulse catch and interrupt input simultaneously,
the following precedence order is effective:
[High-speed counter]  [Pulse catch]  [Interrupt input]
17-7

FP-X Ry type
Add-
ress
Two-phase input (X100, X101)
Two-phase input (X100, X101), Reset input
(X102)
CH8: Incremental input (X100), Reset input (X102)
Do not set Decremental input (X100)
input X100 as Decremental input (X100), Reset input (X102)
High-speed high-speed Incremental/decremental input (X100, X101)
Incremental/decremental input (X100, X101),
counter counter
Reset input (X102)
settings Incremental/decremental control input (X100,
400 (X100 to X102) X101)
X101), Reset input (X102)
Do not set Incremental input (X101)
input X101 as Incremental input (X101), Reset input (X102)
high-speed Decremental input (X101)
Decremental input (X101), Reset input (X102)
counter
Pulse output CH0: Normal output (Y100, Y101)
Pulse I/O settings Normal Pulse output (Y100, Y101)
cassette PWM output (Y100), Normal output (Y101)
(Y100 to Y101) output
settings
(HSC/ Two-phase input (X200, X201)
PLS) Two-phase
input (X200, X201), Reset input (X202)
CHA: Incremental input (X200), Reset input (X202)
Do not set Decremental input (X202)
input X200 as Decremental input (X202), Reset input (X202)
High-speed high-speed Incremental/decremental input (X200, X201)
Incremental/decremental input (X200, X201),
counter counter
Reset input (X202)
settings Incremental/decremental control
401 (X200 to X202) (X200, X201)
Incremental/decremental control
(X200, X201), Reset input (X202)
CHB: Does not set input X201 as high-speed
Do not set counter.
input X201 as Incremental input (X201), Reset input (X202)
high-speed Decremental input (X201)
counter Decremental input (X201), Reset input (X202)
Pulse output CH1: Normal output (Y200, Y201)
settings Normal Pulse output (Y200, Y201)
(Y200 to Y201) output PWM output (Y200), Normal output (Y201)
17-8

Note1) If the operation mode is set to Two-phase, incremental/decremental, or incremental/decremental
control, the setting for CH9 is invalid in system register 400 and the setting for CHB is invalid in
system register 401.
Note2) If reset input settings overlap, the CH9 setting takes precedence in system register 400 and the
CHB setting takes precedence in system register 401.
Note3) CHA, CHB and CH1 input signals in system register 401 are the signals when the pulse I/O
cassette (AFPX-PLS) is installed in the cassette mounting part 2.
Note4) If the operation mode setting for the pulse output CH0 and CH1 is carried out, it cannot be used
as normal output.
When the operation mode for the pulse output CH0 is set to 1, the reset input setting for the
high-speed counter CH8 and CH9 is invalid.
When the operation mode for the pulse output CH1 is set to 1, the reset input setting for the
high-speed counter CHA and CHB is invalid.
Note5) Upgrade FPWIN GR to Ver2.6 or higher version if the No. of I/O allocation is indicated with 1-digit
number such as X0 in the setting window No. 400 and 401 of FPWIN GR.
17-9

FP-X Ry type
Add-
ress
Do not set input X0 as Decremental input (X0)
high-speed counter Two-phase input (X0, X1)
Cont- High- Incremental input (X3)
roller speed high-speed counter Two-phase input (X2, X3)
input 402 counter
settings settings Incremental input (X4)
(HSC) (X0 to X7) Do not set input X4 as Decremental input (X4)
high-speed counter Two-phase input (X3 X4)
Pulse
catch
403 Not set
Inter- input The pressed contact is set for the pulse
rupt/ settings catch input.
pulse
catch
Interrupt
settings
404 input Not set
settings The pressed contact is set for the interrupt
input.
17-10

FP-X Ry type
Add-
ress
Interrupt
edge setting
405 for Leading edge
controller
Inter- input The pressed contact is up and set to trailing
rupt edge.
edge
settings Interrupt
edge setting
406 Leading edge
for pulse I/O
cassette The pressed contact is up and set to trailing
edge.
Note1) For counting two-phase input, only CH0, CH2, CH4 and CH6 can be used.
When two-phase input is specified for CH0, CH2, CH4 and CH6, the settings for CH1, CH3,
CH5 and CH7 corresponding to each CH No. are ignored, however, specify the same setting for
those channels.
Note2) The settings for pulse catch and interrupt input can only be specified in system registers 403 and
404.
Note3) If system register 400 to 404 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay, the following
precedence order is effective: [High-speed counter][Pulse catch][Interrupt input].
<Example>
When the high-speed counter is being used in the addition input mode, even if input X0 is
specified as an interrupt input or as pulse catch input, those settings are invalid, and X0
functions as counter input for the high-speed counter.
Note4) Upgrade FPWIN GR to Ver2.6 or higher version if the No. of I/O allocation is indicated with 1-digit
number such as X0 in the setting window No. 403,404 and 406 of FPWIN GR.
17-11

FP-X
Add- Default
ress value
410 Unit No. setting 1 1 to 99
Communication Computer link
Computer link
mode setting General-purpose communications
412
Selection of modem
Disabled Enabled/Disabled
connection
Enter the settings for the various items.
- Data length bit: 7 bits/8 bits
- Parity check: none/with odd/with even
Data length
- Stop bit: 1 bit/2 bits
bit: 8 bits
Communication - The following setting is valid only when
413 Parity check:
format setting the communication mode specified by
“with odd”
system register 412 has been set to
Stop bit: 1 bit
“General-purpose serial communication”.
- Terminator: CR/CR+LF/None
Tool
- Header: STX not exist/STX exist
port
2400 bps
set-
4800 bps
ting
9600 bps
415 Baud rate setting 9600 bps 19200 bps
38400 bps
57600 bps
115200 bps
Starting address for
received buffer of
420 0 0 to 32764
general (serial data)
communication mode
Buffer capacity
setting for data
421 received of general 2048 0 to 2048
(serial data)
communication mode
17-12

FP-X
Add- Default
ress value
Computer link
Communication General-purpose serial communication
Computer link
mode setting PC(PLC) link
412
MODBUS RTU
Selection of modem
connection
- Parity check: none/with odd/with even
Data length
bit: 8 bits
413 Parity check:
Odd
Stop bit: 1 bit
COM. “General-purpose serial communication”.
1 - Terminator: CR/CR+LF/None
port - Header: STX not exist/STX exist
set- 2400 bps
ting 4800 bps
9600 bps
38400 bps
57600 bps
115200 bps
received buffer of
416 0 0 to 32764
communication mode
Buffer capacity
setting for data
(serial data)
communication mode
Note1) The communication format in a PC(PLC) link is fixed at the following settings:
Data length is 8 bits, odd parity, stop bit is 1.
The communication speed (baud rate) is fixed at 115200 bps.
Note2) Reference: For information on MODBUS RTU mode operation, <MODBUS RUT
Specifications>.
17-13

FP-X
Add- Default
ress value
Computer link
Communication mode Computer
setting link
MODBUS RTU
412 Selection of modem
connection
Built-in USB
Selection of port Built-in USB
- Parity check: none/odd/even
Data length
bit: 8 bits
414 Parity check:
“with odd”
Stop bit: 1 bit
COM. “General-purpose serial communication”.
2 port - Terminator: CR/CR+LF/None
set- - Header: STX not exist/STX exist
ting 2400 bps
4800 bps
9600 bps
38400 bps
57600 bps
115200 bps
received buffer of
416 2048 0 to 32764
communication mode
Buffer capacity
setting for data
(serial data)
communication mode
Note1) The communication format in a PC(PLC) link is fixed at the following settings:
the data length is 8 bits, odd parity, stop bit is 1.
The communication speed (baud rate) is fixed at 115200 bps.
Note2) The USB port for C30 and C60 can be selected by the system register setting.
The USB port has been selected for the COM2 port of C30 and C60 as default setting. The USB
port is 115.2 kbps despite of the baud rate setting No. 415.
The setting for No. 412 must be changed to communication cassette for using the COM2 port of
the communication cassette.
The COM2 port of the USB port and the communication cassette cannot be used at the same time.
17-14

FP-X
Add- Default
ress value
Controller input time
430 constant setting 1
X0 to X3
X4 to X7
None
Cont- 1 ms
X8 to XB
roller 2 ms
input 4 ms
time
XC to XF 8 ms
cons- None
Controller input time 16 ms
tant
434 constant setting 3 32 ms
set-
X10 to X13 64 ms
tings
(Note1) Controller input time
128 ms
X14 to X17 156 ms
X18 to X1B
X1C to X1F
Note1) These settings are available for the FP-X V2.0 or later.
17-15

17.1.2 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP-X
The special internal relays turn on and off under special conditions. The on and off states are not output
externally. Writing is not possible with a programming tool or an instruction.
WR900 FP-X
Address Name Description
Self-diagnostic error Turns on when a self-diagnostic error occurs.
R9000
flag  The content of self-diagnostic error is stored in DT90000.
R9001 Not used -
Application cassette Turns on when an error is detected in the I/O type application
R9002
I/O error flag cassette.
Application cassette
R9003 Turns on when an error is detected in the application cassette.
abnormal error flag
I/O verification error
R9004 Turns on when an I/O verification error occurs.
flag
Turns on when a backup battery error occurs.
Backup battery error
R9005 Turns on when the battery has run out even if the system
flag (non-hold)
register No. 4 has been set not to inform the battery error.
Turns on when a backup battery error occurs.
Turns on when the battery has run out even if the system
register No. 4 has been set not to inform the battery error.
Backup battery error
R9006 Once a battery error has been detected, this is held even after
flag (hold)
recovery has been made.
It goes off if the power supply is turned off, or if the system
is initialized.
Turns on and keeps the on state when an operation error
Operation error flag occurs.
R9007
(hold) The address where the error occurred is stored in DT90017.
(indicates the first operation error which occurred).
Turns on for an instant when an operation error occurs.
Operation error flag
R9008 The address where the operation error occurred is stored in
(non-hold)
DT90018. The contents change each time a new error occurs.
This is set if an overflow or underflow occurs in the calculation
R9009 Carry flag results, and as a result of a shift system instruction being
executed.
Turns on for an instant when the compared results become
R900A > Flag
larger in the comparison instructions.
Turns on for an instant,
- when the compared results are equal in the comparison
R900B = Flag instructions.
- when the calculated results become 0 in the arithmetic
instructions.
Turns on for an instant when the compared results become
R900C < Flag
smaller in the comparison instructions.
Turns on when the set time elapses (set value reaches 0) in
Auxiliary timer the timing operation of the F137(STMR)/F183(DSTM)
R900D
Contact auxiliary timer instruction. The flag turns off when the trigger
for auxiliary timer instruction turns off.
Tool port
R900E Turns on when communication error at tool port is occurred.
communication error
Turns on when scan time exceeds the time specified in
Constant scan error
R900F system register 34 during constant scan execution.
flag
This goes on if 0 has been set using system register 34.
17-16

WR901 FP-X
R9010 Always on relay Always on.
R9011 Always off relay Always off.
R9012 Scan pulse relay Turns on and off alternately at each scan.
Goes on for only the first scan after operation (RUN) has
Initial (on type) pulse
R9013 been started, and goes off for the second and subsequent
relay
scans.
Goes off for only the first scan after operation (RUN) has
Initial (off type) pulse
R9014 been started, and goes on for the second and subsequent
relay
scans.
Step ladder initial pulse Turns on for only the first scan of a process after the boot at
R9015
relay (on type) the step ladder control.
R9016 Not used -
R9017 Not used -
Repeats on/off operations in 0.01
R9018 0.01 s clock pulse relay
sec. cycles.
Repeats on/off operations in 0.02 s.

R9019 0.02 s clock pulse relay
cycles.

R901A 0.1 s clock pulse relay
cycles.

R901B 0.2 s clock pulse relay
cycles.
Repeats on/off operations in 1 s.

R901C 1 s clock pulse relay
cycles.
Repeats on/off operations in 2 s.

R901D 2 s clock pulse relay
cycles.
Repeats on/off operations in 1 min.

R901E 1 min clock pulse relay
cycles.
R901F Not used -
17-17

WR902 FP-X
Turns off while the mode selector is set to PROG.
R9020 RUN mode flag
Turns on while the mode selector is set to RUN.
R9021 Not used -
R9022 Not used -
R9023 Not used -
R9024 Not used -
R9025 Not used -
R9026 Message flag Turns on while the F149 (MSG) instruction is executed.
R9027 Not used -
R9028 Not used -
Turns on during forced on/off operation for input/output
R9029 Forcing flag
relay timer/counter contacts.
Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by
R902A Interrupt enable flag
the ICTL instruction.
R902B Interrupt error flag Turns on when an interrupt error occurs.
Sampling by the instruction=0
R902C Sample point flag
Sampling at constant time intervals=1
When the sampling operation stops=1,
R902D Sample trace end flag
When the sampling operation starts=0
Sampling stop trigger When the sampling stop trigger activates=1
R902E
flag When the sampling stop trigger stops=0
When sampling starts=1
R902F Sampling enable flag
When sampling stops=0
17-18

WR903 FP-X
R9030 Not used -
R9031 Not used -
- Turns on when the general-purpose communication
function is being used
R9032 COM1 port mode flag
- Goes off when any function other than the general-
purpose communication function is being used.
Off: Printing is not executed.
R9033 PR instruction flag
On: Execution is in progress.
Editing in RUN mode Goes on for ony the first scan following completion of a
R9034
flag rewrite during the RUN operation.
R9035 Not used -
R9036 Not used -
- Goes on if a transmission error occurs during data
COM1 port
communication.
R9037 communication error
- Goes off when a request is made to send data, using the
flag
F159 (MTRN) instruction.
COM1 port reception
done flag during - Turns on when the terminator is received during general -
R9038
general- purpose serial purpose serial communication.
communication
COM1 port transmission - Goes on when transmission has been completed in
done flag during general-purpose serial communication.
R9039
general-purpose serial - Goes off when transmission is requested in general-
communication purpose serial communication.
R903A Not used -
R903B Not used -
R903C Not used -
R903D Not used -
TOOL port reception
- Turns on when the terminator is received during general -
R903E done flag during general
purpose serial communication.
purpose communication
TOOL port transmission - Goes on when transmission has been completed in
done flag during general-purpose serial communication.
R903F
general-purpose serial - Goes off when transmission is requested in general-
communication purpose serial communication.
Note) R9030 to R903F can be changed during 1 scan.
17-19

WR904 FP-X
- Goes on when the general-purpose serial
R9040 TOOL port mode flag communication is used.
- Goes off when the MEWTOCOL is used.
R9041 COM1 port PC(PLC) link flag Turn on while the PC(PLC) link function is used.
- Goes on when the general-purpose serial
R9042 COM2 port mode flag communication is used.
- Goes off when the MEWTOCOL is used.
R9043 Not used -
Monitors whether the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV)
instructions can be executed or not for the COM1 port.
COM1 port SEND/RECV Off: None of the above mentioned instructions can be
R9044
instruction execution flag executed. (During executing the instruction)
On: One of the above mentioned instructions can be
executed.
Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the
execution of the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV)
COM1 port SEND/RECV
instructions for the COM1 port as follows:
R9045 instruction execution end
Off: No abonormality detected.
flag
On: An abnormality detected. (communication error)
The error code is stored in DT90124.
R9046 Not used -
- Goes on if a transmission error occurs during data
COM2 port communication communication.
R9047
error flag - Goes off when a request is made to send data,
using the F159 (MTRN) instruction.
COM2 port
reception done flag during - Turn on when the terminator is received during
R9048
general-purpose general-purpose serial communication.
communicating
COM2 port - Goes on when transmission has been completed in
transmission done flag general-purpose serial communication.
R9049
during general-purpose - Goes off when transmission is requested in general-
communication purpose communication.
Monitors whether the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV)
instructions can be executed or not for the COM2 port.
COM2 port SEND/RECV Off: None of the above mentioned instructions can be
R904A
instruction execution flag executed. (During executing the instruction)
On: One of the above mentioned instructions can be
executed.
Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the
execution of the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV)
COM2 port SEND/RECV
instructions for the COM2 port as follows:
R904B instruction execution end
Off: No abonormality detected.
flag
On: An abnormality detected. (communication error)
The error code is stored in DT90125.
R904C to
Not used -
R904F
Note) R9040 to R904F can be changed during 1 scan.
17-20

WR905 FP-X
When using MEWNET-W0
MEWNET-W0 - Turns on when a transmission error occurs at
R9050 PC(PLC) link PC(PLC) link.
transmission error flag - Turns on when there is an error in the PC(PLC) link area
settings.
R9051 to
Not used
R905F
17-21

WR906 FP-X
Turns on when Unit No. 1 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9060 PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.1
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Unit
No.2
Unit
No.3
Unit
No.4
Unit
No.5
Turns on when Unit No. 6 is communicating properly in PLC
Unit
R9065 link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
No.6
occurs, or when not in the PLC link mode.
Unit
No.7
MEWNET-W0 Unit
PC(PLC) link 0 No.8
transmission
assurance Unit
relay No.9
Unit
No.10
Unit
R906A PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.11
Unit
R906B PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.12
Unit
R906C PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.13
Unit
R906D PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.14
Unit
R906E PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.15
Unit
R906F PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.16
17-22

WR907 FP-X
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 1 is in the RUN mode.
R9070
No.1 Turns off when Unit No. 1 is in the PROG. mode.
R9071
R9072
R9073
R9074
R9075
R9076
MEWNET-W0 Unit Turns on when Unit No. 8 is in the RUN mode.
R9077
PC(PLC) link No.8 Turns off when Unit No. 8 is in the PROG. mode.
0 operation Unit Turns on when Unit No. 9 is in the RUN mode.
R9078
mode relay No.9 Turns off when Unit No. 9 is in the PROG. mode.
R9079
R907A
R907B
R907C
R907D
R907E
R907F
17-23

WR908 FP-X
Unit
No.1
Unit
No.2
Unit
No.3
Unit
No.4
Unit
No.5
Turns on when Unit No. 6 is communicating properly in PLC
Unit
R9085 link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
No.6
occurs, or when not in the PLC link mode.
Unit
No.7
MEWNET-W0 Unit
PC(PLC) link 1 No.8
transmission
assurance Unit
relay No.9
Unit
No.10
Unit
R908A PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.11
Unit
R908B PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.12
Unit
R908C PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.13
Unit
R908D PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.14
Unit
R908E PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.15
Unit
R908F PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.16
17-24

WR909 FP-X
R9090
R9091
R9092
R9093
R9094
R9095
R9096
MEWNET-W0 Unit Turns on when Unit No. 8 is in the RUN mode.
R9097
PC(PLC) link No.8 Turns off when Unit No. 8 is in the PROG. mode.
1 operation Unit Turns on when Unit No. 9 is in the RUN mode.
R9098
mode relay No.9 Turns off when Unit No. 9 is in the PROG. mode.
R9099
R909A
R909B
R909C
R909D
R909E
R909F
17-25

WR910 FP-X
R9100 to
Not used -
R910F
R9110 HSC-CH0
R9111 HSC-CH1
R9112 HSC-CH2
R9113 HSC-CH3
- Turns on while the F166 (HC1S) and F167 (HC1R)
R9114 HSC-CH4
instructions are executed.
R9115 HSC-CH5
- Turns off when the F166 (HC1S) and F167 (HC1R)
R9116 HSC-CH6
instructions are completed.
R9117 Control HSC-CH7
Note1)
R9118 flag HSC-CH8
R9119 HSC-CH9 Note1)
R911A HSC-CHA Note1)
R911B HSC-CHB Note1)
R911C PLS-CH0
- Turns on while the pulses are being output by the F171
R911D PLS-CH1
Note2) (SPDH), F172 (PLSH), F173 (PWMH), F174 (SP0H) and
R911E PLS-CH2
Note2) F175 (SPSH) instructions.
R911F PLS-CH3
Note1) This relay is avaialble for the FP-X Ry type only.
Note2) This relay is available for the FP-X Tr type only.
17-26

17.1.3 Table of Special Data Registers for FP-X
FP-X (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read Writ-
-ing ing
Self-diagnostic error The self-diagnostic error code is stored here
DT90000 A N/A
code when a self-diagnostic error occurs.
DT90001 Not used - N/A N/A
When an error occurs at the I/O board for the
application cassette, the bit corresponding to
Position of abnormal the board will be set on.
DT90002 I/O board for A N/A
application cassette

When an error occurs at the intelligent board

for the application cassette, the bit
Position of abnormal corresponding to the board will be set on.
DT90006 A N/A
application cassette

Communication error Stores the error contents when using COM2
DT90009 A N/A
flag for COM2 port.
When the state of installation of FP-X
expansion I/O unit has changed since the
power was turned on, the bit corresponding to
Extension I/O verify the unit No. will turn on. Monitor using binary
DT90010 display. A N/A
error unit
17-27

Read Writ-
-ing ing
When the state of installation of an FP-X add-
on cassette has changed since the power was
turned on, the bit corresponding to the unit No.
Add-on cassette will turn on. Monitor using binary display.
DT90011 A N/A
verify error unit

One shift-out hexadecimal digit is stored in bit
Operation auxiliary positions 0 to 3 when the data shift instruction,
DT90014 register for data shift F105 (BSR) or F106 (BSL) is executed. The A A
instruction value can be read and written by executing F0
(MV) instruction.
The divided remainder (16-bit) is stored in

DT90015 DT90015 when the division instruction F32(%) A A
or F52(B%) instruction is executed. The
Operation auxiliary
divided remainder (32-bit) is stored in
register for division
DT90015 and DT90016 when the division
instruction
instruction F33(D%) or F53(DB%) is executed.
DT90016 The value can be read and written by A A
executing F0(MV) instruction.
After commencing operation, the address

Operation error where the first operation error occurred is
DT90017 A N/A
address (hold type) stored. Monitor the address using decimal
display.
The address where an operation error
occurred is stored. Each time an error occurs,
Operation error
the new address overwrites the previous
DT90018 address (non-hold A N/A
address. At the beginning of a scan, the
type)
address is 0. Monitor the address using
decimal display.
The data stored here is increased by one
every 2.5 ms. (H0 to HFFFF)
2.5 ms ring counter
DT90019 Note1) Difference between the values of the two A N/A
points (absolute value) x 2.5 ms = Elapsed
time between the two points.
The data stored here is increased by one
every 10.24 s. (H0 to HFFFF)
10 s ring counter Difference between the values of the two
DT90020 Note1) Note2) A N/A
points (absolute value) x 10.24 s = Elapsed
time between the two points.
Note) The exact value is 10.24 s.
Note1) It is renewed once at the beginning of each one scan.
Note2) As DT90020 is renewed even if F0(MV), DT90020 and D instruction is being executed, it can be
used to measure the block time.
17-28

Read Writ-
-ing ing
The current scan time is stored here. Scan
time is calculated using the formula:
Scan time (current
DT90022 Note) Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 A N/A
value)
ms
Example: K50 indicates 5 ms.
The minimum scan time is stored here. Scan
time is calculated using the formula:
Scan time (minimum
DT90023 Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 A N/A
value) Note)
ms
Example: K50 indicates 5 ms.
The maximum scan time is stored here. The
scan time is calculated using the formula:
Scan time (maximum
DT90024 Note) Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 A N/A
value)
ms
Example: K125 indicates 12.5 ms.
The mask conditions of interrupts using the
instruction can be stored here. Monitor using
Mask condition
binary display.
monitoring register
DT90025 A N/A
for interrupts
(INT0 to 13)

The value set by ICTL instruction is stored.
Periodical interrupt
DT90027 K0: periodical interrupt is not used. A N/A
interval (INT24)
K1 to K3000: 0.5ms to 1.5s or 10ms to 30s
K0: Sampling by the SMPL instruction
DT90028 Sample trace interval A N/A
K1 to K3000 (x 10 ms): 10 ms to 30 s
DT90030 Message 0
DT90031 Message 1 The contents of the specified message (Data
DT90032 Message 2 length) are stored in these special data
A N/A
DT90033 Message 3 registers when F149 (MSG) instruction is
DT90034 Message 4 executed.
DT90035 Message 5
Note) Scan time display is only possible in RUN mode, and shows the operation cycle time. (In PROG.
mode, the scan time for the operation is not displayed.) The maximum and minimum values are
cleared each time the mode is switched from RUN to PROG.
17-29

Read- Writ-
ing ing
The number of data that match the searched
Work1 for SRC
DT90037 data is stored here when F96 (SRC) A N/A
instructions
insturction is executed.
The position of the first matching data is
Work2 for SRC
DT90038 stored here when an F96 (SRC) instruction is A N/A
instructions
executed.
The potentiometer value (K0 to K1000) is
DT90040 Volume input 0 stored here. This value can be used in analog
timers and other applications by using the
A N/A
program to read this value to a data register.
DT90041 Volume input 1 V0DT90040
V1DT90041
For C60 only:
DT90042 Volume input 2 The potentiometer value (K0 to K1000) is
stored here. This value can be used in analog
timers and other applications by using the A N/A
program to read this value to a data register.
DT90043 Volume input 3 V2DT90042
V3DT90043
DT90044 System work Used by the system. A A
17-30

Read Writ-
-ing ing
A value can be written with F0 (MV) instruction
to reset the high-speed counter, disable
counting, continue or clear high-speed counter
instruction.
Control code setting
High-speed counter
DT90052 N/A A
control flag
17-31

Read Writ-
-ing ing
A value can be written with F0 (MV) instruction
to reset the high-speed counter, disable
counting, continue or clear high-speed counter
instruction.
Control code setting
Pulse output control

DT90052 N/A A
flag
17-32

Read Writ-
-ing ing
Hour and minute data of the Real-Time Clock
are stored here. This data is read-only data. It
cannot be overwritten.
Real-Time Clock
DT90053 A N/A
monitor (hour/minute)
The year, month, day, hour, minute, second

Real-Time Clock and day-of-the-week data for the Real-Time
DT90054 setting Clock is stored. The built-in Real-Time Clock
(minute/second) will operate correctly through the year 2099
and supports leap years. The Real-Time Clock
can be set by writing a value using a
Real-Time Clock
DT90055 programming tool software or a program that
setting (day/hour)
uses the F0 (MV) instruction.(see example for
DT90058)
Real-Time Clock
DT90056 A A
setting (year/month)
Real-Time Clock
DT90057 setting (day-of-the-
week)
As a day of the week is not automatially set on
FPWIN GR, fix what day is set to 00, and set
each value for 00 to 06.
17-33

Read- Writ-
ing ing
The Real-Time Clock is adjusted as follows.
When setting the Real-Time Clock by
program
By setting the highest bit of DT90058 to 1, the
time becomes that written to DT90054 to
DT90057 by F0 (MV) instruction. After the
time is set, DT90058 is cleared to 0. (Cannot
be performed with any instruction other than
F0 (MV) instruction.)
<Example>
Set the time to 12:00:00 on the 5th day when
the X0 turns on.
Note) If the values of DT90054 to DT90057

Real-Time Clock time are changed with the programming tool
setting and 30 software, the time will be set when the new
DT90058 A A
seconds correction values are written. Therefore, it is
register unnecessary to write to DT90058.
When the correcting times less than 30

seconds
By setting the lowest bit of DT90058 to 1, the
value will be moved up or down and become
exactly 0 seconds. After the correction is
completed, DT90058 is cleared to 0.
Example:
Correct to 0 seconds with X0: on
At the time of coorection, if between 0 and 29

seconds, it will be moved down, and if
between 30 and 59 seconds, it will be moved
up.
In the example above, if the time was 5
minutes 29 seconds, it will become 5 minutes
0 seconds;and, if the time was 5 minutes 35
seconds, it will become 6 minutes 0 seconds.
Communication error Error code is sotred here when a
DT90059 N/A N/A
code communication error occurs.
17-34

Read- Writ-
ing ing
Step ladder process
DT90060
(0 to 15)
Step ladder process
DT90061
(16 to 31)
Step ladder process
DT90062
(32 to 47)
Step ladder process
DT90063
(48 to 63)
Step ladder process
DT90064
(64 to 79)
Step ladder process
DT90065
(80 to 95)
Step ladder process
DT90066
(96 to 111)
Step ladder process
DT90067
(112 to 127) Indicates the startup condition of the step
Step ladder process ladder process. When the process starts up,
DT90068
(128 to 143) the bit corresponding to the process number
Step ladder process turns on.
DT90069
(144 to 159)
Step ladder process Monitor using binary display.
DT90070
(160 to 175)
A A
Step ladder process
DT90071
(176 to 191)
Step ladder process
DT90072
(192 to 207)
Step ladder process
DT90073 A programming tool software can be used to
(208 to 223)
Step ladder process write data.
DT90074
(224 to 239)
Step ladder process
DT90075
(240 to 255)
Step ladder process
DT90076
(256 to 271)
Step ladder process
DT90077
(272 to 287)
Step ladder process
DT90078
(288 to 303)
Step ladder process
DT90079
(304 to 319)
Step ladder process
DT90080
(320 to 335)
Step ladder process
DT90081
(336 to 351)
17-35

Read- Writ-
ing ing
Step ladder process
DT90082
(352 to 367)
Step ladder process
DT90083
(368 to 383)
Step ladder process
DT90084
(384 to 399)
Step ladder process
DT90085
(400 to 415)
Step ladder process
DT90086
(416 to 431) Indicates the startup condition of the step
Step ladder process ladder process. When the process starts up,
DT90087
(432 to 447) the bit corresponding to the process number
Step ladder process turns on .
DT90088
(448 to 463)
Step ladder process Monitor using binary display.
DT90089
(464 to 479)
A A
Step ladder process
DT90090
(480 to 495)
Step ladder process
DT90091
(496 to 511)
Step ladder process
DT90092 A programming tool software can be used to
(512 to 527)
Step ladder process write data.
DT90093
(528 to 543)
Step ladder process
DT90094
(544 to 559)
Step ladder process
DT90095
(560 to 575)
Step ladder process
DT90096
(576 to 591)
Step ladder process
DT90097
(592 to 607)
17-36

Read- Writ-
ing ing
Step ladder process
DT90098
(608 to 623)
Step ladder process
DT90099
(624 to 639)
Step ladder process
DT90100
(640 to 655)
Step ladder process
DT90101
(656 to 671)
Step ladder process
DT90102
(672 to 687)
Step ladder process
DT90103
(688 to 703)
Step ladder process
DT90104
(704 to 719)
Step ladder process
DT90105
(720 to 735)
Step ladder process
DT90106
(736 to 751)
Step ladder process Indicates the startup condition of the step
DT90107
(752 to 767) ladder process. When the process starts up,
Step ladder process the bit corresponding to the process number
DT90108
(768 to 783)
turns on.
Step ladder process
DT90109
(784 to 799)
Step ladder process Monitor using binary display
DT90110
(800 to 815)
A A
Step ladder process
DT90111
(816 to 831)
Step ladder process
DT90112
(832 to 847)
Step ladder process
DT90113
(848 to 863)
Step ladder process A programming tool software can be used to
DT90114
(864 to 879) write data.
Step ladder process
DT90115
(880 to 895)
Step ladder process
DT90116
(896 to 911)
Step ladder process
DT90117
(912 to 927)
Step ladder process
DT90118
(928 to 943)
Step ladder process
DT90119
(944 to 959)
Step ladder process
DT90120
(960 to 975)
Step ladder process
DT90121
(976 to 991)
Step ladder process
DT90122 (992 to 999)
(higher byte is not used.)
17-37

Read Writ
-ing -ing
COM1 SEND/RECV For details, refer to Programming Manual
DT90124 N/A N/A
instruction end code (F145 and F146).
COM2 SEND/RECV For details, refer to Programming Manual
DT90125 N/A N/A
instruction end code (F145 and F146).
Forced ON/OFF
DT90126 Used by the system N/A N/A
operating station display
DT90127
to Not used - N/A N/A
DT90139
The number of times the receiving operation
DT90140
is performed.
The current interval between two receiving
DT90141
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The minimum inerval between two receiving
DT90142
The maximum interval between two receiving
DT90143
MEWNET-W0 operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
A N/A
PC(PLC) link 0 status The number of times the sending operation is
DT90144
performed.
The current interval between two sending
DT90145
The minimum interval between two sending
DT90146
The maximum interval between two sending
DT90147
The number of times the receiving operation
DT90148
is performed.
The current interval between two receiving
DT90149
The minimum inerval between two receiving
DT90150
The maximum interval between two receiving
DT90151
MEWNET-W0 operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
A N/A
PC(PLC) link 1 status The number of times the sending operation is
DT90152
performed.
The current interval between two sending
DT90153
The minimum interval between two sending
DT90154
The maximum interval between two sending
DT90155
Area used for measurement of receiving
DT90156
MEWNET-W0 interval.
A N/A
PC(PLC) link 0 status Area used for measurement of sending
DT90157
interval.
17-38

Read- Writ-
ing ing
Area used for measurement of receiving
DT90158
MEWNET-W0 interval.
A N/A
PC(PLC) link 1 status Area used for measurement of sending
DT90159
interval.
MEWNET-W0
DT90160 Stores the unit No. of PC(PLC) link 0. A N/A
PC(PLC) link 0 unit No.
MEWNET-W0
DT90161 PC(PLC) link 0 error Stores the error contents of PC(PLC) link 0. A N/A
flag
DT90162
DT90169
Duplicated destination for PC(PLC) inter-link
DT90170
address
DT90171 Counts how many times a token is lost.
Counts how many times two or more tokens
DT90172
are detected.
DT90173 Counts how many times a signal is lost.
No. of times underfined commands have
DT90174
been received.
MEWNET-W0
No. of times sum check errors have occurred A N/A
DT90175 PC(PLC) link 0 status
during reception.
No. of times format errors have occurred in
DT90176
received data.
No. of times transmission errors have
DT90177
occurred.
DT90178 No. of times procedural errors have occurred.
No. of times overlapping parent units have
DT90179
occurred.
DT90180
DT90189
DT90194
DT90218
17-39

Read- Writ-
ing ing
Unit No. (Station No.)
0: Unit No. (Station No.) 1 to 8,
DT90219 selection for DT90220 to A N/A
1: Unit No. (Station No.) 9 to 16
DT90251
System regis-
DT90220
ter 40 and 41
PC(PLC)
System regis-
DT90221 link
ter 42 and 43
Unit
System regis- The contents of the system register settings
DT90222 (station)
ter 44 and 45 partaining to the PLC inter-link function for
No. 1 or 9
System regis- the various unit numbers are stored as
DT90223
ter 46 and 47 shown below.
System regis-
DT90224
ter 40 and 41 <Example>
PC(PLC)
System regis- When DT90219 is 0
DT90225 link
ter 42 and 43
Unit
System regis-
DT90226 (station)
ter 44 and 45
No. 2 or 10
System regis-
DT90227
ter 46 and 47
System regis-
DT90228
ter 40 and 41
PC(PLC)
System regis-
DT90229 link
ter 42 and 43
Unit A N/A
System regis-  When the system register 46 in the home
DT90230 (station)
ter 44 and 45 unit is in the standard setting, the values in
No. 3 or 11
System regis- the home unit are copied in the system
DT90231
ter 46 and 47 registers 46 and 47.
System regis- When the system register 46 in the home
DT90232
ter 40 and 41 unit is in the reverse setting, the registers
PC(PLC)
System regis- 40 to 45 and 47 corresponding to the home
DT90233 link
ter 42 and 43 unit mentioned in the left column will be
Unit
System regis- changed to 50 to 55 and 57, and the
DT90234 (station)
ter 44 and 45 system register 46 will be set as it is.
No. 4 or 12
System regis- Also, the system registers 40 to 45
DT90235 corresponding to other units will be
ter 46 and 47
System regis- changed to the values which the received
DT90236 values are corrected, and the registers 46
ter 40 and 41
PC(PLC) and 57 in the home unit are set for the
System regis-
DT90237 link registers 46 and 47.
ter 42 and 43
Unit
System regis-
DT90238 (station)
ter 44 and 45
No. 5 or 13
System regis-
DT90239
ter 46 and 47
17-40

Read- Writ-
ing ing
System regis-
DT90240 The contents of the system register
ter 40 and 41
settings partaining to the PLC inter-link
PC(PLC) System regis- function for the various unit numbers are
DT90241 link stored as shown below.
ter 42 and 43
Unit
(station) System regis- <Example> when DT90219 is 0.
DT90242
No. 6 or 14 ter 44 and 45
System regis-
DT90243
ter 46 and 47
System regis-
DT90244
ter 40 and 41
PC(PLC) System regis-

DT90245 link ter 42 and 43
 When the system register 46 in the
Unit (sta- home unit is in the standard setting, the A N/A
tion) No. 7 System regis- values in the home unit are copied in the
DT90246
or 15 ter 44 and 45 system registers 46 and 47.
When the system register 46 in the
System regis- home unit is in the reverse setting, the
DT90247
ter 46 and 47 registers 40 to 45 and 47 corresponding
System regis-
to the home unit mentioned in the left
DT90248 column will be changed to 50 to 55 and
ter 40 and 41
57, and the system register 46 will be
PC(PLC) System regis- set as it is.
DT90249 link ter 42 and 43 Also, the system registers 40 to 45
Unit (sta- corresponding to other units will be
tion) No. 8 System regis- changed to the values which the
DT90250
or 16 ter 44 and 45 received values are corrected, and the
System regis-
registers 46 and 57 in the home unit are
DT90251 set for the registers 46 and 47.
ter 46 and 47
DT90252 Not used

DT90253 Not used
N/A N/A
DT90254 Not used
DT90255 Not used
DT90256 Not used N/A N/A
17-41

Read- Writ-
ing ing
Counting area for input (X0) or
DT90300 Elapsed Lower words A A Note)
(X0, X1) of the main unit.
value
DT90301 area Higher words A A Note)
HSC-CH0
The target value is set when
DT90302 Target Lower words A A Note)
instructions F166 (HC1S) and
value
F167 (HC1R) are executed.
Counting area for input (X1) of

the main unit.
value
HSC-CH1
value

value
HSC-CH2
value
Counting area for input (X3) of

the main unit.
value
HSC-CH3
value

value
HSC-CH4
value
Note) Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 (DMV) instruction only.
Writing in the target value area is available by F166 (HC1S) and F167 (HC1R) instructions only.
17-42

Read- Writ-
ing ing
Counting area for input (X5) of A
DT90320 Elapsed Lower words A Note1)
the main unit.
value
A
DT90321 area Higher words A Note1)
HSC-CH5
The target value is set when A
DT90322 Target Lower words A Note1)
value
F167 (HC1R) are executed. A
Counting area for input (X6) or A

value
A
HSC-CH6
value

the main unit.
value
A
HSC-CH7
value

value
A
HSC-CH8
Note2)
value
Note1) Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 (DMV) instruction only.
Note2) Available for the FP-X Ry type only.
17-43

Read- Writ-
ing ing
the pulse I/O cassette.
value
A
HSC-CH9
Note2)
value

(X3, X4) of the pulse I/O
value
cassette. A
HSC-CHA
Note2)
value

the pulse I/O cassette.
value
A
HSC-CHB
Note2)
value
Note1) Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 (DMV) instruction only.
Note2) Available for the FP-X Tr type only.
17-44

FP-X Tr type FP-X (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
ing ing
Counting area for the pulse
output CH0 (Y0, Y1).
value
PLS-CH0 The target value is set when

DT90350 Lower words A A Note)
Target instructions F171 (SPDH),
value F172 (PLSH), F174 (SP0H)
DT90351 area Higher words and F175 (SPSH) are A A Note)
executed.
value

executed.
value

executed.
value

executed.
Writing in the target value area is available by F171 (SPDH), F172 (PLSH), F174 (SP0H) and
F175 (SPSH) instructions only.
17-45

FP-X Tr type FP-X (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
ing ing
DT90370 HSC-CH0 When HSC control is executed A N/A
DT90371 HSC-CH1 by F0 (MV)S, DT90052 A N/A
DT90372 HSC-CH2 instruction, the setting value for A N/A
DT90373 HSC-CH3 the target CH is stored in each A N/A
DT90374 HSC-CH4 CH. A N/A
DT90375 HSC-CH5 A N/A
DT90376 Control flag monitor HSC-CH6 A N/A
DT90377 area HSC-CH7 A N/A
DT90378
DT90379
DT90380 PLS-CH0 A N/A
17-46

FP-X Ry type FP-X (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
ing ing
Counting area for output
(Y100, Y101) of the pulse I/O
value
cassette.

executed.
Counting area for output
(Y200, Y201) of the pulse I/O
value
cassette.

executed.
DT90360 HSC-CH0 When HSC control is executed A N/A
DT90361 HSC-CH1 by F0 (MV)S, DT90052 A N/A
DT90362 HSC-CH2 instruction, the setting value A N/A
DT90363 HSC-CH3 for the target CH is stored in A N/A
DT90364 HSC-CH4 each CH. A N/A
DT90366 Control flag monitor HSC-CH6 A N/A
DT90367 area HSC-CH7 A N/A
DT90370 HSC-CHA A N/A
DT90371 HSC-CHB A N/A
17-47

17.2 Table of Basic Instructions
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps *3
FP0R
FP-X
FP
FP2
Name Boolean Symbol Description
Sequence basic instructions

Start Begins a logic operation with a Form A 1
ST
(normally open) contact. (2)
Start Not Begins a logic operation with a Form B 1
ST/
(normally closed) contact. (2)
Out Outputs the operated result to the specified 1
OT
output. (2)
Not Inverts the operated result up to this
/ 1
instruction.
AND Connects a Form A (normally open) contact 1
AN
serially. (2)
AND Not Connects a Form B (normally closed) contact 1
AN/
serially. (2)
OR Connects a Form A (normally open) contact 1
OR
in parallel. (2)
OR Not Connects a Form B (normally closed) contact 1
OR/
in parallel. (2)
Leading Begins a logic operation only for one scan
edge ST when the leading edge of the trigger is 2 *2 *2
start detected.
Trailing Begins a logic operation only for one scan
edge ST when the trailing edge of the trigger is 2 *2 *2
start detected.
Leading Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
edge AN serially only for one scan when the leading 2 *2 *2
AND edge of the trigger is detected.
Trailing Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
edge AN serially only for one scan when the trailing 2 *2 *2
AND edge of the trigger is detected.
Leading Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
edge OR OR in parallel only for one scan when the leading 2 *2 *2
edge of the trigger is detected.
Trailing Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
edge OR OR in parallel only for one scan when the trailing 2 *2 *2
edge of the trigger is detected.
Leading Outputs the operated result to the specified
edge out OT output only for one scan when leading edge 2
of the trigger is detected. (for pulse relay)
Trailing Outputs the operated result to the specified
edge out OT output only for one scan when trailing edge of 2
the trigger is detected. (for pulse relay)
Alterna- ALT Inverts the output condition (on/off) each time
3
tive out the leading edge of the trigger is detected.
AND ANS Connects the multiple instruction blocks
serially. 1
stack
OR stack ORS Connects the multiple instruction blocks in
parallel. 1
: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially

*1) The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models.
*2) This instruction is available for FP-X Ver. 2.0 or later, and FP Ver. 3.10 or later.
*3) In the FP2/FP2SH/10SH, when using X1280, Y1280, R1120 (special internal relay included), L1280, T256, C256 or
anything beyond for the ST, ST/, OT, AN, AN/, OR and OR/ instructions, the number of steps is shown in parentheses.
Also, in the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when a relay number has an index modifier, the number of steps is shown in
parentheses. For the FP and FP-X, the number of steps varies according to the relay number to be used.
17-48

FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps *5 *6
FP0/FP-e
FP0R
FP-X
FP
FP2
Push stack PSHS Stores the operated result up to this

1
instruction. *2
Read stack RDS Reads the operated result stored by
1
the PSHS instruction. *2
Pop stack POPS Reads and clears the operated result
1
stored by the PSHS instruction
Leading edge DF Turns on the contact for only one
differential scan when the leading edge of the 1
trigger is detected.
Trailing edge DF/ Turns on the contact for only one
differential scan when the trailing edge of the 1
trigger is detected.
Leading edge DFI Turns on the contact for only one
differential scan when the leading edge of the
trigger is detected. The leading edge 1
(initial execution
type) detection is possible on the first scan.
Set SET Output is set to and held at on.
3
Reset RST Output is set to and held at off.

3
Keep KP Outputs at set trigger and holds until 1

reset trigger turns on. (2)
No operation NOP No operation. 1
Basic function instructions
On-delay timer TML After set value “n” x 0.001 seconds, 3
timer contact “a” is set to on. (4) *3
TMR After set value “n” x 0.01 seconds, 3
TMX After set value “n” x 0.1 seconds, 3
TMY After set value “n” x 1 second, timer 4
contact “a” is set to on. (5) *3
Auxiliary timer F137 After set value “S” x 0.01 seconds,
(16-bit) (STMR) the specified output and R900D are 5
set to on.
Auxiliary timer F183 After set value “S” x 0.01 seconds,
(32-bit) (DSTM) the specified output and R900D are 7
set to on.
Time constant F182 Executes the filter processing for the
9
processing specified input.
Counter CT Decrements from the preset value “n”
3
(4) *3

*1) The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models.
*2) The allowable number of using the PSHS and RDS instruction depends on the models.
*3) For FP2SH, FP10SH and FP-X Ver2.0 or later, any device can be set for the setting value of counter or timer instruction.
*4) This instruction is available for FP-X Ver. 2.0 or later.
*5) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when using Y1280, R1120 (special internal relay included), L1280 or anything beyond for the
KP instruction, the number of steps is shown in parentheses. Also, in the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when a relay number has
an index modifier, the number of steps is shown in parentheses.
*6) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when timer 256 or higher, or counter 255 or lower, is used, the number of steps is the number
in parentheses. Also, in the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when a timer number or counter number has an index modifier, the
number of steps is the number in parentheses. For the FP and FP-X, the number of steps varies according to the
specified timer number or counter number.
17-49

FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
FP
FP2
UP/DOWN F118 Increments or decrements from the

counter (UDC) preset value “S” based on up/down
input. 5
Shift SR Shifts one bit of 16-bit [word internal

register relay (WR)] data to the left. 1
(2)
*1
Left/right F119 Shifts one bit of 16-bit data range

shift (LRSR) specified by “D1” and “D2” to the left or
register to the right. 5
Control instructions
Master MC Starts the master control program.
control 2
relay
Master MCE Ends the master control program.
control 2
relay end
Jump JP The program jumps to the label 2
instruction and continues from there. (3)
*2
Label LBL 1
Auxiliary F19 The program jumps to the label
3
jump (SJP) instruction specified by “S” and
continues from there.
1
Label LBL
Loop LOOP The program jumps to the label 4
instruction and continues from there (the (5)
number of jumps is set in “S”). *3
Label LBL
1
Break BRK Stops program execution when the
predetermined trigger turns on in the 1
TEST/RUN mode only.
*1) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when internal relay WR240 or higher is used, the number of steps is the number in
parentheses. Also, in the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when the specified internal relay number (word address) has an index
modifier, the number of steps is the number in parentheses.
*2) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when the number “n” in a jump instruction has an index modifier, the number of steps
isthenumber in parentheses.
*3) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when the number “n” in a loop instruction has an index modifier, the number of steps is the
number in parentheses.
17-50

FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
FP
FP2
End ED The operation of program is ended.

1
Indicates the end of a main program.
Conditional CNDE The operation of program is ended when
1
end the trigger turns on.
Eject EJECT Adds page break for use when printing.
1
Step ladder instructions

Start step SSTP The start of program “n” for process
3
control
Next step NSTL Starts the specified process “n” and
clears the process currently started. 3
(Scan execution type)
NSTP Starts the specified process “n” and
clears the process currently started. 3
(Pulse execution type)
Clear step CSTP Resets the specified process “n”.
3
Clear multi- SCLR Resets multiple processes specified by
5
ple steps “n1” and “n2”. *1
Step end STPE End of step ladder area
1
Subroutine instructions
Subroutine CALL When the trigger is on: Executes the
call subroutine. 2
When the trigger is off: Not execute the (3)
subroutine. The output in the *2
subroutine is maintained.
Output off FCAL When the trigger is on: Executes the
type subroutine. 4
subroutine When the trigger is off: Not execute the (5)
call subroutine. But, the output in *2
the subroutine is cleared.
Subroutine SUB Indicates the start of the subroutine
1
entry program “n”.
Subroutine RET Ends the subroutine program.
1
return
Interrupt instructions
Interrupt INT Indicates the start of the interrupt program
1
“n”.
Interrupt IRET Ends the interrupt program.
1
return
Interrupt ICTL Select interrupt enable/disable or clear in
5
control “S1” and “S2” and execute.
*1) Available for FP-e only.
*2) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when the number “n” of a subroutine program has an index modifier, the number of steps is
the number in parentheses.
17-51

FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
FP
FP2
Special setting instructions

Communica- SYS1 Change the communication conditions
tion condi- for the COM port or tool port based on
tions setting the contents specified by the character *1 *1
constant.
Password Change the password specified by the
setting PLC based on the contents specified by *2
the character constant.
Interrupt Set the interrupt input based on the
setting contents specified by the character
constant.
PLC link time Set the system setting time when a PLC
setting link is used, based on the contents 13
specified by the character constant.
MEWTOCOL- Change the communication conditions of
COM the COM. port or tool port for
response MEWTOCOL-COM based on the
control contents specified by the character
constant.
High-speed Change the operation mode of the high-
counter speed counter, based on the contents
operation specified by the character constant.
*3 *3
mode
changing
System SYS2 Change the setting value of the system
registers register for the PLC link function.
“No. 40 to 7
No. 47”
changing
*1) With FP-X Ver2.0 or later, and FP Ver 3.10 or later, the baud rate can be selected from 300, 600 or 1200 bps.
*2) With FP 32k type, the 8-digit password can be selected.
*3) With FP 32k type and FP-X Ver1.10 or later, it can be used.
17-52

FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
FP
FP2
Data compare instructions

16-bit ST= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-
5
bit data in the comparative condition “S1=S2”.
data
ST<> Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-
compare bit data in the comparative condition “S1<S2” 5
(Start) or “S1>S2”.
ST> Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-
5
bit data in the comparative condition “S1>S2”.
ST>= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-
bit data in the comparative condition “S1>S2” 5
or “S1=S2”.
ST< Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-
5
bit data in the comparative condition “S1<S2”.
ST<= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-
bit data in the comparative condition “S1<S2” 5
or “S1=S2”.
16-bit AN= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
serially by comparing two 16-bit data in the 5
data
comparative condition “S1=S2”.
compare Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
AN<>
(AND) serially by comparing two 16-bit data in the 5
comparative condition “S1<S2” or “S1>S2”.
AN> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
comparative condition “S1>S2”.
AN>= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
comparative condition “S1>S2” or “S1=S2”.
AN< Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
comparative condition “S1<S2”.
AN<= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
comparative condition “S1<S2” or “S1=S2”.
16-bit OR= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
parallel by comparing two 16-bit data in the 5
data
comparative condition “S1=S2”.
compare Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
OR<>
(OR) parallel by comparing two 16-bit data in the 5
comparative condition “S1<S2” or “S1>S2”.
OR> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
comparative condition “S1>S2”.
OR>= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
comparative condition “S1>S2” or “S1=S2”.
OR< Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
comparative condition “S1<S2”.
OR<= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
comparative condition “S1<S2” or “S1=S2”.
17-53

FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
FP
FP2
32-bit STD= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-

bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, 9
data S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
compare STD<> Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-
(Start)
S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
STD> Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-
S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
STD>= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-
S1)>(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
STD< Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-
S1)<(S2+1, S2)”.
STD<= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-
S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
32-bit AND= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
data comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
compare AND<> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the
(AND) 9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”
or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
AND> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
AND>= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”
or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
AND< Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”.
AND<= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
9
or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
32-bit ORD= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
data comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
compare ORD<> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the
(OR) 9
or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
ORD> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
ORD>= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”
or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
ORD< Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”.
ORD<= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
9
or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
17-54

FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
FP
FP2
Floating STF= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-

point S1)=(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1
type real STF<> Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-

number S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1
data STF> Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-
compare *1 *1
S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
(Start) Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-
STF>=
S1)>(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1
STF< Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-

S1)<(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1
STF<= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-

S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1
Floating ANF= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact

point comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1
type real ANF<> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact

number 9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” *1 *1
data or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
ANF> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
compare
(AND) comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1
ANF>= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact

9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)” *1 *1
or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
ANF< Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1
ANF<= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact

9
or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
Floating ORF= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
point comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1
type real ORF<> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in

number 9
data or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
ORF> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
compare
(OR) comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1
ORF>= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in

9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)” *1 *1
or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
ORF< Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1
ORF<= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in

9
or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
*1) This instruction is available for FP-X V1.10 or later and FP 32k type
17-55

17.3 Table of High-level Instructions
The high-level instructions are expressed by the prefixes “F” or “P” with numbers. For most of the high-level
instructions, “F” and “P” types are available. The differences between the two types are explained as follows:
- Instructions with the prefix “F” are executed in every scan while its trigger is in the on.
- Instructions with the prefix “P” are executed only when the leading edge of its trigger is detected.
For the FP0/FP0R/FP/FP-X, the P type high-level instructions are not available.
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Boo- Ope-
FP
FP2
Name Description
ber lean rand
Data transfer instructions

F0 16-bit data MV S, D (S)(D)
5
P0 move PMV
F1 32-bit data DMV S, D (S+1, S)(D+1, D)
7
P1 move PDMV
F2 16-bit data MV S, D
P2 invert and PMV/ (S)(D) 5
move
F3 32-bit data DMV/ S, D
P3 invert and PDMV/ (S+1, S)(D+1, D) 7
move
F4 Reading of GETS S, D The head word No. of the specified slot is
P4 head word PGETS read.
5
No. of the *1 *1
specified slot
F5 Bit data BTM S, n, The specified one bit in “S” is transferred to
P5 move PBTM D the specified one bit in “D”. The bit is 7
specified by “n”.
F6 Hexadecimal DGT S, n, d The specified one digit in “S” is transferred
P6 digit (4-bit) PDGT to the specified one digit in “D”. The digit is 7
data move specified by “n”.
F7 Two 16-bit MV2 S1, (S1)(D),
7
P7 data move PMV2 S2, D (S2)(D+1)
F8 Two 32-bit DMV2 S1, (S1+1, S1)(D+1, D),
11
P8 data move PDMV2 S2, D (S2+1, S2)(D+3, D+2)
F10 Block move BKMV S1, The data between “S1” and “S2” is
7
P10 PBKMV S2, D transferred to the area starting at “D”.
F11 Block copy COPY S, D1, The data of “S” is transferred to the all area
7
P11 PCOPY D2 between “D1” and “D2”.
F12 Data read ICRD S1, The data stored in the expansion memory
from EEP- S2, D of the EEP-ROM specified by “S1” and “S2” 11
*2
ROM are transferred to the area starting at “D”.
P13 Data write to PICWT S1, The data specified by “S1” and “S2” are
11
EEP-ROM S2, D transferred to the EEP-ROM starting at “D”. *2
from F-ROM S2, D of the F-ROM specified by “S1” and “S2” 11
are transferred to the area starting at “D”.
P13 Data write to PICWT S1, The data specified by “S1” and “S2” are
11
F-ROM S2, D transferred to the F-ROM starting at “D”.
P12 from IC card PICRD S2, D of the IC card specified by “S1” and “S2” 11
are transferred to the area starting at “D”.
F13 Data write to ICWT S1, The data specified by “S1” and “S2” are
P13 IC card PICWT S2, D transferred to the IC card expansion 11
memory area starting at “D”.
F14 Program read PGRD S The program specified using “S” is
P14 from IC PPGRD transferred into the CPU from IC memory 3
memory card card and executes it.
*1) This instruction is available for FP2/FP2SH Ver. 1.5 or later.FP10SH cannot be used
*2) This instruction is available for FP0 Ver. 2.0 or later and FP-e.
17-56

FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Ope-
FP
FP2
Name Boo-lean Description
ber rand
F15 16-bit data XCH D1, D2 (D1)(D2), (D2)(D1)

5
P15 exchange PXCH
F16 32-bit data DXCH D1, D2 (D1+1, D1)(D2+1, D2)
5
P16 exchange PDXCH (D2+1, D2)(D1+1, D1)
F17 Higher/lower SWAP D The higher byte and lower byte of “D”
P17 byte in 16-bit PSWAP are exchanged. 3
data exchange
F18 16-bit data BXCH D1, Exchange the data between “D1” and
P18 block PBXCH D2, D3 “D2” with the data specified by “D3”. 7
exchange
Control instruction
F19 Auxiliary jump SJP S The program jumps to the label
instruction specified by “S” and 3
continues from there.
Binary arithmetic instructions
F20 16-bit data + S, D (D)+(S)(D)
5
P20 addition P+
F21 32-bit data D+ S, D (D+1, D)+(S+1, S)(D+1, D)
7
P21 addition PD+
F22 16-bit data + S1, (S1)+(S2)(D)
7
P22 addition P+ S2, D
F23 32-bit data D+ S1, (S1+1, S1)+(S2+1, S2)(D+1, D)
11
P23 addition PD+ S2, D
F25 16-bit data - S, D (D)-(S)(D)
5
P25 subtraction P-
F26 32-bit data D- S, D (D+1, D)-(S+1, S)(D+1, D)
7
P26 subtraction PD-
F27 16-bit data - S1, (S1)-(S2)(D)
7
P27 subtraction P- S2, D
F28 32-bit data D- S1, (S1+1, S1)-(S2+1, S2)(D+1, D)
11
P28 subtraction PD- S2, D
F30 16-bit data * S1, (S1)X(S2)(D+1, D)
7
P30 multiplication P* S2, D
F31 32-bit data D* S1, (S1+1, S1)X(S2+1, S2)(D+3, D+2,
11
P31 multiplication PD* S2, D D+1, D)
F32 16-bit data % S1, (S1)(S2)quotient (D)
7
P32 division P% S2, D remainder (DT9015)
F33 32-bit data D% S1, (S1+1, S1)(S2+1, S2)quotient (D+1,
P33 division PD% S2, D D) 11
remainder (DT9016, DT9015)
F34 16-bit data *W S1, (S1)X(S2)(D)
P34 multiplication P*W S2, D
7
(result in 16
bits)
F35 16-bit data +1 D (D)+1(D)
3
P35 increment P+1
F36 32-bit data D+1 D (D+1, D)+1(D+1, D)
3
P36 increment PD+1
F37 16-bit data -1 D (D)-1(D)
3
P37 decrement P-1
F38 32-bit data D-1 D (D+1, D)-1(D+1, D)
3
P38 decrement PD-1
F39 32-bit data D*D S1, (S1+1, S1)x(S2+1, S2)(D+1, D)
P39 multiplication PD*D S2, D
11
(result in 32
bits)
17-57

FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Boo-
FP
FP2
Name Operand Description
ber lean
BCD arithmetic instructions

F40 4-digit BCD B+ S, D (D)+(S)(D)
5
P40 data addition PB+
F41 8-digit BCD DB+ S, D (D+1, D)+(S+1, S)(D+1, D)
7
P41 data addition PDB+
F42 4-digit BCD B+ S1, S2, D (S1)+(S2)(D)
7
P42 data addition PB+
F43 8-digit BCD DB+ S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)+(S2+1, S2)(D+1, D)
11
P43 data addition PDB+
F45 4-digit BCD data B- S, D (D)-(S)(D)
5
P45 subtraction PB-
F46 8-digit BCD data DB- S, D (D+1, D)-(S+1, S)(D+1, D)
7
P46 subtraction PDB-
F47 4-digit BCD data B- S1, S2, D (S1)-(S2)(D)
7
P47 subtraction PB-
F48 8-digit BCD data DB- S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)-(S2+1, S2)(D+1, D)
11
P48 subtraction PDB-
F50 4-digit BCD data B* S1, S2, D (S1)X(S2)(D+1, D)
7
P50 multiplication PB*
F51 8-digit BCD data DB* S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)X(S2+1, S2)(D+3, D+2,
11
P51 multiplication PDB* D+1, D)
F52 4-digit BCD data B% S1, S2, D (S1)(S2)quotient (D)
7
P52 division PB% remainder (DT9015)
F53 8-digit BCD data DB% S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)(S2+1, S2)quotient
P53 division PDB% (D+1, D) 11
remainder (DT9016, DT9015)
F55 4-digit BCD data B+1 D (D)+1(D)
3
P55 increment PB+1
F56 8-digit BCD data DB+1 D (D+1, D)+1(D+1, D)
3
P56 increment PDB+1
F57 4-digit BCD data B-1 D (D)-1(D)
3
P57 decrement PB-1
F58 8-digit BCD data DB-1 D (D+1, D)-1(D+1, D)
3
P58 decrement PDB-1
Data compare instructions
F60 16-bit data CMP S1, S2 (S1)>(S2)R900A: on
P60 compare PCMP (S1)=(S2)R900B: on 5
(S1)<(S2)R900C: on
F61 32-bit data DCMP S1, S2 (S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)R900A: on
P61 compare PDCMP (S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)R900B: on 9
(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)R900C: on
F62 16-bit data band WIN S1, S2, (S1)>(S3)R900A: on
P62 compare PWIN S3 (S2)< or=(S1)< or=(S3)R900B: on 7
(S1)<(S2)R900C: on
17-58

FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Boo- Ope-
FP
FP2
Name Description
ber lean rand
F63 32-bit data DWIN S1, S2, (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3)R900A: on

P63 band PDWIN S3 (S2+1, S2)< or=(S1+1, S1)< or=(S3+1,
13
compare S3)R900B: on
(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)R900C: on
F64 Block data BCMP S1, S2, Compares the two blocks beginning with
7
P64 compare PBCMP S3 “S2” and “S3” to see if they are equal.
Logic operation instructions
F65 16-bit data WAN S1, S2, D (S1) AND (S2)(D)
7
P65 AND PWAN
F66 16-bit data WOR S1, S2, D (S1) OR (S2)(D)
7
P66 OR PWOR
F67 16-bit data XOR S1, S2, D
{(S1) AND (S2)} OR {(S1) AND (S2)}(D)
P67 exclusive PXOR 7
OR
F68 16-bit data XNR S1, S2, D
{(S1) AND (S2)} OR {(S1) AND (S2)}(D)
P68 exclusive PXNR 7
NOR
F69 16-bit data WUNI S1, S2,
([S1] AND [S3]) OR ([S2] AND [S3])(D)
P69 unite PWUNI S3, D
When (S3) is H0, (S2)(D) 9
When (S3) is HFFFF, (S1) (D)
Data conversion instructions

F70 Block check BCC S1, S2, Creates the code for checking the data
P70 code PBCC S3, D specified by “S2” and “S3” and stores it in
calculation “D”. 9
The calculation method is specified by
“S1”.
F71 Hexadecima HEXA S1, S2, D Converts the hexadecimal data specified
P71 l data  PHEXA by “S1” and “S2” to ASCII code and stores
ASCII code it in “D”. 7
Example: HABCD H 42 41 44 43
B A D C
F72 ASCII code AHEX S1, S2, D Converts the ASCII code specified by “S1”
P72  Hexadeci- PAHEX and “S2” to hexadecimal data and stores
mal data it in “D”. 7
Example: H 44 43 42 41  HCDAB
D C B A
F73 4-digit BCD BCDA S1, S2, D Converts the four digits of BCD data
P73 data  PBCDA specified by “S1” and “S2” to ASCII code
ASCII code and stores it in “D”. 7
Example: H1234 H 32 31 34 33
2 1 4 3
F74 ASCII code ABCD S1, S2, D Converts the ASCII code specified by “S1”
P74  4-digit PABCD and “S2” to four digits of BCD data and
BCD data stores it in “D”. 9
Example: H 34 33 32 31  H3412
4 3 2 1
F75 16-bit binary BINA S1, S2, D Converts the 16 bits of binary data
P75 data  PBINA specified
ASCII code by “S1” to ASCII code and stores it in “D”
7
(area of “S2” bytes).
Example: K-100 H 30 30 31 2D 20 20
0 0 1 -
17-59

FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Ope-
FP
FP2
Name Boolean Description
ber rand
F76 ASCII code  ABIN S1, S2, Converts the ASCII code specified by
P76 16-bit binary PABIN D “S1” and “S2” to 16 bits of binary data
data and stores it in “D”. 7
Example: H 30 30 31 2D 20 20  K-100
0 0 1 -
F77 32-bit binary DBIA S1, S2, Converts the 32 bits of binary data
P77 data  ASCII PDBIA D (S1+1,
11
code S1) to ASCII code and stores it in D
(area of “S2” bytes).
F78 ASCII code  DABI S1, S2, Converts the ASCII code specified by
P78 32-bit binary PDABI D “S1” and “S2” to 32 bits of binary data 11
data and stores it in (D+1, D).
F80 16-bit binary BCD S, D Converts the 16 bits of binary data
P80 data  4-digit PBCD specified by “S” to four digits of BCD
5
BCD data data and stores it in “D”.
Example: K100  H100
F81 4-digit BCD BIN S, D Converts the four digits of BCD data
P81 data  16-bit PBIN specified by “S” to 16 bits of binary data
5
binary data and stores it in “D”.
Example: H100  K100
F82 32-bit binary DBCD S, D Converts the 32 bits of binary data
P82 data  8-digit PDBCD specified by (S+1, S) to eight digits of
7
BCD data BCD data and stores it in (D+1, D).
F83 8-digit BCD DBIN S, D Converts the eight digits of BCD data
P83 data  32-bit PDBIN specified by (S+1, S) to 32 bits of binary 7
binary data data and stores it in (D+1, D).
F84 16-bit data INV D Inverts each bit of data of “D”.
P84 invert (com- PINV 3
plement of 1)
F85 16-bit data NEG D Inverts each bit of data of “D” and adds
P85 complement PNEG 1 (inverts the sign). 3
of 2
F86 32-bit data DNEG D Inverts each bit of data of (D+1, D) and
P86 complement PDNEG adds 1 (inverts the sign). 3
of 2
F87 16-bit data ABS D Gives the absolute value of the data of
3
P87 absolute PABS “D”.
F88 32-bit data DABS D Gives the absolute value of the data of
3
P88 absolute PDABS (D+1, D).
F89 16-bit data EXT D Extends the 16 bits of data in “D” to 32
P89 sign extension PEXT bits in (D+1, D). 3
F90 Decode DECO S, n, D Decodes part of the data of “S” and

P90 PDECO stores 7
it in “D”. The part is specified by “n”.
F91 7-segment SEGT S, D Converts the data of “S” for use in a 7-
P91 decode PSEGT segment display and stores it in (D+1, 5
D).
F92 Encode ENCO S, n, D Encodes part of the data of “S” and
P92 PENCO stores it in “D”. The part is specified by 7
“n”.
F93 16-bit data UNIT S, n, D The least significant digit of each of the
P93 combine PUNIT “n” words of data beginning at “S” are 7
stored (united) in order in “D”.
17-60

FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Boo- Ope-
FP
FP2
Name Description
ber lean rand
F94 16-bit data distribute DIST S, n, Each of the digits of the data of “S”
P94 PDIST D are stored in (distributed to) the least
7
significant digits of the areas
beginning at “D”.
F95 Character ASCII ASC S, D Twelve characters of the character
P95 code PASC constants of “S” are converted to
15
ASCII code and stored in “D” to
“D+5”.
F96 16-bit table data SRC S1, The data of “S1” is searched for in
P96 search PSRC S2, the areas in the range “S2” to “S3”
7
S3 and the result is stored in DT9037
and DT9038
F97 32-bit table data DSRC S1, The data of (S1+1, S1) is searched
P97 search PDSRC S2, for in the 32-bit data designated by
S3 “S3”, beginning from “S2”, and the 11
result if stored in DT90037 and
DT90038.
Data shift instructions
F98 Data table shift-out CMPR D1, Transfer “D2” to “D3”. Any parts of
P98 and compress PCMPR D2, the data between “D1” and “D2” that
7
D3 are 0 are compressed, and shifted in
order toward “D2”.
F99 Data table shift-in CMPW S, D1, Transfer “S” to “D1”. Any parts of the
P99 and compress PCMP D2 data between “D1” and “D2” that are
7
W 0 are compressed, and shifted in
order toward “D2”.
F100 Right shift of SHR D, n Shifts the “n” bits of “D” to the right.
P100 multiple bits (n bits) PSHR 5
in a 16-bit data
F101 Left shift of multiple SHL D, n Shifts the “n” bits of “D” to the left.
P101 bits (n bits) in a 16- PSHL 5
bit data
F102 Right shift of n bits DSHR D, n Shifts the “n” bits of the 32-bit data
P102 in a 32-bit data PDSHR area specified by (D+1, D) to the 5
right.
F103 Left shift of n bits in DSHL D, n Shifts the “n” bits of the 32-bit data
5
P103 a 32-bit data PDSHL area specified by (D+1, D) to the left.
F105 Right shift of one BSR D Shifts the one digit of data of “D” to
P105 hexadecimal digit (4- PBSR the right. 3
bit)
F106 Left shift of one BSL D Shifts the one digit of data of “D” to
P106 hexadecimal digit PBSL the left. 3
(4-bit)
F108 Right shift of BITR D1, Shifts the “n” bits of data range by
7
P108 multiple bits (n bits) PBITR D2, n “D1” and “D2” to the right.
F109 Left shift of multiple BITL D1, Shifts the “n” bits of data range by
7
P109 bits (n bits) PBITL D2, n “D1” and “D2” to the left.
F110 Right shift of one WSHR D1, Shifts the one word of the areas by
5
P110 word (16-bit) PWSHR D2 “D1” and “D2” to the right.
F111 Left shift of one WSHL D1, Shifts the one word of the areas by
5
P111 word (16-bit) PWSHL D2 “D1” and “D2” to the left.
F112 Right shift of one WBSR D1, Shifts the one digit of the areas by
P112 hexadecimal digit (4- PWBSR D2 “D1” and “D2” to the right. 5
bit)
F113 Left shift of one WBSL D1, Shifts the one digit of the areas by
P113 hexadecimal digit (4- PWBSL D2 “D1” and “D2” to the left. 5
bit)
17-61

FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num Ope-
FP
FP2
-ber rand
FIFO instructions
F115 FIFO buffer define FIFT n, D The “n” words beginning from “D” are
5
P115 PFIFT defined in the buffer.
F116 Data read from FIFR S, D The oldest data beginning from “S”
P116 FIFO buffer PFIFR that was written to the buffer is read 5
and stored in “D”.
F117 Data write into FIFW S, D The data of “S” is written to the buffer
5
P117 FIFO buffer PFIFW starting from “D”.
Basic function instructions
F118 UP/DOWN counter UDC S, D Counts up or down from the value
preset in “S” and stores the elapsed 5
value in “D”.
F119 Left/right shift LRSR D1, Shifts one bit to the left or right with
register D2 the area between “D1” and “D2” as 5
the register.
Data rotate instructions
F120 16-bit data right ROR D, n Rotates the “n” bits in data of “D” to
5
P120 rotate PROR the right.
F121 16-bit data left ROL D, n Rotates the “n” bits in data of “D” to
5
P121 rotate PROL the left.
F122 16-bit data right RCR D, n Rotates the “n” bits in 17-bit area
P122 rotate with carry PRCR consisting of “D” plus the carry flag 5
flag (R9009) data (R9009) data to the right.
F123 16-bit data left RCL D, n Rotates the “n” bits in 17-bit area
P123 rotate with carry PRCL consisting of “D” plus the carry flag 5
flag (R9009) data (R9009) data to the left.
F125 32-bit data right DROR D, n Rotates the number of bits specified
P125 rotate PDROR by “n” of the double words data (32
5
bits) specified by (D+1, D) to the
right.
F126 32-bit data left DROL D, n Rotates the number of bits specified
P126 rotate PDROL by “n” of the double words data (32 5
bits) specified by (D+1, D) to the left.
F127 32-bit data right DRCR D, n Rotates the number of bits specified
P127 rotate with carry PDRCR by “n” of the double words data (32
5
flag (R9009) data bits) specified by (D+1, D) to the right
together with carry flag (R9009) data.
F128 32-bit data left DRCL D, n Rotates the number of bits specified
P128 rotate with carry PDRCL by “n” of the double words data (32
5
flag (R9009) data bits) specified by (D+1, D) to the left
together with carry flag (R9009) data.
Bit manipulation instructions
F130 16-bit data bit set BTS D, n Sets the value of bit position “n” of
5
P130 PBTS the data of “D” to 1.
F131 16-bit data bit BTR D, n Sets the value of bit position “n” of
5
P131 reset PBTR the data of “D” to 0.
F132 16-bit data invert BTI D, n Inverts the value of bit position “n” of
5
P132 PBTI the data of “D”.
F133 16-bit data bit test BTT D, n Tests the value of bit position “n” of
P133 PBTT the data of “D” and outputs the result 5
to R900B.
F135 Number of on (1) BCU S, D Stores the number of on bits in the
5
P135 bits in 16-bit data PBCU data of “S” in “D”.
F136 Number of on (1) DBCU S, D Stores the number of on bits in the
7
P136 bits in 32-bit data PDBCU data of (S+1, S) in “D”.
17-62

FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num Boo- Ope-
FP
FP2
Name Description
-ber lean rand
Basic function instruction

F137 Auxiliary STMR S, D Turns on the specified output and
5
timer (16-bit) R900D after 0.01 s  set value.
Special instructions
F138 Hours, min- HMSS S, D Converts the hour, minute and second
P138 utes and sec- PHMSS data of (S+1, S) to seconds data, and
5
onds to the converted data is stored in (D+1, D). *1
seconds data
F139 Seconds to SHMS S, D Converts the seconds data of (S+1, S)
P139 hours, PSHMS to hour, minute and second data,
5
minutes and and the converted data is stored in *1
seconds data (D+1, D).
F140 Carry flag STC - Turns on the carry flag (R9009).
1
P140 (R9009) set PSTC
F141 Carry flag CLC - Turns off the carry flag (R9009).
1
P141 (R9009) reset PCLC
F142 Watching WDT S The time (allowable scan time for the
P142 dog timer PWDT system) of watching dog timer is 3
update changed to “S”  0.1 (ms) for that scan.
F143 Partial I/O IORF D1, D2 Updates the I/O from the number
P143 update PIORF specified by “D1” to the number 5
specified by “D2”.
F144 Serial data TRNS S, n The COM port received flag (R9038) is
communica- set to off to enable reception.
5
tion control Beginning at “S”, “n” bytes of the data *2
registers are sent from the COM port.
F145 Data send SEND S1, S2, Sends the data to another station in the
9
P145 PSEND D, N network (MEWNET). (via link unit)
F146 Data receive RECV S1, S2, Receives the data to another station
9
P146 PRECV N, D in the network (MEWNET). (via link unit)
F145 Data send SEND S1, S2, Sends the data to the slave station as
9
P145 D, N the MOD bus master. (via COM port) *3
F146 Data receive RECV S1, S2, Receives the data from the slave station
9
P146 N, D as the MOD bus master. (via COM port) *3
F145 Data send SEND S1, S2, Sends the data to the slave station of
9
P145 D, N the MOD bus master, type II. *4 *4
9
P146 N, D of the MOD bus master, type II. *4 *4
F145 Data send SEND S1, S2, Sends the data to the slave station as
P145 D, N the MEWTOCOL master. (via COM 9
*3 *3
port)
P146 N, D as the MEWTOCOL master. (via COM 9
*3 *3
port)
F147 Printout PR S, D Converts the ASCII code data in the
area starting with “S” for printing, and
5
outputs it to the word external output
relay WY specified by “D”.
F148 Self- ERR n Stores the self-diagnostic error number
P148 diagnostic PERR (n: k100 “n” in (DT9000), turns R9000 on, and 3
error set to K299) turns on the ERROR LED.
F149 Message MSG S Displays the character constant of “S” in
13
P149 display PMSG the connected programming tool.
*1) The instruction is available for FP0 T32 (V2.3 or later) and FP-e.
*2) This instruction is available for FP0 V1.20 or later and FP-e.
*3) This instruction is available for FP-X V1.20 or later and FP 32k type.
*4) This instruction is available for FP-X V2.50 or later and FP V3.20 or later.s
17-63

FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Ope-
FP
FP2
ber rand
F150 Data read from READ S1, S2, Reads the data from the
9
P150 intelligent unit PREAD n, D intelligent unit. *3
F151 Data write into WRT S1, S2, Writes the data into the intelligent
9
P151 intelligent unit PWRT n, D unit. *3
F152 Data read from RMRD S1, S2, Reads the data from the
P152 MEWNET-F PRMRD n, D intelligent unit at the MEWNET-F 9
slave station (remote I/O) slave station.
F153 Data write into RMWT S1, S2, Writes the data into the intelligent
P153 MEWNET-F PRMWT n, D unit at the MEWNET-F (remote 9
slave station I/O) slave station.
F155 Sampling SMPL - Starts sampling data.
1
P155 PSMPL *5 *4
F156 Sampling STRG - When the trigger of this
P156 trigger PSTRG instruction turns on, the sampling 1
*5 *4
trace stops.
F157 Time addition CADD S1, S2, The time after (S2+1, S2)
P157 PCADD D elapses from the time of (S1+2,
9
S1+1, S1) is stored in (D+2, D+1, *1
D).
F158 Time CSUB S1, S2, The time that results from
P158 subtraction PCSUB D subtracting (S2+1, S2) from the
9
time (S1+2, S1+1, S1) is stored *1
in (D+2, D+1, D).
F159 Serial port MTRN S, n, D This is used to send data to an
P159 communication PMTRN external device through the
7
specified CPU COM port or MCU *2 *2
COM port.
F161 MCU serial port MRCV S, D1, Data is received from external
P161 reception PMRCV D2 equipment via the COM port of 7
*2 *2
the specified MCU.
BIN arithmetic instruction
F160 Double word DSQR S, D
P160 (32-bit) data PDSQR (S)(D) 7
square root
High speed counter/Pulse output instruction for FP0, FP-e
F0 High-speed MV S, Performs high-speed counter and
counter and DT9052 Pulse output controls according
Pulse output to the control code specified by 5
controls “S”. The control code is stored in
DT9052.
F1 Change and DMV S, Transfers (S+1, S) to high-speed
read of the DT9044 counter and Pulse output elapsed 7
elapsed value value area.
of high-speed DT9044, Transfers value in high-speed
counter and D counter and Pulse output elapsed 7
Pulse output value area to (D+1, D).
F166 High-speed HC1S n, S, Yn Turns output Yn on when the
counter output elapsed value of the built-in high-
set (with speed counter reaches the target 11
channel value of (S+1, S).
specification)
*1) The instruction is available for FP0 T32 (V2.3 or later) and FP-e.
*2) The instruction is available for FP2/FP2SH Ver. 1.5 or later, and the pulse execution type can be specified.
FP10SH cannot be used.
*3) This instruction is available for FP Ver. 2.0 or later.
*4) This instruction is only available for FP-X Ver.2.0 or later.
17-64

FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Boo-
FP
FP2
ber lean
F167 High-speed HC1R n, S, Yn Turns output Yn off when the

counter output elapsed value of the built-in high-
reset (with speed counter reaches the target 11
channel value of (S+1, S).
specification)
F168 Positioning SPD1 S, n Outputs a positioning pulse from
control (with the specified output (Y0 or Y1)
5
channel according to the contents of the
specification) data table beginning at “S”.
F169 Pulse output (with PLS S, n Outputs a pulse from the
channel specified output (Y0 or Y1)
5
specification) according to the contents of the
data table beginning at “S”.
F170 PWM output (with PWM S, n Performs PWM output from the
channel specified output (Y0 or Y1)
5
specification) according to the contents of the
data table beginning at “S”.
High speed counter/Pulse output instruction for FP0R
F0 High-speed MV S, Performs high-speed counter
counter and Pulse DT90052 and Pulse output controls
output controls according to
5
the control code specified by “S”.
The control code is stored in
DT90052.
F1 Change and read DMV S, Transfers (S+1, S) to high-speed
of the elapsed DT90300 counter and Pulse output
7
value of high- elapsed value area (DT90045,
speed counter DT90044).
and Pulse output DT90300, Transfers value in high-speed
D counter and Pulse output
7
elapsed value area (DT90045,
DT90044) to (D+1, D).
F165 Cam control CAM0 S Controls cam operation (on/off
patterns of each cam output)
3
according to the elapsed value of
the high-speed counter.
F166 Target value much HC1S n, S, D Turns output Yn on when the
on (with channel elapsed value of the high-speed
specification) counter or pulse output reaches
(High-speed the target value of (S+1, S). 11
counter
control/Pulse
output control)
F167 Target value much HC1R n, S, D Turns output Yn off when the
off (with channel elapsed value of the high-speed
specification) counter or pulse output reaches
(High-speed the target value of (S+1, S). 11
counter
control/Pulse
output control)
F171 Pulse output (JOG SPDH S, n Positioning pulses are output
positioning type from the specified channel, in
5
0/1) (Trapezoidal accordance with the contents of
control) the data table that starts with S.
F172 Pulse output (JOG PLSH S, n Pulse strings are output from the
operation 0 and 1) specified output, in accordance
5
with the contents of the data
table that starts with S.
F173 PWM output (with PWMH S, n PWM output is output from the
channel specified output, in accordance
5
specification) with the contents of the data
17-65

FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num-
FP
FP2
Name Boolean Operand Description
ber
F174 Pulse output SP0H S, n Outputs the pulses from the

(Selectable data specified channel according to
5
table control the
operation ) data table specified by S.
F175 Pulse output SPSH S, n Pulses are output from channel,
(Linear in accordance with the
interpolation) designated data table, so that 5
the path to the target position
forms a straight line.
F176 Pulse output SPCH S, n Pulses are output from channel,
(Circular in accordance with the
forms an arc.
F177 Pulse output HOME S, n Performs the home return
(Home return) according to the specified data 7
table.
F178 Input pulse PLSM S1, S2, D Measures the number of pulses
measurement and cycle of pulses to be input
(No. of pulses, to the high-speed counter of the 5
cycle for input specified channel.
pulses)
17-66

FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Boo-
FP
FP2
ber lean
High speed counter/Pulse output instruction for FP/FP-X

F0 High-speed MV S, DT90052 Performs high-speed counter
counter and and Pulse output controls
Pulse output according to
5
controls the control code specified by
“S”. The control code is stored in
DT90052.
F1 Change and read DMV FP: Transfers (S+1, S) to high-
of the elapsed S, DT90044 speed counter and Pulse output
7
value of high- FP-X: elapsed value area (DT90045,
speed counter S, DT90300 DT90044).
and Pulse output FP: Transfers value in high-speed
DT90044, D counter and Pulse output
7
FP-X: elapsed value area (DT90045,
DT90300, D DT90044) to (D+1, D).
F166 Target value HC1S n, S, D Turns output Yn on when the
much on (with elapsed value of the built-in
11
channel high-speed counter reaches the
specification) target value of (S+1, S).
F167 Target value HC1R n, S, D Turns output Yn off when the
much off (with elapsed value of the built-in
11
channel high-speed counter reaches the
specification) target value of (S+1, S).
F171 Pulse output SPDH S, n Positioning pulses are output
(with channel from the specified channel, in
specification) accordance with the contents of
5
(Trapezoidal the data table that starts with S.
control and
home return)
F172 Pulse output PLSH S, n Pulse strings are output from the
(with channel specified output, in accordance
5
(JOG operation) table that starts with S.
F173 PWM output PWMH S, n PWM output is output from the
(with channel specified output, in accordance
5
F174 Pulse output SP0H S, n Outputs the pulses from the
(with channel specified channel according to
specification) the
5
(Selectable data data table specified by S.
table control
operation )
F175 Pulse output SPSH S, n Pulses are output from channel,
(Linear in accordance with the
*2
forms a straight line.
F176 Pulse output SPCH S, n Pulses are output from channel,
(Circular in accordance with the
*2
forms an arc.
*1) The elapsed value area differs depending on used channels.
*2) This instruction is available for FP C32T2, C28P2, C32T2H and C28P2H.
17-67

FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num Ope-
FP
FP2
-ber rand
Screen display instructions

F180 FP-e screen SCR S1, S2, Register the screen displayed on
display S3, S4 the FP-e. 9
*1
registration
F181 FP-e screen DSP S Specify the screen to be displayed
display on the FP-e. 3
*1
switching
Basic function instruction
F182 Time FILTR S1, S2, Executes the filter processing for
constant S3, D the specified input. 9
*2 *3
processing
F183 Auxiliary DSTM S, D Turn on the specified output and
timer (32-bit) R900D after 7
*4
0.01 s.  set value.
Data transfer instructions
F190 Three 16-bit MV3 S1, S2, (S1)(D), (S2)(D+1),
10
P190 data move PMV3 S3, D (S3)(D+2)
F191 Three 32-bit DMV3 S1, S2, (S1+1, S1)(D+1, D), (S2+1,
P191 data move PDMV3 S3, D S2)(D+3, D+2), (S3+1, 16
S3)(D+5, D+4)
Logic operation instructions
F215 32-bit data DAND S1, S2, (S1+1, S1) AND (S2+1,
7
P215 AND PDAND D S2)(D+1,
D)
F216 32-bit data DOR S1, S2, (S1+1, S1) OR (S2+1, S2)(D+1,
12
P216 OR PDOR D D)
F217 32-bit data DXOR S1, S2,
P217 XOR PDXOR D {(S1+1, S1) AND (S2+1, S2)} OR
12
{(S1+1, S1) AND (S2+1,
S2)}(D+1, D)
F218 32-bit data DXNR S1, S2, {(S1+1, S1) AND (S2+1, S2)} OR
P218 XNR PDXNR D {(S1+1, S1) AND (S2+1, 12
S2)}(D+1, D)
F219 Double word DUNI S1, S2, {(S1+1, S1) AND (S3+1, S3)} OR
P219 (32-bit) data PDUNI S3, D {(S2+1, S2) AND (S3+1, 16
unites S3)}(D+1, D)
Data conversion instructions
F230 Time data  TMSEC S, D The specified time data ( a date
P230 second PTMSEC and time) is changed to the second 6
*5 *6 *7 *7
conversion data.
F231 Second SECTM S, D The specified second data is
P231 data time PSECTM changed into time data (a date and 6
*5 *6 *7 *7
conversion time).
*1) This instruction is available for FP-e only.
*4) This instruction is available for FP10SH Ver. 3.10 or later.
*5) This instruction is available for FP 32k type.
*7) This instruction is available for FP2/FP2SH Ver. 1.5 or later.FP10SH cannot be used.
17-68

FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Ope-
FP
FP2
ber rand
F235 16-bit binary GRY S, D Converts the 16-bit binary data of

P235 data  Gray PGRY “S” to gray codes, and the 6
code conversion converted result is stored in the “D”.
F236 32-bit binary DGRY S, D Converts the 32-bit binary data of
P236 data  Gray PDGRY (S+1, S) to gray code, and the
8
code conversion converted result is stored in the
(D+1, D).
F237 16-bit gray code GBIN S, D Converts the gray codes of “S” to
P237  binary data PGBIN binary data, and the converted 6
conversion result is stored in the “D”.
F238 32-bit gray code DGBIN S, D Converts the gray codes of (S+1, S)
P238  binary data PDGBIN to binary data, and the converted 8
conversion result is stored in the (D+1, D).
F240 Bit line to bit COLM S, n, The values of bits 0 to 15 of “S” are
P240 column PCOLM D stored in bit “n” of (D to DC+15). 8
conversion
F241 Bit column to bit LINE S, n, The values of bit “n” of (S) to (S+15)
8
P241 line conversion PLINE D are stored in bits 0 to 15 of “D”.
F250 Binary data  BTOA S1, Converts multiple binary data to
ASCII S2, n, multiple ASCII data. 12
*1
conversion D
F251 ASCII  binary ATOB S1, Converts multiple ASCII data to
data conversion S2, n, multiple binary data. 12
*1
D
F252 ASCII data ACHK S1, Checks the ASCII data strings to be
10
check S2, n used in F251 (ATOB) instruction. *2 *3
Character strings instructions
F257 Comparing SCMP S1, These instructions compare two
P257 character S2 specified character strings and
10
strings output the judgment results to a
special internal relay.
F258 Character string SADD S1, These instructions couple one
12
P258 coupling S2, D character string with another.
F259 Number of LEN S, D These instructions determine the
P259 characters in a number of characters in a character 6
character string string.
F260 Search for SSRC S1, The specified character is searched
10
P260 character string S2, D in a character string.
F261 Retrieving data RIGHT S1, These instructions retrieve a
P261 from character S2, D specified number of characters from
8
strings (right the right side of the character string.
side)
F262 Retrieving data LEFT S1, These instructions retrieve a
P262 from character S2, D specified number of characters from
8
strings (left the left side of the character string.
side)
F263 Retrieving a MIDR S1, These instructions retrieve a
P263 character string S2, character string consisting of a
from a character S3, D specified number of characters from 10
string the specified position in the
character string.
F264 Writing a MIDW S1, These instructions write a specified
P264 character string S2, D, number of characters from a
12
to a character n character string to a specified
string position in the character string.
F265 Replacing SREP S, D, A specified number of characters in
P265 character p, n a character string are rewritten,
12
strings starting from a specified position in
the character string.
17-69

FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Ope-
FP
FP2
ber rand
Integer type data processing instructions

F270 Maximum MAX S1, Searches the maximum value in the
P270 value (word PMAX S2, D word data table between the “S1” and
data (16-bit)) “S2”, and stores it in the “D”. The 8
*1
address relative to “S1” is stored in
“D+1”.
F271 Maximum DMAX S1, Searches for the maximum value in
P271 value (double PDMAX S2, D the double word data table between
word data (32- the area selected with “S1” and “S2”, 8
*1
bit)) and stores it in the “D”. The address
relative to “S1” is stored in “D+2”.
F272 Minimum value MIN S1, Searches for the minimum value in
P272 (word data (16- PMIN S2, D the word data table between the area
bit)) selected with “S1” and “S2”, and 8
*1
stores it in the “D”. The address
F273 Minimum value DMIN S1, Searches for the minimum value in
P273 (double word PDMIN S2, D the double word data table between
data (32-bit)) the area selected with “S1” and “S2”, 8
*1
and stores it in the “D”. The address
F275 Total and MEAN S1, The total value and the mean value of
P275 mean values PMEAN S2, D the word data with sign from the area
8
(word data (16- selected with “S1” to “S2” are *1
bit)) obtained and stored in the “D”.
F276 Total and DMEAN S1, The total value and the mean value of
P276 mean values PDMEAN S2, D the double word data with sign from
8
(double word the area selected with “S1” to “S2” *1
data (32-bit)) are obtained and stored in the “D”.
F277 Sort (word SORT S1, The word data with sign from the
P277 data (16-bit)) PSORT S2, area specified by “S1” to “S2” are
S3 sorted in ascending order (the 8
*1
smallest word is first) or descending
order (the largest word is first).
F278 Sort (double DSORT S1, The double word data with sign from
P278 word data (32- PDSORT S2, the area specified by “S1” to “S2” are
bit)) S3 sorted in ascending order (the 8
*1
smallest word is first) or descending
order (the largest word is first).
F282 Scaling of SCAL S1, The output value Y is found for the
P282 16-bit data PSCAL S2, D input value X by performing scaling 8
*1
for the given data table.
F283 Scaling of DSCAL S1, The output value Y is found for the
P283 32-bit data PDSCAL S2, D input value X by performing scaling 10
for the given data table.
F284 Inclination RAMP S1, Executes the linear output for the
P284 output of 16-bit S2, specified time from the specified 10
*2 *2
data S3, D initial value to the target value.
Integer type non-linear function instructions
F285 Upper and LIMT S1, When S1>S3, S1D
P285 lower limit PLIMT S2, When S1<S3, S2D
10
control S3, D When S1<or = S3<or = S2, S3D *1
(16-bit data)
*1) This instruction is only available for FP-e Ver.1.2 or later.
*2) This instruction is only available for FP-X Ver.2.0 or later, and FP Ver. 3.10 or later.
17-70

FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Ope-
FP
FP2
ber rand
F286 Upper and DLIMT S1, S2, When (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3), (S1+1,
P286 lower limit PDLIMT S3, D S1)(D+1, D)
control When (S2+1, S2)<(S3+1, S3), (S2+1,
16
(32-bit data) S2)(D+1, D) *1
When (S1+1, S1)<or = (S3+1, S3)<or
= (S2+1, S2), (S3+1, S3)(D+1, D)
F287 Deadband BAND S1, S2, When S1>S3, S3S1D
P287 control PBAND S3, D When S2<S3, S3S2D 10
*1
(16-bit data) When S1<or = S3<or = S2, 0D
F288 Deadband DBAND S1, S2, When (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3), (S3+1,
P288 control PDBAND S3, D S3)(S1+1, S1)(D+1, D)
(32-bit data) When (S2+1, S2)<(S3+1, S3), (S3+1,
16
S3)(S2+1, S2)(D+1, D) *1
When (S1+1, S1)<or = (S3+1, S3)<or
= (S2+1, S2),0(D+1, D)
F289 Zone control ZONE S1, S2, When S3<0, S3+S1D
P289 (16-bit data) PZONE S3, D When S3=0, 0D 10
*1
When S3>0, S3+S2D
F290 Zone control DZONE S1, S2, When (S3+1, S3)<0, (S3+1,
P290 (32-bit data) PDZONE S3, D S3)+(S1+1, S1)(D+1, D)
When (S3+1, S3)=0, 0(D+1, D) 16
*1
When (S3+1, S3)>0, (S3+1,
S3)+(S2+1, S2)(D+1, D)
BCD type real number operation instructions
F300 BCD type sine BSIN S, D SIN(S1+1, S1)(D+1, D)
6
P300 operation PBSIN
F301 BCD type BCOS S, D COS(S1+1, S1)(D+1, D)
P301 cosine PBCOS 6
operation
F302 BCD type BTAN S, D TAN(S1+1, S1)(D+1, D)
P302 tangent PBTAN 6
operation
F303 BCD type BASIN S, D SIN-1(S1+1, S1)(D+1, D)
P303 arcsine PBASIN 6
operation
F304 BCD type BACOS S, D COS-1(S1+1, S1)(D+1, D)
P304 arccosine PBACOS 6
operation
F305 BCD type BATAN S, D TAN-1(S1+1, S1)(D+1, D)
P305 arctangent PBATAN 6
operation
Floating-point type real number operation instructions
F309 Floating-point FMV S, D (S+1, S)(D+1, D)
P309 type data PFMV 8
*2
move
F310 Floating-point F+ S1, S2, (S1+1, S1)+(S2+1, S2)(D+1, D)
P310 type data PF+ D 14
*2
addition
F311 Floating-point F- S1, S2, (S1+1, S1)(S2+1, S2)(D+1, D)
P311 type data PF- D 14
*2
subtraction
F312 Floating-point F* S1, S2, (S1+1, S1)(S2+1, S2)(D+1, D)
P312 type data PF* D 14
*2
multiplication
F313 Floating-point F% S1, S2, (S1+1, S1)(S2+1, S2)(D+1, D)
P313 type data PF% D 14
*2
division
*1) This instruction is only available for FP-e Ver.1.2 or later.
*2) This instruction is available for FP-e Ver.1.21 or later, and FP0 V2.1 or later.
17-71

FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Boo- Ope-
FP
FP2
Name Description
ber lean rand
F314 Floating-point type SIN S, D SIN(S+1, S)(D+1, D)

10
P314 data sine operation PSIN *1
F315 Floating-point type COS S, D COS(S+1, S)(D+1, D)
P315 data cosine PCOS 10
*1
operation
F316 Floating-point type TAN S, D TAN(S+1, S)(D+1, D)
P316 data tangent PTAN 10
*1
operation
-1
F317 Floating-point type ASIN S, D SIN (S+1, S)(D+1, D)
P317 data arcsine PASIN 10
*1
operation
-1
F318 Floating-point type ACOS S, D COS (S+1, S)(D+1, D)
P318 data arccosine PACOS 10
*1
operation
-1
F319 Floating-point type ATAN S, D TAN (S+1, S)(D+1, D)
P319 data arctangent PATAN 10
*1
operation
F320 Floating-point type LN S, D LN(S+1, S)(D+1, D)
P320 data natural PLN 10
*1
logarithm
F321 Floating-point type EXP S, D EXP(S+1, S)(D+1, D)
P321 data exponent PEXP 10
*1
F322 Floating-point type LOG S, D LOG(S+1, S)(D+1, D)

10
P322 data logarithm PLOG *1
F323 Floating-point type PWR S1, (S1+1, S1) ^ (S2+1, S2)(D+1,
14
P323 data power PPWR S2, D D) *1
F324 Floating-point type FSQR S, D
10
P324 data square root PFSQR (S+1, S)(D+1, D) *1
F325 16-bit integer data to FLT S, D Converts the 16-bit integer data
P325 floating-point type PFLT with sign specified by “S” to real
6
data conversion number data, and the converted *1
data is stored in “D”.
F326 32-bit integer data to DFLT S, D Converts the 32-bit integer data
P326 floating-point type PDFLT with sign specified by (S+1, S) to
data conversion real number data, and the 8
*1
converted data is stored in (D+1,
D).
F327 Floating-point type INT S, D Converts real number data
P327 data to 16-bit integer PINT specified by (S+1, S) to the 16-
conversion (the bit integer data with sign (the
largest integer not largest integer not exceeding the 8
*1
exceeding the floating-point data), and the
floating-point type converted data is stored in “D”.
data)
F328 Floating-point type DINT S, D Converts real number data
P328 data to 32-bit integer PDINT specified by (S+1, S) to the 32-
conversion (the bit integer data with sign (the
largest integer not largest integer not exceeding the 8
*1
exceeding the floating-point data), and the
floating-point type converted data is stored in (D+1,
data) D).
17-72

FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Ope-
FP
FP2
ber rand
F329 Floating-point FIX S, D Converts real number data specified

P329 type data to 16-bit PFIX by (S+1, S) to the 16-bit integer data
integer con- with sign (rounding the first decimal
version (rounding point down), and the converted data 8
*1
the first decimal is stored
point down to in “D”.
integer)
F330 Floating-point DFIX S, D Converts real number data specified
P330 type data to 32-bit PDFIX by (S+1, S) to the 32-bit integer data
version (rounding point down), and the converted data 8
*1
the first decimal is stored
point down to in (D+1, D).
integer)
F331 Floating-point ROFF S, D Converts real number data specified
P331 type data to 16-bit PROFF by (S+1, S) to the 16-bit integer data
version (rounding point off), and the converted data is 8
*1
the first decimal stored in “D”.
point off to
integer)
F332 Floating-point DROFF S, D Converts real number data specified
P332 type data to 32-bit PDROFF by (S+1, S) to the 32-bit integer data
version (rounding point off), and the converted data is 8
*1
the first decimal stored in (D+1, D).
point off to
integer)
F333 Floating-point FINT S, D The decimal part of the real number
P333 type data round- PFINT data specified in (S+1, S) is rounded
ding the first down, and the result is stored in 8
*1
decimal point (D+1, D).
down
F334 Floating-point FRINT S, D
The decimal part of the real number
P334 type data round- PFRINT data stored in (S+1, S) is rounded
8
ding the first off, and the result is stored in (D+1, *1
decimal point off D).
F335 Floating-point F+/- S, D The real number data stored in (S+1,
P335 type data sign PF+/- S) is changed the sign, and the 8
*1
changes result is stored in (D+1, D).
F336 Floating-point FABS S, D Takes the absolute value of real
P336 type data absolute PFABS number data specified by (S+1, S),
8
and the result (absolute value) is *1
stored in (D+1, D).
F337 Floating-point RAD S, D The data in degrees of an angle
P337 type data degree PRAD specified in (S+1, S) is converted to
8
 radian radians (real number data), and the *1
result is stored in (D+1, D).
F338 Floating-point DEG S, D The angle data in radians (real
P338 type data radian PDEG number data) specified in (S+1, S) is
8
 degree converted to angle data in degrees, *1
and the result is stored in (D+1, D).
Floating-point type real number data processing instructions
F345 Floating-point FCMP S1, (S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2) R900A: on
P345 type data compare PFCMP S2 (S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2) R900B on 10
(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2) R900C: on
F346 Floating-point FWIN S1, (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3) R900A: on
P346 type data band PFWIN S2, (S2+1, S2)<or =(S1+1, S1)<or
14
compare S3 =(S3+1, S3)  R900B on
(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2) R900C: on
17-73

FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Ope-
FP
FP2
ber rand
F347 Floating-point FLIMT S1, S2, When (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3),

P347 type data PFLIMT S3, D (S1+1, S1) (D+1, D)
upper and When (S2+1, S2)<(S3+1, S3),
lower limit (S2+1, S2)  (D+1, D) 17
control When (S1+1, S1)<or = (S3+1,
S3)<or =(S2+1, S2), (S3+1,
S3)(D+1, D)
F348 Floating-point FBAND S1, S2, When (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3),
P348 type data PFBAND S3, D (S3+1, S3)(S1+1, S1)(D+1, D)
dead-band When (S2+1, S2)<(S3+1, S3),
17
control (S3+1, S3)(S2+1, S2) (D+1, D)
When (S1+1, S1)<or = (S3+1,
S3)<or =(S2+1, S2), 0.0(D+1, D)
F349 Floating-point FZONE S1, S2, When (S3+1, S3)<0.0,
P349 type data PFZONE S3, D (S3+1, S3)+(S1+1, S1)(D+1, D)
zone control When (S3+1, S3)=0.0, 0.0 (D+1,
17
D)
When (S3+1, S3)>0.0, (S3+1,
S3)+(S2+1, S2) (D+1, D)
F350 Floating-point FMAX S1, S2, Searches the maximum value in the
P350 type data PFMAX D real number data table between the
maxi-mum area selected with “S1” and “S2”,
8
value and stores it in the (D+1, D). The
(D+2).
F351 Floating-point FMIN S1, S2, Searches the minimum value in the
P351 type data PFMIN D real number data table between the
mini-mum area selected with “S1” and “S2”,
8
value and stores it in the (D+1, D). The
(D+2).
F352 Floating-point FMEAN S1, S2, The total value and the mean value
P352 type data total PFMEAN D of the real number data from the
and mean area selected with “S1” to “S2” are
8
values obtained. The total value is stored in
the (D+1, D) and the mean value is
stored in the (D+3, D+2).
F353 Floating-point FSORT S1, S2, The real number data from the area
P353 type data sort PFSORT S3 specified by “S1” to “S2” are stored
in ascending order (the smallest 8
word is first) or descending order
(the largest word is first).
F354 Scaling of FSCAL S1, S2, Scaling (linearization) on a real
P354 real number PFSCAL D number data table is performed, and
12
data the output (Y) to an input value (X) *1 *2 *3 *3
is calculated.
*3) This instruction is available for FP2/FP2SH Ver. 1.5 or later. FP10SH cannot be used.
17-74

FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Ope-
FP
FP2
ber rand
Time series processing instruction

F355 PID processing PID S PID processing is performed
depending on the control value
(mode and parameter) specified
4
by (S to S+2) and (S+4 to S+10), *1
and the result is stored in the
(S+3).
F356 Easy PID EZPID S1, Temperature control (PID) can be
S2, easily performed using the image 10
*2 *2
S3, S4 of a temperature controller.
Compare instructions
F373 16-bit data DTR S, D If the data in the 16-bit area
P373 revision PDTR specified by “S” has changed
detection since the previous execution,
internal relay R9009 (carry flag) 6
will turn on. “D” is used to store
the data of the previous
execution.
F374 32-bit data DDTR S, D If the data in the 32-bit area
P374 revision PDDTR specified by (S+1, S) has changed
detection since the previous execution,
internal relay R9009 (carry flag) 6
will turn on. (D+1, D) is used to
store the data of the previous
execution.
Index register bank processing instructions
F410 Setting the SETB n Index register (I0 to ID) bank
P410 index register PSETB number change over. 4
bank number
F411 Changing the CHGB n Index register (I0 to ID) bank
P411 index register PCHGB number change over with
4
bank number remembering preceding bank
number.
F412 Restoring the POPB - Changes index register (I0 to ID)
P412 index register PPOPB bank number back to the bank
2
bank number before F411 (CHGB)/P411
(PCHGB) instruction.
File register bank processing instructions
F414 Setting the file SBFL n File register bank number change
P414 register bank PSBFL over. 4
*3
number
F415 Changing the CBFL n File register bank number change
P415 file register PCBFL over with remembering preceding 4
*3
bank number bank number.
F416 Restoring the PBFL - Changes file register bank
P416 file register PPBFL number back to the bank before
2
bank number F415 (CBFL)/P415 (PCBFL) *3
instruction.
*1) This instruction is available for FP0 (V2.1 or later) only.
*2) This instruction is available for FP-X V.1.20 or later, and FP 32k type.
*3) This instruction is not available for FP10SH.
17-75

17.4 Table of Error codes
 Difference in ERROR display
There are differences in the way errors are displayed depending on the model.
Model Display Display method
FP1,FP-M,FP2,FP3,FP10SH LED ERROR. Continually lit
FPΣ,FP0, FP0R, FP-X LED ERROR/ALARM Flashes/continually lit
FP-e Screen display ERR. Continually lit
 Error Confirmation When ERROR Turns ON

When the “ERROR” on the control unit (CPU unit) turns on or flashes, a self-diagnostic error or syntax
check error has occurred. Confirm the contents of the error and take the appropriate steps.
-Error Confirmation Method

Procedure:1.Use the programming tool software to call up the error code.
By executing the “STATUS DISPLAY”, the error code and content of error are displayed.
2.Check the error contents in the table of error codes using the error code ascertained above.
-Syntax check error

This is an error detected by the total check function when there is a syntax error or incorrect setting
written in the program. When the mode selector is switched to the RUN mode, the total check function
automatically activates and eliminates the possibility of incorrect operation from syntax errors in the
program.
When a syntax check error is detected

-ERROR turns on or flashes.
-Operation will not begin even after switching to the RUN mode.
-Remote operation cannot be used to change to RUN mode.
Clearing a syntax check error

By changing to the PROG. mode, the error will clear and the ERROR will turn off.
Steps to take for syntax error

Change to the PROG. mode, and then execute the total check function while online mode with the
programming tool connected. This will call up the content of error and the address where the error
occurred.
Correct the program while referring to the content of error.
17-76

-Self-diagnostic Error
This error occurs when the control unit (CPU unit) self-diagnostic function detects the occurrence of an
abnormality in the system. The self-diagnostic function monitors the memory abnormal detection, I/O
abnormal detection, and other devices.
When a self-diagnostic error occurs

- The ERROR turns on or flashes.
- The operation of the control unit (CPU unit) might stop depending on the content of error and the
system register setting.
- The error codes will be stored in the special data register DT9000(DT90000).
- In the case of operation error, the error address will be stored in the DT9017(DT90017) and
DT9018(DT90018).
Clearing the self-diagnostic error

At the “STATUS DISPLAY”, execute the “error clear”. Error codes 43 and higher can be cleared.
-You can use the initialize/test switch to clear an error. However, this will also clear the contents of
operation memory.
-Errors can also be cleared by turning off and on the power while in the PROG. mode.
However, the contents of operation memory, not stored with the hold type data, will also be cleared.
-The error can also be cleared depending on the self-diagnostic error set instruction F148(ERR).
Steps to take for self-diagnostic error

The steps to be taken will differ depending on the error contents. For more details, use the error code
obtained above and consult the table of self-diagnostic error codes.
 MEWTOCOL-COM Transmission Errors

These are error codes from a PC or other computer device that occur during an abnormal response
when communicating with a PLC using MEWTOCOL-COM.
17-77

17.4.1 Table of Syntax Check Error
Opera-
Error
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
tion Description and steps to take
FP0R
code
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
status
A program with a syntax error has been written.

Syntax
E1 Stops  Change to PROG. mode and correct the A A A A A A A A
error error.
Two or more OT(Out) instructions and
KP(Keep) instructions are programmed using
the same relay. Also occurs when using the
same timer/counter number.
Duplicated  Change to PROG. mode and correct the
E2
(Note) output Stops program so that one relay A A A A A A A A
error is not used for two or more OT instructions. Or,
set the duplicated output to “enable” in system
register 20. A timer/counter instruction double
definition error will be detected even if double
output permission has been selected.
For instructions which must be used in a pair
such as jump (JP and LBL), one instruction is
Not paired either missing or in an incorrect position.
E3 Stops A A A A A A A A
error  Change to PROG. mode and enter the two
instructions which must
be used in a pair in the correct positions.
An instruction has been written which does not
agree with system register settings. For
Parameter example, the number setting in a program does
E4 mismatch Stops not agree with the timer/counter range setting. A A A A A A A A
error  Change to PROG. mode, check the system
register settings, and change so that the
settings and the instruction agree.
An instruction which must be written in a
specific area (main program area or
subprogram area) has been written to a
E5 Program
(Note) Stops different area (for example, a subroutine SUB A A A A A A A A
area error to RET is placed before an ED instruction).
 Change to PROG. mode and enter the
instruction into the correct area.
A: Available
Note) This error is also detected if you attempt to execute a rewrite containing a syntax error during RUN.
In this case, nothing will be written to the CPU and operation will continue.
17-78

Opera-
Error
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
FP0R
code
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
status
The program is too large to compile in the

program memory.
 Change to PROG. mode and reduce the
Compile
total number of steps for the program.
E6 memory Stops A A A A A A A
-FP10SH
full error If memory expansion is possible, compilation
will become possible when the memory is
expanded.
In the program, high-level instructions, which
execute in every scan and at the leading edge
of the trigger, are programmed to be triggered
High-level by one contact. (e.g. F0 (MV) and P0 (PMV)
E7 instruction Stops are programmed using the same trigger A A A A A A
type error continuously.)
 Correct the program so that the high-level
instructions executed in every scan and only
at the leading edge are triggered separately.
High-level There is an incorrect operand in an instruction
instruction which requires a specific combination of
E8 operand Stops operands (for example, the operands must all A A A A A A A A
combina- be of a certain type).
tion error  Enter the correct combination of operands.
No
Program may be damaged.
E9 program Stops A A
Try to send the program again.
error
Rewrite When inputting with the programming tool
software, a deletion, addition or change of
during
Conti- order of an instruction(ED, LBL, SUB, RET,
E10 RUN A A A
nues INT, IRET, SSTP, and STPE) that cannot
syntax perform a rewrite during RUN is being
error attempted. Nothing is written to the CPU.
A: Available
17-79

17.4.2 Table of Self-Diagnostic Error
Opera-
Error
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
FP0R
code
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
status
Probably a hardware abnormality

E20 CPU error Stops A A A
Please contact your dealer.
RAM
E21
error1
RAM
E22
error2
RAM Probably an abnormality in the internal RAM.
E23 Stops A A A
error3 Please contact your dealer.
RAM
E24
error4
RAM
E25
error5
Master
memory The models of master memories are different.
A
E25 model Stops Use the master memories created with the *1)
unmatch same model.
error
FP-e,FP0,FP0R,FPΣ,and FP1
C14,C16:Probably a hardware abnormality.
 Please contact your dealer.
FP-X:
When the master memory cassette is
mounted, the master memory cassette may
be damaged. Remove the master memory,
and check whether the ERROR turns off.
When the ERROR turned off, rewrite the
master memory as its contents are damaged,
and use it again.
When the ERROR does not turn off, please
User’s contact your dealer.
E26 Stops A A A A A A A A
ROM error FP1 C24,C40,C56,C72,and FP-M:
Probably an abnormality in the memory unit
Program the memory unit again and try to
operate. If the same error is detected, try to
operate with another memory unit.
FP2,FP2SH,FP10SH,and FP3:
There may be a problem with the installed
ROM.
-ROM is not installed.
-ROM contents are damaged.
-Program size stored on the ROM is larger
than the capacity of the ROM
Check the contents of the ROM
Units installed exceed the limitations.(i.e.,4 or
Unit
more link units)
E27 installation Stops A A A A A A
 Turn off the power and re-configure units
error
referring to the hardware manual.
Probably an abnormality in the system
System
register.
E28 register Stops A
 Check the system register setting or
error
initialize the system registers.
*1) This error occurs on FP-X Ver2.0 or later. A: Available
17-80

Opera-
Error
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
FP0R
code
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
status
Configu-
A parameter error was detected in the
ration
E29 Stops MEWNET-W2 configuration area. Set a A A
parameter correct parameter.
error
Interrupt Probably a hardware abnormality.
E30 Stops  Please contact your dealer.
error 0
An interrupt occurred without an interrupt
request . A hardware problem or error due to
Interrupt
E31 Stops noise is possible. A A A A A A A A
error 1  Turn off the power and check the noise
conditions.
There is no interrupt program for an interrupt
which occurred.
Interrupt
E32 Stops  Check the number of the interrupt program A A A A A A A A
error 2 and change it to agree with the interrupt
request..
Multi-CPU
This error occurs when a FP3/FP10SH is
data CPU2
E33 used as CPU2 for a multi-CPU system. A A
unmatch Stops Refer to “Multi-CPU system Manual”.
error
An abnormal unit is installed.
-FPΣ, FP0R(FP0R mode),FP-X, FP2,FP2SH
and FP10SH:
Check the contents of special data register
DT90036 and locate the abnormal unit. Then
I/O status turn off the power and replace the unit with a
E34 Stops new one.
A A A A A
error
-FP3:
DT9036 and locate the abnormal unit. Then
turn off the power and replace the unit with a
new one.
MEWNET-F A unit, which cannot be installed on the slave
station of the MEWNET-F link system, is
slave
E35 Stops installed on the slave station. A A A
illegal unit Remove the illegal unit from the slave
error station.
MEWNET-F The number of slots or I/O points used for
(remote MEWNET-F(remote I/O) system exceeds the
limitation.
E36 I/O) Stops Re-configure the system so that the
A A A
limitation number of slots and I/O points is within the
error specified range.
MEWNET-F I/O overlap or I/O setting that is over the
I/O range is detected in the allocated I/O and
E37 Stops MEWNET-F I/O map.
A A A
mapping
error Re-configure the I/O map correctly
A: Available
17-81

Opera
Error
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
-tion Description and steps to take
FP0R
code
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
status
I/O mapping for remote I/O terminal

MEWNET-F
boards, remote I/O terminal units and I/O link
slave I/O
is not correct.
E38 terminal Stops A A A
Re-configure the I/O map for slave stations
mapping
according to the I/O points of the slave
error
stations.
When reading in the program from the IC
memory card(due to automatic reading
because of the dip switch setting or program
switching due to F14(PGRD) instruction):
- IC memory card is not installed.
- There is no program file or it is damaged.
IC card - Writing is disabled.
E39 Stops A A
read error - There is an abnormality in the
AUTOEXEC.SPG file.
- Program size stored on the card is larger
than the capacity of the CPU.
Install an IC memory card that has the
program properly recorded and execute the
read once again.
Abnormal I/O unit.
FP, FP-X:
DT90002 and abnormal FP expansion unit
(application cassette for FP-X). Then check
the unit.
FP2 and FP2SH:
Check the contents of special data registers
DT90002,DT90003 and abnormal I/O unit.
Then check the unit.
Selection of operation status using system
register21:
-to continue operation, set 1
-to stop operation, set 0
Sele- Verification is possible in FPWIN GR/Pro at
E40 I/O error A A A A A
ctable “I/O error” in the status display function.
MEWNET-TR communication error
FP3 and FP10SH:
Check the contents of special data
registers(FP3:DT9002,DT9003,FP10SH:DT9
0002,DT90003) and the erroneous master
unit and abnormal I/O unit. Then check the
unit.
register21:
Verification is possible in FPWIN GR/Pro at
“I/O error” in the status display function.
A: Available
17-82

Opera-
Error
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
FP0R
code
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
status
An abnormality in an intelligent unit.

FP, FP-X:
“DT90006” and locate the abnormal FP
intelligent unit (application cassette for FP-X).
FP2,FP2SH,and FP10SH:
DT90006,DT90007 and locate the abnormal
intelligent unit. Then check the unit referring
to its manual..
register22:
Intelligent Selec-
E41 -to continue operation, set 1 A A A A A
unit error table -to stop operation, set 0
FP3:
DT9006,DT9007 and locate the abnormal
intelligent unit. Then check the unit referring
to its manual..
register22:
I/O unit(Expansion unit) wiring condition has
changed compared to that at time of power-
up.
 Check the contents of special data register
(FP0: DT9010,
FP, FP-X: DT90010,DT90011) and locate
the erroneous expansion unit.
It checks whether an expansion connector is
in agreement.
I/O unit Selec-
E42  Check the contents of special data register A A A A A A A
verify error table (FP2,FP2SH,and
FP10SH:DT90010,DT90011,FP3
DT9010,DT9011)
register23:
A: Available
17-83

Opera-
Error
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
FP0R
code
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
status
Scan time required for program execution

exceeds the setting of the system watching
dog timer.
System  Check the program and modify it so that
watching Selec- the program can execute a scan within the
E43 specified time.
A A
dog timer table
error Selection of operation status using system
register24:
Slave
The time required for slave station
station connection exceeds the setting of the system
connecting register 35.
Selec-
E44 time error Selection of operation status using system A A A
table register25:
for
MEWNET-F
system
Operation became impossible when a high-
level instruction was executed.
register26:
-to continue operation, set K1
-to stop operation, set K0
The address of operation error can be
confirmed in either special data registers
Operation Selec- DT9017 and DT9018, or DT90017 and
E45 DT90018. (It varies according to the model to
A A A A A A A A
error table
be used.)
DT9017, DT9018: FP-e, FP0,
FP0R(FP0 mode)
DT90017, DT90018: FP, FP-X,
FP0R(FP0R mode),
FP2, FP2SH, FP10SH
A: Available
17-84

Opera-
Error
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
FP0R
code
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
status
S-LINK error Occurs only in FP0-SL1

When one of the S-LINK errors (ERR1, 3 or
4) has been detected, error code E46 (remote
Selec- I/O (S-LINK) communication error) is stored.
A
table Selection of operation status using system
register27:
MEWNET-F communication error
A communication abnormally was caused by
Remote
a transmission cable or during the power-
I/O down of a slave station.
E46 commu- FP2, FP2SH, and FP10SH:
nication
DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the
error abnormal slave station and recover the
Selec- communication condition.
FP3: A A A
table
DT9131 to DT9137 and locate the abnormal
slave station and recover the communication
condition.
register27:
In the unit on the slave station, an
abnormality such as:
-missing unit
-abnormal intelligent unit was detected.
FP2, FP2SH, and FP10SH:
MEW-NET- DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the
abnormal slave station and recover the slave
F Selec-
E47 condition. A A A
attribute table FP3:
error Check the contents of special data registers
DT9131 to DT9137 and locate the abnormal
slave station and recover the slave condition.
register28:
Expansion The power supply for the expansion unit was
unit power turned on after the control unit.
E49 supply Stops Turn on the power supply for the expansion A
sequence unit at the same time or before the control
unit is turned on.
error
The voltage of the backup battery lowered or
the backup battery of control unit is not
Backup installed.
Conti-
E50 battery  Check the installation of the backup A A A A A
nues battery and then replace battery if necessary.
error
By setting the system register 4, you can
disregard this self-diagnostic error.
17-85

Opera-
Error
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
FP0R
code
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
status
MEWNET-F Terminal station setting was not properly

performed.
terminal Conti-
E51 Check stations at both ends of the A A A
station nues communication path, and set them in the
error terminal station using the dip switches.
Set the INITIALIZE/TEST
MEWNET-F selecto1inmjvbgycfrde892 r to the
I/O update Conti- INITIALIZE position while keeping the mode
E52 selector in the RUN position. If the same
A A A
synchro- nues
nous error error occurs after this, please contact your
dealer.
Multi-CPU
I/O regis-
Abnormality was detected when the multi-
tration Conti-
E53 CPU system was used. A
error nues Please contact your dealer.
(CPU2
only)
The voltage of the backup battery for the IC
IC memory memory card lowered. The BATT.LED does
card back- Conti- not turn on.
E54 Charge or replace the backup battery of IC
A A
up battery nues
error memory card.(The contents of the IC
memory card cannot be guaranteed.)
The voltage of the backup battery for IC
IC memory memory card lowers. The BATT.LED does
not turn on.
card back- Cont-
E55 Charge or replace the backup battery of IC A A
up battery inues memory card.
error (The contents of the IC memory card cannot
be guaranteed.)
Incompati- The IC memory card installed is not
ble IC Cont- compatible.
E56 Replace the IC memory card compatible
A A
memory inues
card error with FP2SH/FP10SH.
MEWNET-W2/MCU
No unit for The MEWNET-W2 link unit or
MCU(Multi communication unit) is not
the Conti-
E57 installed in the slot specified using the A A
configu- nues configuration data.
ration Either install a unit in the specified slot or
change the parameter.
E100 Self- The error specified by the F148
to diagnostic Stop (ERR)/P148(PERR) instruction is occurred. A A A A A A
 Take steps to clear the error condition
E199 error set according to the specification you chose.
by F148
E200
(ERR)/P148 Conti-
to A A A A A A
(PERR) nues
E299
instruction
A :Available
17-86

17.4.3 Table of MEWTOCOL-COM Communication Error
Error
Name Description
code
!21 NACK error Link system error

!22 WACK error Link system error
!23 Unit No. overlap Link system error
Transmission format
!24 Link system error
error
Link unit hardware
error
!26 Unit No. setting error Link system error
!27 No support error Link system error
!28 No response error Link system error
!29 Buffer closed error Link system error
!30 Time-out error Link system error
Transmission
impossible error
!33 Communication stop Link system error
!36 No destination error Link system error
Other communication
error
!40 BCC error A transfer error occurred in the received data.
!41 Format error A command was received that does not fit the format.
!42 No support error A command was received that is not supported.
Multiple frames A different command was received when processing multiple
!43
procedure error frames.
A route number that does not exist was specified. Verify the route
!50 Link setting error
number by designating the transmission station.
Transmission Transmission to another device not possible because transmission
!51
time-out error buffer is congested.
Transmit disable Transmission processing to another device is not possible.(Link
!52
error unit runaway, etc.)
Command process cannot be received because of multiple frame
!53 Busy error processing. Or, cannot be received because command being
processed is congested.
!60 Parameter error Content of specified parameter does not exist or cannot be used.
There was a mistake in the contact, data area, data number
!61 Data error
designation, size designation, range, or format designation.
Registration over Operation was does when number of registrations was exceeded
!62
error or when there was no registration.
PC command that cannot be processed was executed during RUN
!63 PC mode error
mode.
17-87

Error
Name Description
code
An abnormality occurred when loading RAM to ROM/IC memory

card. There may be a problem with the ROM or IC memory card.
-When loading, the specified contents exceeded the capacity.
External memory
!64 -Write error occurs.
error
-ROM or IC memory card is not installed.
-ROM or IC memory card does not conform to specifications
-ROM or IC memory card board is not installed.
A program or system register write operation was executed when
!65 Protect error the protect mode (password setting or DIP switch, etc.)or ROM
operation mode was being used.
There was an error in the code format of the address data.
!66 Address error Also. when exceeded or insufficient of address data, there was a
mistake in the range designation.
Cannot be read because there is no program in the program
No program error
!67 area or the memory contains an error. Or, reading was attempted
and No data error
of data that was not registered.
When inputting with programming tool software, editing of an
Rewrite during RUN instruction (ED, SUB, RET, INT, IRET, SSTP, and STPE) that
!68
error cannot perform a rewrite during RUN is being attempted.
Nothing is written to the CPU.
!70 SIM over error Program area was exceeded during a program write process.
Exclusive access A command that cannot be processed was executed at the same
!71
control error time as a command being processed.
17-88

17.5 MEWTOCOL-COM Communication Commands
Table of MEWTOCOL-COM commands
Command name Code Description
RC Reads the on and off status of contact.
(RCS) - Specifies only one point.
Read contact area
(RCP) - Specifies multiple contacts.
(RCC) - Specifies a range in word units.
WC Turns contacts on and off.
(WCS) - Specifies only one point.
Write contact area
(WCP) - Specifies multiple contacts.
(WCC) - Specifies a range in word units.
Read data area RD Reads the contents of a data area.
Write data area WD Writes data to a data area.
Read timer/counter set value area RS Reads the value set for a timer/counter.
Write timer/counter set value area WS Writes a timer/counter setting value.
Read timer/counter elapsed value area RK Reads the timer/counter elapsed value.
Write timer/counter elapsed value area WK Writes the timer/counter elapsed value.
Register or Reset contacts monitored MC Registers the contact to be monitored.
Register or Reset data monitored MD Registers the data to be monitored.
Monitors a registered contact or data using the
Monitoring start MG
code “MC or MD”.
Embeds the area of a specified range in a 16-
Preset contact area (fill command) SC
point on and off pattern.
Writes the same contents to the data area of a
Preset data area (fill command) SD
specified range.
Read system register RR Reads the contents of a system register.
Write system register WR Specifies the contents of a system register.
Reads the specifications of the programmable
Read the status of PLC RT
controller and error codes if an error occurs.
Switches the operation mode of the
Remote control RM
programmable controller.
Abort AB Aborts communication.
17-89

17.6 Hexadecimal/Binary/BCD
BCD data
Decimal Hexadecimal Binary data
(Binary Coded Decimal)
0 0000 00000000 00000000 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 0001 00000000 00000001 0000 0000 0000 0001
2 0002 00000000 00000010 0000 0000 0000 0010
3 0003 00000000 00000011 0000 0000 0000 0011
4 0004 00000000 00000100 0000 0000 0000 0100
5 0005 00000000 00000101 0000 0000 0000 0101
6 0006 00000000 00000110 0000 0000 0000 0110
7 0007 00000000 00000111 0000 0000 0000 0111
8 0008 00000000 00001000 0000 0000 0000 1000
9 0009 00000000 00001001 0000 0000 0000 1001
10 000A 00000000 00001010 0000 0000 0001 0000
11 000B 00000000 00001011 0000 0000 0001 0001
12 000C 00000000 00001100 0000 0000 0001 0010
13 000D 00000000 00001101 0000 0000 0001 0011
14 000E 00000000 00001110 0000 0000 0001 0100
15 000F 00000000 00001111 0000 0000 0001 0101
16 0010 00000000 00010000 0000 0000 0001 0110
17 0011 00000000 00010001 0000 0000 0001 0111
18 0012 00000000 00010010 0000 0000 0001 1000
19 0013 00000000 00010011 0000 0000 0001 1001
20 0014 00000000 00010100 0000 0000 0010 0000
21 0015 00000000 00010101 0000 0000 0010 0001
22 0016 00000000 00010110 0000 0000 0010 0010
23 0017 00000000 00010111 0000 0000 0010 0011
24 0018 00000000 00011000 0000 0000 0010 0100
25 0019 00000000 00011001 0000 0000 0010 0101
26 001A 00000000 00011010 0000 0000 0010 0110
27 001B 00000000 00011011 0000 0000 0010 0111
28 001C 00000000 00011100 0000 0000 0010 1000
29 001D 00000000 00011101 0000 0000 0010 1001
30 001E 00000000 00011110 0000 0000 0011 0000
31 001F 00000000 00011111 0000 0000 0011 0001
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
63 003F 00000000 00111111 0000 0000 0110 0011
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
255 00FF 00000000 11111111 0000 0010 0101 0101
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
9999 270F 00100111 00001111 1001 1001 1001 1001
17-90

17.7 ASCII Codes
17-91

17-92

Record of changes
Manual No. Date Desceiption of changes
ARCT1F409E May.2005 First Edition
ARCT1F409E-1 Oct.2005 2nd Edition(PDF only)

New product addition:
AFPX-E30R,AFPX-TR6P,AFPX-EC30,AFPX-EC80
ARCT1F409E-2 Sept.2006 3rd Edition

New product addition:
FP-X Control Unit Transistor Type
FP-X Expansion Unit Transistor Type
ARCT1F409E-3 Apr.2007 4th Edition

New product addition
FP-X communication cassette AFPX-COM5
FP-X communication cassette AFPX-COM6
FP-X Analog output cassette AFPX-DA2
FP-X Analog I/O cassette AFPX-A21
FP-X Thermocouple cassette AFPX-TC2
ARCT1F409E-4 Jan.2008 5th Edition
ARCT1F409E-5 Oct.2008 6th Edition
ARCT1F409E-6 Dec.2008 7th Edition
ARCT1F409E-7 Feb.2009 8th Edition
ARCT1F409E-8 Feb.2010 9th Edition

New product addition
ARCT1F409E-9 Sept.2011 10th Edition

Error correction, Change of corporate name
ARCT1F409E-10 Jul.2013 11th Edition

Error correction, Change of corporate name


Panasonic FP-X Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Panasonic FP-X Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Panasonic FP-X Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ramco National www.PanasonicSensors.

Ramco National www.PanasonicSensors.com 1-800-280-6933

1. Features, Functions and Restrictions ................................................... 1-1

2. Specifications and Functions of Control Unit ...................................... 2-1

3. Expansion Cassette and Expansion FP0 Adapter Specifications ...... 3-1

4. I/O Allocation ........................................................................................... 4-1

5. Installation and Wiring ........................................................................... 5-1

Ramco National www.PanasonicSensors.com 1-800-280-6933

6. Tool Port and USB Port .......................................................................... 6-1

7. Communication Cassette ....................................................................... 7-1

8. Application Cassette............................................................................... 8-1

9. High-speed Counter, Pulse Output and PWM Output Functions (For Tr

11. Security Functions .............................................................................. 11-1

Ramco National www.PanasonicSensors.com 1-800-280-6933

13. Self-Diagnostic and Troubleshooting ............................................... 13-1

14. Precautions During Programming..................................................... 14-1

15. Specifications ..................................................................................... 15-1

16. Dimensions ......................................................................................... 16-1

17. Appendix .............................................................................................. 17-1

Ramco National www.PanasonicSensors.com 1-800-280-6933

Ramco National www.PanasonicSensors.com 1-800-280-6933

Wiring the Power Supply to the Control Unit

Power supply sequence

Before turning on the power

Ramco National www.PanasonicSensors.com 1-800-280-6933

Operation procedure when using FPWIN GR Ver.2

Request concerning program storage

Ramco National www.PanasonicSensors.com 1-800-280-6933

Reference: <Programming Manual ARCT1F313E>

Ramco National www.PanasonicSensors.com 1-800-280-6933

Ramco National www.PanasonicSensors.com 1-800-280-6933

Note: Precautions concerning version upgrade

Panasonic Electric Works website address:

Ramco National www.PanasonicSensors.com 1-800-280-6933

Ramco National www.PanasonicSensors.com 1-800-280-6933

Ramco National www.PanasonicSensors.com 1-800-280-6933

Fulfilling function enhancement

Ramco National www.PanasonicSensors.com 1-800-280-6933

A full range of communication functions

Controlling two devices with RS232C port with one FP-X

1:N communication possible with up to 99 stations (units)

Link with FP2 and FPΣ is possible

Ramco National www.PanasonicSensors.com 1-800-280-6933

Ramco National www.PanasonicSensors.com 1-800-280-6933

Measurement using high-speed counter supported

Positioning control based on pulse output supported

Pulse/direction and clockwise/counter –clockwise output are supported.

Heater control based on PWM output function supported

Analog potentiometer (volume dial)

Realtime clock function can be added

Ramco National www.PanasonicSensors.com 1-800-280-6933

1.2.1 FP-X Control Units

C14 C30 C60

No. of I/O Specifications

AFPX-C30R 16/14 100 to 240 V AC

Transistor type (NPN) (Tr type)

AFPX-C30T 16/14 100 to 240 V AC

Transistor type (PNP) (Tr type)

AFPX-C30P 16/14 100 to 240 V AC